大品注释显示巴利原文
Mahāvaggavaṇṇanā
一、大犍度注释显示巴利原文
1. Mahākhandhakavaṇṇanā
菩提说法注释显示巴利原文
Bodhikathāvaṇṇanā
如今,正是对犍度中隐晦词句等加以辨析阐明的适当时机;
因此,我将以简略摄持的方式,宣说前所未闻的律藏要义。
显示巴利原文 Yaṃ khandhake līnapadādibheda-pakāsanaṃ dāni supattakālaṃ; Tasmā apubbaṃ vinayatthameva, vakkhāmi saṅkhepagahaṇatthaṃ.
于此,“犍度”一词依何义而称?是因诸蕴的集合,如同《分别》一般。那么,那些蕴又是什么呢?是因阐明、开显诸蕴故。此处“蕴”意为:指出家等律仪行事所摄,以及应行、应止之学处所摄的制立。因为出家等是由世尊所制立的,故称为“制立”。而“蕴”一词也见于“木蕴”、“火蕴”、“水蕴”等用法中。由于开显、注释那些名为制立的蕴,故出家犍度等二十种被称为“犍度”;末尾两种因与其相似,如同“时宜”与“戒的时宜”之说,因时宜相似故。再者,此处“部分、聚集”之义也适用,因为那些制立是依部分与聚集而分别的。然而,这些犍度的次第缘由为何?此问并不成立,因为即使以其他方式宣说,也不会逾越其关联。或者,由于进入教法是以出家、受具足戒为前提,故首先宣说包含其义的大犍度。若问由谁宣说?由结集法的长老们。世尊则是依各处所生之事而随宜宣说,并非依此顺序。长老们则依各各所需,将同类者集于一处,按次第诵出。其余诸篇的用意,将于各处自行显明。显示巴利原文
Tattha kenaṭṭhenāyaṃ khandhakoti? Khandhānaṃ samūhattā vibhaṅgo viya. Te pana kathanti? Khandhānaṃ pakāsanato dīpanato. Khandhāti cettha pabbajjādivinayakammasaṅkhātā, cārittavārittasikkhāpadasaṅkhātā ca paññattiyo adhippetā. Pabbajjādīni hi bhagavatā paññattattā ‘‘paññattiyo’’ti vuccanti. Paññattiyañca khandha-saddo dissati ‘‘dārukkhandho aggikkhandho udakakkhandho’’tiādīsu viya. Tesaṃ paññattisaṅkhātānaṃ khandhānaṃ pakāsanato vaṇṇanato pabbajjakkhandhakādayo vīsati ‘‘khandhakā’’ti vuttā, avasāne dve taṃsadisattā velāya sadisattā sīlassa velāti vacanaṃ viya. Apica bhāgarāsatthatāpettha yujjate tesaṃ paññattīnaṃ bhāgato ca rāsito ca vibhattattā. Kiṃ panetesaṃ khandhakānaṃ anupubbakāraṇanti? Nāyaṃ pucchā sambhavati, aññathā vuttesupi tappasaṅgānatikkamanato. Atha vā pabbajjupasampadāpubbaṅgamattā sāsanappavesanassa tadatthasaṅgahako mahākhandhako paṭhamaṃ vutto. Kenāti ce? Dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi. Bhagavatā pana tattha tattha uppannavatthuṃ paṭicca tathā tathā vuttāni, na iminā anukkamena. Therā pana taṃ taṃ payojanaṃ paṭicca samānajātike ekajjhaṃ katvā anukkamena sajjhāyiṃsu. Sesānaṃ payojanaṃ tattha tattheva āvi bhavissati.
“通达犍度者”:意指依制立的部分与聚集之义,而通达那些犍度之义者,即已达到词无碍解彼岸者。这是对那些义理不明的词句所作的注释。为何要如此特别说明?因为其余部分与此相应。此处,对论母与缘起的把握,应知即由对分别句的把握而了知。那些在注释书中已阐明的特定词句之义,若我们在此再度宣说那些特定词句,注释何时才能结束?因此说“依他们义”,这与其指示相符。至于那些原本浅显的圣典文句,又如何能对其作注释?因为并不存在“义理浅显”这回事。若言“依意图与脉络等”之说,此能成立吗?不能,因为此处已用“义”一词摄取了特定词句。那些词句,因为不离义,或以能诠之义,或依义之假借,当知即是“义”。“注释之方法”:所谓注释,因显示对未明说之处的推度取舍次第,故称为“方法”。显示巴利原文
Khandhakovidāti paññattibhāgarāsaṭṭhena nesaṃ khandhatthakovidā, niruttipaṭisambhidāpārappattāti attho. Tesaṃ anuttānatthānaṃ padānaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā. Kasmā panevaṃ visesitanti? Tato sesabhāgā yuttā. Mātikāṭṭhuppattiggahaṇampettha padabhājaniyaggahaṇeneva veditabbaṃ. Yehi atthā yesaṃ padavisesānaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pakāsitā, tesaṃ te padavisese puna idha vadeyyāma, vaṇṇanāya pariyosānaṃ kadā bhave te te attheti vuttaṃ, taṃ tassa niddesena yujjati. Uttānā ceva yā pāḷi, tassā saṃvaṇṇanāya kinti vattabbaṃ? Na hi atthā uttānāti sambhavati. Adhippāyānusandhīhītiādivacanehipi taṃ vacanaṃ sambhavatīti ce? Na, atthaggahaṇena cettha padavisesānaṃ gahitattā. Te hi atthato anapetatthena, abhidhānatthena vā atthopacārena vā atthāti veditabbā. Saṃvaṇṇanānayoti saṃvaṇṇanā nāma avuttesu uhāpohakkamanidassanato ‘‘nayo’’ti vutto.
1 一、优楼频螺:如前述,是因沙堆而得名的村庄,故此处为邻近处所格。为显示其如此存在,而说“于尼连禅河畔”等。否则,便会成为“住于那沙堆中”,且与“入优楼频螺乞食,即往优楼频螺将军镇”等语相违。然而,注释书中仅指出了根本原因。对此,指向彼而说……应见,此为结语。若问此有何用?是为显示:指向村庄时,前述词义得以成立。应知“然而,那个村庄依其邻近而得此名”一语,因未明述而得以成立,故未言说。或者,若“优楼频螺”是前述沙堆之名,则其邻近村庄亦以此命名。此处,具寿优波离长老并非指向村庄而说“住于优楼频螺”,因无村庄作为行境之用。因为当时世尊并非以彼村为行境而住于彼处。故应知,注释书师为欲显示:此处长老是依住于沙堆附近的菩提树下而如此说。因此,应知长老以此三句确定了第二个缘起之处,即显示世尊于远离村庄的林中成就正等觉;否则,三句之说便无意义。其中,“河”者,因流动而行,故为河。本应说“尼蓝阇罗”时,将 la 转为 ra,故说“尼连禅罗”,意为无泥、无苔藓之清净水,或意为青黑水者,此即其河之名。显示巴利原文
1.Uruvelāti yathāvuttavālikarāsivasena laddhanāmako gāmo, tasmā samīpatthe etaṃ bhummaṃ. Tathābhāvadassanatthaṃ ‘‘najjā nerañjarāya tīre’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aññathā tasmiṃ vālikarāsimhi viharatīti āpajjati, ‘‘uruvelaṃ piṇḍāya pāvisīti yena uruvelasenānigamo’’tiādivacanavirodho ca. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana mūlakāraṇameva dassitaṃ. Tattha taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ…pe… daṭṭhabboti nigamanavacanaṃ. Taṃ kimatthanti ce? Gāmaṃ sandhāya yathāvuttapadatthasambhavadassanatthaṃ. ‘‘So pana gāmo tadupacārena evaṃ nāmaṃ labhatī’’ti vacanaṃ pana avuttasiddhanti katvā na vuttanti veditabbaṃ, atha vā yassa ‘‘uruvelā’’ti yathāvuttavālikarāsissa, tassa samīpagāmassapi nāmaṃ. Tattha āyasmā upālitthero na idha gāmaṃ sandhāya ‘‘uruvelāyaṃ viharatī’’ti āha gocaragāmapayojanābhāvato. Na hi bhagavā taṃ gāmaṃ gocaraṃ katvā tadā tattha vihāsi, tasmā ettha vālikarāsissa samīpe bodhirukkhamūle vihāraṃ sandhāya so evamāhāti dassetukāmo aṭṭhakathācariyo evamāhāti veditabbaṃ, tasmā bhagavato gāmato dūratare araññe abhisambodhidīpanena dutiyuppattiṭṭhānaniyamaṃ tīhi padehi akāsi theroti veditabbaṃ, aññathā padattayavacanapayojanābhāvato. Tattha nadantā gacchatīti nadī. Nelañjalāyāti vattabbe la-kārassa ra-kāraṃ katvā ‘‘nerañjarāyā’’ti vuttaṃ, kaddamasevālavirahitattā niddosajalāyāti attho, nīlajalāyāti tassā nāmameva vā etaṃ.
菩提树下:此处,菩提意指正觉。而依《无碍解道》所言“此名为解脱之终”(《无碍解道》1.162),从义理上说,它即是世尊的第四道智。虽然作为其得名之由的第四果智也可说为菩提,但由于完成了应作之事,应知此处菩提正是指那第四道智。正因如此,经文中以“以第三明而证得漏尽智”来显示那第四道智。而在注释书中则说为“觉支”、“菩提分法”。在那里,由于四道中的智被称为“菩提”,故出于以通称叙述的意图,而有“菩提是指四道中的智”(《小尼柯耶·犀角经释义》121)之说,因为此处所指的智也包含于其中。或者,由于经文中未提及世尊的前三道,故唯有第四道智于世尊中生起,世尊并非成为须陀洹等之后才成佛;为避免(产生)其他时段的(误解)之可能,而说“于四(道)”,因为前三道可作为第四道的亲依止缘而生起,从而成就菩提的同义语。依“人也是亲依止缘,住所也是亲依止缘”(《发趣论·缘分别》)之说,应知如同由果为因、能生果的树称为果树一样,以菩提为因的树称为菩提树。在此,“因为菩提纯粹也是树的名字,所以称显示巴利原文
Bodhirukkhamūleti ettha ca bodhi vuccati abhisambodho. So ca atthato bhagavato catutthamaggañāṇaṃ hoti ‘‘vimokkhantikametaṃ nāma’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.162) paṭisambhidāvacanato. Kiñcāpi taṃ nāmakaraṇabhūtaṃ catutthaphalañāṇampi vattuṃ sambhavati, kattabbakiccānaṃ pana karaṇato taṃ catutthamaggañāṇameva ettha bodhīti veditabbaṃ. Teneva pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘tatiyavijjāya āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyā’’ti tadeva dassitaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘bojjhaṅgā’’ti, ‘‘bodhipakkhiyā dhammā’’ti ca. Tattha yasmā catūsu maggesu ñāṇaṃ ‘‘bodhī’’ti vuccati, tasmā sāmaññato vattukāmatādhippāyavasena ‘‘bodhi vuccati catūsu maggesu ñāṇa’’nti (cūḷani. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 121) vuttaṃ idhādhippetañāṇassapi tadantogadhattā. Atha vā pāḷiyaṃ bhagavato ādimaggattayavacanassa vuttaṭṭhānābhāvā catutthamaggañāṇameva bhagavato uppannaṃ, na bhagavā sotāpannādibhāvaṃ patvā buddho jātoti samayantarappasaṅganivāraṇatthaṃ ‘‘catūsū’’ti vuttaṃ ādittayassa catutthaupanissayasambhavena bodhipariyāyasiddhito. ‘‘Puggalopi senāsanampi upanissayapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.9 paccayaniddesa) vacanato phalahetuko phalajanako rukkho phalarukkhoti viya bodhiheturukkho bodhirukkhoti veditabbo. Ettha ‘‘yasmā kevalaṃ bodhīti rukkhassapi nāmaṃ, tasmā bodhī’’ti parato vuttaṃ. Nigrodhādirukkhato assa visesanavacanaṃ pana tadaññabodhimūlappasaṅganivāraṇatthaṃ. Maggañāṇañhi kusalamūlattā bodhi ca taṃ mūlañcāti saṅkhyaṃ labheyya. Paṭhamābhisambuddho nisīdatīti sambandho. Tena abhisambuddhadivasena saddhiṃ aṭṭhāhaṃ ekapallaṅkena nisinnabhāvaṃ dasseti. Ettha eka-saddo tassa nisajjāsaṅkhātassa pabbajjānuyogānurūpassa pallaṅkassa aññena iriyāpathena anantariyabhāvaṃ athassa akopitabhāvaṃ dasseti. Vimuttisukhanti ettha vimuttiyaṃ vā sukhanti na sambhavati. Pañcamajjhānikattā bhagavato phalasamāpattisaṅkhātā vimutti eva anujaṅghanaṭṭhena nibbānasukhanti vimuttisukhaṃ, taṃ samāpajjanena paṭisaṃvedī anubhavanto nisīdi. Veneyyakālānatikkamanato taṃ apekkhamāno nisīdi, na vimuttisukhasaṅgena.
“尔时”是用于开启另一章节的两个不变词。以此显示:并非在感受解脱乐时以意修习缘起,而是从彼(等至)出起后才(修习)。对于已藉由证悟力善加作意的缘起,一再地作意,是因为其甚深而能生喜悦,并非出于开示前所未闻之理的意图。因为世尊对一切法已现量证知而无迷惑,对已证悟的境界(作意),犹如国王视察已征服的领土,能引生前所未有的喜悦。正如所说:“正观法者,生起非人之喜。”(《法句经》373)“夜之初分”是以持续相连之义而用的业格,以此显示其(作意)的分别与多样性。虽然“顺逆作意”被合在一起说,但为了显示是依此顺序,而说“无明缘”等。在此,虽只预期观察流转,但如何得知呢?因为是初分的(所应作);而逆作意则是为了成立顺(观)中缘与缘所生法确实如此。因为唯有无明灭,行才灭,并非其他方式;故这是为了说明:无明是行的缘,而行是彼(无明)的果。同样地,对涅槃的观察,顺作意是为由因灭而成立果灭。在此,涅槃是以其威力而显示,并非仅仅是无明等的灭尽。因此,以“从彼,知缘之灭尽”之语,可成立顺(观)并非所显示巴利原文
Atha khoti adhikārantarārambhe nipātadvayaṃ. Tena vimuttisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedayamāno na paṭiccasamuppādaṃ manasākāsi, kintu tato vuṭṭhāyāti dasseti . Paṭivedhavaseneva sumanasikatassa paṭiccasamuppādassa punappunaṃ manasikaraṇaṃ gambhīrattā assādajananato, na apubbanayadassanādhippāyato. Paccakkhabhūtasabbadhammattā bhagavato asammohato, paṭividdhassa visayato vā manasikaraṇaṃ pana vijitadesapaccavekkhaṇaṃ viya rañño apubbaṃ pītiṃ janeti. Vuttañhi ‘‘amānusī ratī hoti, sammā dhammaṃ vipassato’’ti (dha. pa. 373). Rattiyā paṭhamaṃ yāmanti accantasaṃyogavasena upayogavacanaṃ, tena tassa vikappanānattataṃ dasseti. Kiñcāpi ‘‘anulomapaṭilomaṃ manasākāsī’’ti ekatova vuttaṃ, tathāpi iminā anukkamenāti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘avijjāpaccayā’’tiādi. Tattha ca kiñcāpi pavattimattapaccavekkhaṇā adhippetā kathaṃ paññāyatīti? Paṭhamabhāvāya, paṭilomamanasikaraṇaṃ pana anulome paccayānaṃ, paccayuppannānañca tathābhāvasādhanatthaṃ. Yasmā avijjāya eva nirodhā saṅkhāranirodho, na aññathā, tasmā saṅkhārānaṃ avijjā paccayo, tassā ca saṅkhārā phalanti dīpanato. Tathā nibbānapaccavekkhaṇāya anulomamanasikaraṇaṃ kāraṇanirodhā phalanirodhasādhanatthaṃ. Ettha ca anubhāvato nibbānaṃ dassitaṃ. Na hi taṃ avijjādinirodhamattanti. Tattha ‘‘yato khayaṃ paccayānaṃ avedī’’ti vacanena anulomo nādhippetoti siddhaṃ. Maggapaccavekkhaṇāya vattabbaṃ natthi, ubhayatthapi kiccato, ārammaṇato ca tassa maggassa visayato ca tattha maggo dassito.
此处,若有人说:“'逆观缘起'不合理,因为逆说所指的涅槃不可能成为缘起。”答曰:不然,由于了知其中的义理。所谓“顺逆”,乃是修习的中性词。其义为:他从顺、从逆,以意修习那缘起。否则,便会导致“灭被逆观”的过失。而在此逆观中,应知顺序的确定,是由顺观中的顺序确定而成立的。如此,缘起的逆便是非缘起,这得以成立。因此,注释书中说:“'灭'即'不生'”等。若是这样,则有前后矛盾。如何矛盾?因为“缘”一词,通过果对缘的把握及缘对缘的依存,显示了果朝向生起;故“不生”不可能是缘起。因此,有些论师说:如此以遮遣两者——缘与生起——而说其为非缘起,应知这是它的逆。那是不合理的,因为那会确定它为顺,且无特殊意义。所以,应知“非缘起”才是它的逆。正因如此,世尊在经文中说了缘与缘所生法的灭。在那里,以“无明无余离贪灭故”等,由缘的已断除缘性之力显示缘灭,由果的无所领受缘之力显示缘所生法灭。经中的灭有两种,从义理上即是“不生”,因此注释书中说:“'灭'即'不生'。”如果这样,岂不就成了涅槃仅仅是缘与?”},{显示巴利原文
Tatthāha – ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādaṃ paṭilomaṃ manasākāsī’’ti na yujjati, na hi paṭilomāpadesena niddiṭṭhaṃ nibbānaṃ paṭiccasamuppādo bhavitumarahatīti? Vuccate – na, tadatthajānanato. Anulomapaṭilomanti hi bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ. Anulomato, paṭilomato ca taṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ manasākāsīti hi tattha attho. Aññathā nirodhassa paṭilomappasaṅgāpattiyevāpajjati. Paṭilome ca panetasmiṃ anukkamaniyamo anulome anukkamaniyamato siddhoti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ sati paṭiccasamuppādassa paṭilomo nāma apaṭiccasamuppādoti siddhaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘nirodho hotīti anuppādo hotī’’tiādi. Evaṃ sante pubbāparavirodho hoti. Kathaṃ? Paṭiccāti hi iminā phalassa paccayapariggahena, paccayānañca paccayāyattupagamanena tassa uppādābhimukhabhāvadīpanato asamuppādo na sambhavati, tasmā apaṭiccasamuppādoti evaṃ ubhayapaṭikkhepena panassa paṭilomatā veditabbāti eke. Taṃ ayuttaṃ tassa anulomabhāvaniyamanato, atthātisayābhāvato, tasmā appaṭiccasamuppādo tassa paṭilomoti veditabbaṃ. Teneva bhagavatā pāḷiyaṃ paccayapaccayuppannanirodho vutto. Tattha hi ‘‘avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhā’’ti evaṃ paccayassa samucchinnapaccayabhāvavasena paccayanirodhaṃ, phalassa paccayapaṭiggahābhāvavasena paccayuppannanirodhañca dīpeti. Duvidho pāḷiyaṃ nirodho atthato anuppādo nāma hotīti katvā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘nirodho hotīti anuppādo hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ sante nibbānaṃ paccayapaccayuppannānaṃ nirodhamattanti āpajjatīti ce? Na, tassānubhāvadīpanādhippāyato. Viditavelāyanti manasikatavelāyanti attho, aññathā tato pubbe aviditappasaṅgato.
“禅那者”:在此,虽然通过特相审察而禅修时,菩提分法会显现,或者四圣谛法会显明,但为了显示前行阶段止禅行者等(禅修方式)的差别,故取“所缘审察”之义。虽然取四圣谛法,似乎与随顺缘起的观察角度相违,但应知这是依“知苦者断集”之理而作的。显示巴利原文
Jhāyatoti ettha kāmaṃ lakkhaṇūpanijjhānena jhāyato bodhipakkhiyadhammā pātubhavanti, catuariyasaccadhammā vā pakāsanti, tathāpi pubbabhāge samathādiyānikavibhāgadassanatthaṃ ārammaṇūpanijjhānaggahaṇaṃ. Catusaccadhammaggahaṇaṃ kāmaṃ anulomapaṭiccasamuppādadassanādhikārena virujjhati, tathāpi ‘‘yo dukkhaṃ parijānāti, so samudayaṃ pajahatī’’ti laddhivasena katanti veditabbaṃ.
2 “缘之灭尽”:这是依作用同义语而说。由此显示两种涅槃:缘涅槃与依缘涅槃。虽然它并非只是作缘的灭尽,而且也作缘所生法的灭尽,因而显示了二者的灭,但依“因灭故果灭”而说为“缘之灭尽”。在“所说之法”中,应知第一偈中四圣谛的取义,是依前述方式的逆序而作。显示巴利原文
2.‘‘Paccayakkhayassā’’ti kiccapariyāyavasena vuttaṃ. Tena paccayanibbānaṃ, tadupanissayanibbānañcāti duvidhaṃ nibbānaṃ dassitaṃ hotīti. Kāmañca taṃ na kevalaṃ paccayakkhayamattaṃ karoti, atha kho paccayuppannakkhayampi karoti. Yato ubhinnampi nirodho dassito, tathāpi hetunirodhā phalanirodhoti katvā ‘‘paccayakkhayassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vuttappakārā dhammāti ettha catusaccaggahaṇaṃ paṭhamagāthāyaṃ vuttanayavipallāsena katanti veditabbaṃ.
3 “集灭”之义:在此,集是就作用而言,灭是就所缘作用而言。由此,依其威力而显示两种灭,这便是其含义。由于结跏趺坐之处也被称为“床座”,故证果之处名为“床座”。显示巴利原文
3.Samudayanirodhasaṅkhāto atthoti ettha samudayo kiccavasena, nirodho ārammaṇakiriyāya. Etena dvippakārā nirodhā dassitā honti tassa anubhāvassa vasenāti attho. Yasmā pallaṅkābhujitaṭṭhānañca ‘‘pallaṅko’’ti vuccati, tasmā phalādhigamaṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘pallaṅka’’nti vuttaṃ.
阿阇波罗故事注释显示巴利原文
Ajapālakathāvaṇṇanā
4 “欢悦”:世尊出于利益之心,与那位婆罗门互相欢喜致意。“吠陀之终极”:此处涅槃名为终极。或说“已至吠陀之终极”,即指阿罗汉果。其中,若依第一种解释,因为他是吠陀终极者,所以是已住于梵行者;依第二种解释,因为他是吠陀终极者,所以是已住于梵行者——应作如此结合。虽然对婆罗门已从意义上宣说了与四圣谛相关之法,但考虑到优陀那偈中未提及所证悟,故以“法轮转起”作答。显示巴利原文
4.Sammodīti hitakāmatāya bhagavā tena brāhmaṇena saddhiṃ sammodi. Vedehi antanti ettha nibbānaṃ anto nāma. Vedānaṃ vā antaṃ gatattāti ettha arahattaṃ. Tattha paṭhamena vedantagū yasmā, tasmā eva vusitabrahmacariyo. Dutiyena vedantagū yasmā, tasmā vusitabrahmacariyoti evaṃ yojanā kātabbā. Kiñcāpi brāhmaṇassa catusaccayuttaṃ atthato vuttaṃ, udānagāthāyaṃ vuttapaṭivedhābhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘dhammacakkappavattana’’nti vuccatīti parihāro.
目真邻陀故事注释显示巴利原文
Mucalindakathāvaṇṇanā
5 在目真邻陀事中,“此义”是就现在要说的义理而说。“彼远离”:指依远离。“世间无恼为乐”:以此显示第一道,因为由此断除了对众生以杀害方式生起的嗔恚而成就。“于众生中自制”:以此显示第二道,因为行道之人由于残余嗔恚的减弱,而无伤害之意,故于众生中自制。如是,四道亦依次被摄受。显示巴利原文
5. Mucalindavatthumhi etamatthanti idāni vattabbamatthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Taṃ vivekanti upadhivivekaṃ . ‘‘Abyāpajjaṃ sukhaṃ loke’’ti iminā paṭhamamaggaṃ dasseti tena sattesu māraṇavasena uppajjanakabyāpādappahānasiddhito. ‘‘Pāṇabhūtesu saṃyamo’’ti iminā dutiyamaggaṃ dasseti. Maggī hi puggalo avasiṭṭhabyāpādatanuttavasena pāṇabhūtesu saṃyato hoti vihiṃsādhippāyābhāvato. Evaṃ cattāro hi maggā anukkamenāpi gahitā honti.
王树故事义注显示巴利原文
Rājāyatanakathāvaṇṇanā
6 王树即帕吒厘树。“从四方来”是经文中的省略。据说,在他的口边曾划出四行文字的界限。那些商人因向天神表达敬意,并因亲见世尊的色身而生起清净信心,故而皈依。应知:他们听闻天神说“世尊于王树下初成正觉”之后,便了知此时尚无比丘僧团,但有已证悟的教法。了知此义者即是佛陀——如此衔接。显示巴利原文
6.Rājāyatanaṃ pātali. ‘‘Catuddisā āgantvā’’ti pāṭhaseso. Mukhavaṭṭiyaṃ kirassa dinnānaṃ catunnampi lekhāparicchedo atthi, te vāṇijā devatāya gāravadassanena bhagavato rūpakāyadassanena pasannattā saraṇaṃ aggahesuṃ. Devatāya ‘‘bhagavā rājāyatanamūle paṭhamābhisambuddho’’ti vacanaṃ sutvā sāvakasaṅghābhāvaṃ, abhisambuddhadhammasabbhāvañca jāniṃsūti veditabbaṃ. Jānantīti buddhāti sambandho.
梵天劝请故事义注显示巴利原文
Brahmayācanakathāvaṇṇanā
7 在“我已证得”等句中,“法”指四圣谛法,以其甚深故难见,以其难见故难悟。“寂止”即是寂灭,“微妙”即是无有热恼。此二者唯就出世间法而说。“非寻思所行境”:即不能以寻思、以相伺察而深入,唯凭智慧所能行境,这是它的含义。“唯智者所证”:即已行于正行道的智者所能证知。“一切行之寂止”等,皆指涅槃。因为涅槃虽是一,但依果的近作用而以种种方式宣说。“罗摩”指众生。“随随稀有”即并非稀有。他们曾听闻世尊过去所行之道,或曾证知法的甚深性。世尊的四道本皆是乐行道,但就菩萨道而言,故说“我艰难地”。关于“已开示”,两种读法都存在。“被其他”:即被相应的对象所遮蔽。被贪染者:指被欲贪和见贪所染污者。执取我、常等见者,将不能见,不能观见。显示巴利原文
7.Adhigatokho myāyantiādimhi dhammoti catusaccadhammo, gambhīrattā duddaso. Duddasattā duranubodho. Santoti nibbuto. Paṇītoti atappako. Idaṃ dvayaṃ lokuttarameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Atakkāvacaroti takkena ākāraparivitakkena ogāhitabbo na hoti, ñāṇeneva avacaritabboti attho. Paṇḍitavedanīyoti sammāpaṭipadaṃ paṭipannehi paṇḍitehi vedanīyo. Sabbasaṅkhārasamathotiādi sabbaṃ nibbānameva. Tañhi phalūpacārena ekampi samānaṃ tathā tathā vuccati. Rāmāti pajā. Anu anu acchariyā anacchariyā. Tesaṃ bhagavato pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ sutapubbānaṃ, dhammassa vā gambhīrabhāvaṃ adhigatapubbānaṃ. Kiñcāpi bhagavato cattāropi maggā sukhappaṭipadā, tathāpi bodhisattapaṭipadaṃ sandhāya ‘‘kicchena me’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pakāsitaṃ pakāsitu’’nti ubhayathāpi pāṭho. Paretehi yuttehi. Rāgarattāti kāmarāgadiṭṭhirāgehi rattā. Attaniccādigāhakā na dakkhanti na passissanti.
8 据说,娑婆主发出“这世间确实将灭”的声音,十千世界的梵天们听闻后便前来聚集。在智慧之眼中,由于随眠相续的缘故,只有少许、微细的贪等尘垢,具有如此性质者,称为少尘垢类。“不听闻性”:即因不听闻之故。显示巴利原文
8. Sahaṃpati kira ‘‘nassati vata bho loko’’ti imaṃ saddaṃ tathā nicchāreti, yathā dasasahassilokadhātubrahmāno sutvā sannipatiṃsu. Paññāmaye akkhimhi santānānusayitavasena appaṃ parittaṃ rāgādirajaṃ etesaṃ, evaṃsabhāvāti apparajakkhajātikā. Assavanatāti assavanatāya.
“与有垢的导师们”:即与那些有垢染的导师们。“开启”:即打开这扇不死之门,指圣道或四圣谛法。以三明与四道智,屡屡觉悟、通达。“在岩石上”:即石所成之山上。因离尘垢,故适于善观,犹如具眼之人立于各处,遍观四方众人。你也是善慧者,具足妙慧,为证一切知智而备有遍眼。因战胜一切烦恼之军,故为战胜者;因有能力引导应度众生渡过生之荒漠等,故为商队主;因无欲贪之债,故为无债者。显示巴利原文
Samalehi satthārehi. Apāpuretanti vivara etaṃ. Amatassa dvāranti ariyamaggaṃ, catusaccadhammaṃ vā. Vijjattayacatumaggañāṇehi punappunaṃ buddhaṃ paṭividdhaṃ. Seleti silāmaye. Vigatarajattā sukhadassanayogge ito ca etto ca āgantvā yathā ṭhito cakkhumā puriso samantato janataṃ passeyya. Tvampi sumedha sundarapañña sabbaññutaññāṇādhigamāya samantacakkhu. Sabbakilesasaṅgāmānaṃ vijitattā vijitasaṅgāma. Jātikantārādinittharaṇatthaṃ veneyyajanasatthavāhanasamatthatāya satthavāha. Kāmacchandaiṇassa abhāvato aṇaṇa.
9 以佛眼,亦即知根上下智与知随眠智,此二智名为“佛眼”。“Uppaliniyanti”是指在青莲池中。其余亦如此。“Anto nimuggaposīnī”是指那些沉入水中而得滋养的:其中冒出水面而立的,期盼日光照触,今日即将开花;与水面齐平的,明日将开花;没于水面之下的,后日将开花。随水没入的,也有名为“高茎青莲”等。那些不会开花、将成为鱼鳖之食的,则依巴利语文句引述后加以解释。应将四类人——略知者、广知者、应引导者、文句随行者——与此配合。“Paccabhāsīti”(回答)即反答。显示巴利原文
9.Buddhacakkhunā indriyaparopariyattañāṇena ca āsayānusayañāṇena ca. Imesañhi dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ ‘‘buddhacakkhū’’ti nāmaṃ. Uppaliniyanti uppalavane. Evaṃ sesesupi . Anto nimuggaposīnīti yāni anto nimuggāneva posiyanti, tattha yāni udakaṃ accuggamma ṭhitāni, tāni sūriyaraṃsisamphassaṃ āgamayamānāni ṭhitāni ajja pupphanakāni. Yāni samodakaṃ ṭhitāni, tāni sve pupphanakāni. Yāni udakānuggatāni, tāni tatiyadivase pupphanakāni. Udakā pana anuggatāni aññānipi sarogauppalādīni nāma honti. Yāni neva pupphissanti macchakacchapabhakkhāneva bhavissanti, tāni pāḷināruḷhāni, āharitvā pana dīpetabbāni. Etehi ugghaṭitaññū vipañcitaññū neyyo padaparamoti cattāro puggalā yojetabbā. Paccabhāsīti pati abhāsi.
“Apārutā”(开显)即敞开。这是最后两个词的含义。对于自己所熟知、善能开演的这微妙、最上之法,我因作身、语劳倦之想,故不宣说。显示巴利原文
Apārutāti vivaṭā. Pacchimassa padadvayassa ayamattho. Ahañhi attano paguṇaṃ suppavattampi imaṃ paṇītaṃ uttamaṃ dhammaṃ kāyavācākilamathasaññī hutvā nābhāsi.
五群比丘故事注释显示巴利原文
Pañcavaggiyakathāvaṇṇanā
10 10. 如今应引导一切大众成为信器,“我将满其所愿”。所谓“少尘种姓者”,即因于等至中镇伏烦恼而成为离烦恼种姓者。“他将了知”:若法集者们不作决定,他们便不知律的次第,“我将宣说,他将通达”,此是其意趣。所谓“其头将裂”,那是虚妄的臆度。然而,此言是为了说明他在世间的信解倾向,也是说明由自身的教导而不能了知的状态。为了说明他没有同住弟子等,这是此处的作用。“世尊亦生起智”,即一切智智以其死亡为所缘而生起。以此说明:在此之前他存在时,于法之开示有速疾了知的因缘。也显示了并非从他教而了知,而是现观以死作证。诸佛亦非多智结合,故此言善说。因为心的现行依于心之前行,否则将有新生有情出现的过失。若于一切法作一概取,则有相违时作一概了知的过失,由此一智便成不实的过失。因此,于所证法并非没有多智结合,但因为有无所碍智,故应知世尊即是全知者,而并非于一切时皆为一概了知。若谓这是了知阿罗逻等之死?不然。若由此了知,则凡夫也将达到全知的过失。某法无则某法无,由某法有则成某。显示巴利原文
10. Idāni pana sabbo jano saddhābhājanaṃ upanetu, pūressāmi nesaṃ saṅkappanti. Apparajakkhajātikoti samāpattiyā vikkhambhitakilesattā nikkilesajātiko. Ājānissatīti ce na niṭṭhānamakaṃsu dhammasaṅgāhakā te vinayakkamaññā, ahaṃ deseyyaṃ paṭivijjhissatīti adhippāyo, ‘‘muddhāpi tassa vipateyyā’’ti (a. ni. 8.11; pārā. 2) ettha viya abhūtaparikappo kireso. Loke tassa adhimuttabhāvadīpanatthañhi idaṃ vacanaṃ attano tadupadesena aviditabhāvadīpanatthaṃ. Tassa anantevāsikabhāvadīpanatthanti evamādīni panettha payojanāni. Bhagavatopi kho ñāṇanti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ tassa maraṇārammaṇaṃ uppajji. Tena tato pubbe tassa sati dhammadesanāya khippaṃ jānanabhāvārammaṇanti dīpeti. Paropadesato ajānitvā paccakkhato maraṇasacchikiriyampi dasseti. Buddhānampi anekañāṇasamodhānābhāvato suvuttametaṃ. Cittapubbikā hi cittappavatti, aññathā navasattapātubhāvappasaṅgo. Sabbadhammānaṃ ekato gahaṇe viruddhakālānaṃ ekato jānanappasaṅgo. Tato ekañāṇassa vitathabhāvappattidoso, tasmā sabbassa vinānekañāṇasamodhānaṃ āpajjitadhammesu appaṭihatañāṇavantattā pana sabbaññū eva bhagavāti veditabbaṃ, na sabbakālaṃ ekato. Āḷārādīnaṃ maraṇājānanatoti ce? Na, tassa jānanena puthujjanassāpi sabbaññutāpattippasaṅgato. Yadābhāvena yadābhāvo tabbhāvena tassābhāvappasaṅgo loke siddhoti. ‘‘Bhagavatopi kho ñāṇaṃ udapādī’’ti vacanato tassa maraṇajānanaṃ siddhanti katvā bhavaṃ mateneva bhagavā sabbaññūti siddhaṃ na devatārocanato pubbe ajānanatoti ce? Na, visesaṃ pariggahetvā antarā pajānanato, devatāya sabbaññubhāvappattidosato ca. Na hi so kassaci vacanena aññāsīti.
又,此处所谓了知是什么,是生起以彼为所缘之智吗?不然,则有世间无究竟全知者的过失。因为我于一刹那以一智了知一切,以及其余诸法与其余诸智的生起。又,若全知者于一切法境成就智之现起,那么该智以自身为非境吗?不然,由显示因缘之生起故。又,“世尊亦生起智”于此有特说,由此可知世尊之智唯于天神宣告之后时生起。并非仅由言辞之先后便有彼义之先后,故此不相应。所谓“初夜命终”,即于初夜命终。或说“于中夜”。这两处皆为“大损耗”。于七日之内及一日之内,从所证之道果退失故,大损耗即大灾患,其中阿罗逻生于无所有处,优陀罗生于第四禅,故世尊作如是思惟,是针对他们于说法的非时出生,而非针对从这人世间死亡,应如是知。这是针对未觉悟之状态,而非逻辑推论,否则将有不希求之过,阿阇梨说。显示巴利原文
Apica kimidaṃ tattha jānanaṃ nāma tadārammaṇañāṇuppattīti ce? Na, loke sabbaññuno accantābhāvappasaṅgato. Sādhikā hi mayā ekañāṇakkhaṇe sabbaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tadaññesañca tadaññāṇānuppatti. Apica sabbaññuno sabbadhammavisaye ñāṇapaccupaṭṭhānasiddhi tassa ñāṇassa attanāva attano avisayoti ce? Na, hetunidassanānuppattito. Apica ‘‘bhagavatopi kho ñāṇaṃ udapādī’’ti ettha visesavacanaṃ atthi. Yena devatārocanuttarakālameva bhagavato ñāṇaṃ udapādīti paññāyati. Na hi vacanapubbāpariyabhāvamattena tadatthapubbāpariyatā hoti, tasmā ayuttametaṃ. Abhidosakālaṃkatoti paṭhamayāme kālaṃkato. ‘‘Majjhimayāme’’tipi vadanti. Ubhayatthapi mahājāniyo. Sattadivasabbhantare, ekadivasabbhantare ca pattabbamaggaphalato parihīnattā mahatī jāni assāti mahājāni. Tesu hi dvīsu āḷāro ākiñcaññāyatanabhave nibbatto, udako bhavagge, tasmā nesaṃ dhammadesanāya akkhaṇe nibbattabhāvaṃ sandhāya bhagavā evaṃ cintesi, na ito manussalokato cutibhāvaṃ sandhāyāti veditabbaṃ. Abuddhaveneyyatañca sandhāyāti no takko, aññathā aniṭṭhappasaṅgoti ācariyo.
菩萨出生时,有八位婆罗门接受梦兆及把握相好。其中三人分两路记别说:“具这些相者,若居家则为转轮圣王,若出家则为佛陀。”五位婆罗门则一向记别说:“不住居家,唯为佛陀。”其中前三人随顺咒语之究竟。而此(五人)超越了咒语之究竟,舍弃自己所得之大功德,专为菩萨更早出家。指他们而说为“五群”。亦有说“他们之子”,此于注释中被破斥。为何世尊此处思惟“他们对我多所饶益”?是否只对饶益者宣说此法,不对其他人宣说?不,他并非不宣说。注释之理乃是仅由忆念饶益而说。为了显示自己知恩报恩之德,为了赞叹知恩等功德,为了使他人结合知恩等德行,为了防止速疾了知之过患。显示巴利原文
Bodhisattassa jātakāle supinapaṭiggāhakā ceva lakkhaṇapariggāhakā ca aṭṭha brāhmaṇā. Tesu tayo dvidhā byākariṃsu ‘‘imehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgato agāraṃ ajjhāvasanto rājā hoti cakkavatti, pabbajanto buddho’’ti. Pañca brāhmaṇā ‘‘agāre na tiṭṭhati, buddhova hotī’’ti ekaṃsabyākaraṇāva ahesuṃ. Tesu purimā tayo yathāmantapāraṃ gatā. Ime pana mantapāraṃ atikkamantā attanā laddhaṃ puññamahattaṃ vissajjetvā bodhisattaṃ uddissa puretarameva pabbajiṃsu. Ime sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘pañcavaggiyā’’ti. ‘‘Tesaṃ puttā’’tipi vadanti, taṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ. Kasmā panettha bhagavā ‘‘bahūpakārā kho me’’ti cintesi. Kiṃ upakārakānaṃ eva esa dhammaṃ deseti, itaresaṃ na desetīti? No na deseti. Upakārānussaraṇamattakeneva vuttanti aṭṭhakathānayo. Attano kataññukatavedibhāvappakāsanatthaṃ, kataññutādipasaṃsanatthaṃ, paresañca kataññubhāvādiniyojanatthaṃ, khippajānanappasaṅganivāraṇatthaṃ.
11 在伽耶与菩提之间:意即位于伽耶与菩提树之间、相距三伽乌达处。菩提道场距离伽耶三伽乌达,巴拉纳西城则相距十八由旬。优波迦便是在这菩提道场与伽耶之间的路上遇见世尊的。由于与“之间”一词搭配,此处使用了宾格。在此类情形中,文法家仅使用一个“之间”,然其义应同时连接第二个词;若不作连接,便无法构成宾格。而此处正是连接之后才如此说的。显示巴利原文
11.Antarā ca gayaṃ antarā ca bodhinti gayāya ca bodhiyā ca majjhe tigāvutantare ṭhāne. Bodhimaṇḍato hi gayā tīṇi gāvutāni. Bārāṇasinagaraṃ aṭṭhārasa yojanāni. Upako pana bodhimaṇḍassa ca gayāya ca antare bhagavantaṃ addasa. Antarā-saddena pana yuttattā upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ. Īdisesu ca ṭhānesu akkharacintakā ekameva antarāsaddaṃ payujjanti, so dutiyapadepi yojetabbo. Ayojiyamāne pana upayogavacanaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Idha pana yojetvāva vuttoti.
“征服一切者”:指征服了三界一切诸法而安住者。“渴爱灭尽”:即于涅槃中灭尽。“解脱”:指从所缘中解脱。“无有与我等同者”:即没有能与我等同的人,意谓无与伦比;或者说,在世间找不到能指出我一切知智的过失并与之抗衡者,亦即没有我的敌对者。“我将击响不死法鼓”:即“我将为令众生获得法眼而击响不死之鼓”,于是前行。显示巴利原文
Sabbābhibhūti sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhammaṃ abhibhavitvā ṭhito. Taṇhakkhayeti nibbāne. Vimuttoti ārammaṇato vimutto. Natthi me paṭipuggaloti mayhaṃ paṭipuggalo nāma natthi, asadisoti attho, mama sabbaññubhāve dosaṃ dassetvā loke ṭhātuṃ asamatthatāya mama paccatthikapuggalo vā natthīti attho. Āhañchaṃ amatadundubhinti dhammacakkhupaṭilābhāya amatabheriṃ paharissāmīti gacchāmi.
“你应成为”:意为“你适合成为、堪为无边的胜利者”,这也是他对自身师长之称谓。“愿成为”:意为“朋友,愿你也成为这样”。“离开了”:指他前往名为弯行者的国度。世尊观察到他(优波迦)的因缘已然成就,心想:“他在那里会因猎人之女与弓而生起厌离,随后再来此处,将成为不还者”,于是便与他交谈。后来他确实如此归来,出家后证得不还果,渐次命终后生于无烦天,并于彼处证得阿罗汉。显示巴利原文
Arahasi anantajino bhavituṃ yutto tvanti attho. Idampi attano satthunāmaṃ. Hupeyyāsīti āvuso evampi nāma bhaveyya. Pakkāmīti vaṅkahārajanapadaṃ nāma agamāsi. Bhagavāpi ‘‘tattha tassa migaluddakassa dhītuyā cāpāya ukkaṇṭhitvā puna āgantvā anāgāmī ayaṃ bhavissatī’’ti upanissayasampattiṃ disvā tena saddhiṃ ālapi. So ca tathevāgantvā pabbajitvā anāgāmī hutvā anukkamena kālaṃ katvā avihesu uppajjitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi.
12 “他们约定”:意指他们达成了协议。“偏离精勤者”:指从精勤中退堕、失败的人。“你们记得曾说过这话吗?”“话确实是说过的”:此意指他未曾说过任何这类不同的言辞。“他们渴望听闻世尊”:即他们想要聆听世尊的言教。“了知”:即知道、理解的意思。显示巴利原文
12.Saṇṭhapesunti katikaṃ akaṃsu. Padhānavibbhantoti padhānato bhaṭṭho parihīno. ‘‘Abhijānātha nu bhāsitameta’’nti, ‘‘vācaṃ bhāsitameva’’nti ca evarūpaṃ kañci vacanabhedaṃ akāsīti adhippāyo. Bhagavantaṃ sussūsiṃsūti bhagavato vacanaṃ sotukāmā ahesuṃ. Aññāti aññāya, jānitunti attho.
13 那么,世尊为何要称呼他们呢?是为了让他们更善巧地承认,为了显示法的无比难得性,也为了防止他们打断言辞。此处所说的“二”,指两种极端,是双数词,因为其余内容也都含摄于这两者之中。再从关联的角度来看,所谓渴爱与无明,是令轮回运转的两种首要烦恼。它们因为是止与观的对立面,故称为“端”。其中,因渴爱而沉溺于欲乐行的愚者会退失止;同样,因无明而沉溺于自我折磨行的愚者会退失观。因此,不舍弃这两种极端,便不能证得不死,这是如此说的。再者,这也是为了显示断除昏沉与掉举。因为昏沉者舍弃精进努力而沉溺于欲乐,而过度精进者则沉溺于自我折磨。这两者都与精进的平衡相对立,故称为“端”。再者,教法中说了三种行道:粗重行、烧灼行与中道行。其中,粗重行如“他是杀生者,于诸欲中无过”等;烧灼行如“他是裸行者,行为放逸”等;中道行如“这就是圣八支道”等。其中,欲乐行即是粗重行,因为它是一切不善的根源;自我折磨行即是烧灼行,因为它烧灼自己。这两者都因与中道行相对立而称为“端”,因此正是针对它们而说“二”。世尊为何说“出家人”显示巴利原文
13. Atha kimatthaṃ āmantesīti? Tatopi suṭṭhutaraṃ paṭijānanatthaṃ, dhammassa abhibhāriyadullabhabhāvadīpanatthaṃ, akkharavikkhepanivāraṇatthañca. Tattha dvemeti antadvayavacanaṃ aññesampi tadantogadhabhāvato. Apica yojanāvasena. Taṇhāavijjāti hi saṃsārappavattiyā sīsabhūtā dve kilesā. Te ca samathavipassanānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtattā antā nāma. Tesu taṇhāvasena kāmasukhallikānuyogaṃ bhajanto samathaṃ parihāpeti bālo, tathā avijjāvasena attakilamathānuyogaṃ bhajanto gacchanto vipassananti na sakkā ubho dve ante appahāya amataṃ adhigantunti evaṃ vuttā. Apica līnuddhaccapahānadassanametaṃ. Līno hi nikkhittavīriyārambho kāmasukhañca bhajati, itaro accāraddhavīriyo attakilamathaṃ. Ubhopi te vīriyasamatāya paṭipakkhattā antā nāma. Apica tisso sāsane paṭipadā vuttā āgāḷhā, nijjhāmā, majjhimā ca. Tattha āgāḷhā ‘‘pāṇātipātī hoti, natthi kāmesu doso’’ti evamādikā. Nijjhāmā ‘‘acelako hoti, muttācāro’’ti evamādikā, majjhimā ‘‘ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti evamādikā. Tattha kāmasukhallikānuyogo āgāḷhā nāma paṭipadā hoti sabbākusalamūlattā. Attakilamathānuyogo nijjhāmā nāma attajjhāpanato. Ubhopete majjhimāya paṭipadāya paṭipakkhabhūtattā antā nāma, tasmā imeva sandhāya dvemeti. Kimatthaṃ bhagavā ‘‘pabbajitena na sevitabbā’’ti pabbajite eva adhikaroti, na gahaṭṭheti? Pabbajitānaṃ tadadhimuttattā, sukhaparivajjanasamatthatāya, tadadhikatattā ca pabbajitā ettha adhikatā, na gahaṭṭhā. Yadi evaṃ kimatthaṃ kāmasukhallikānuyogamāha, nanu te pakatiyāpi kāmapariccāgaṃ katvā taṃ nissaraṇatthaṃ pabbajitāti? Na, tesaṃ antadvayanissitattā. Te hi idha loke kāmena visuddhimicchanti attakilamathānuyogamanuyuttā tasseva tapassa phalena pecca dibbe kāme āsīsamānā daḷhataraṃ kāmasukhallikānuyogamanuyuttāti veditabbā . Antattho pana idha kucchitaṭṭhena veditabbo ‘‘antamidaṃ, bhikkhave, jīvikānaṃ, yadidaṃ piṇḍolya’’ntiādīsu (itivu. 91; saṃ. ni. 3.80) viya.
此中所谓“于诸欲中,欲乐随行”的“诸欲”,是指所缘欲,其次为烦恼欲。与此相应的乐,在此称为欲乐,以此显示异熟乐并无过失。“附着”是指对此的欢喜。“随行”是指于他生中对此随行的希求。因其令善法退减,为下劣之人所修习,从下劣界生起,故以鄙劣之义称为“下劣”。因为是村落住民的众生法,故称为“鄙俗”。因为是凡夫所共通的,故称为“凡夫法”。“非圣”应知是由非圣者所认可、是圣法的对立、造作非圣、是非圣法、非圣者所行。由于带来名为无义的轮回怖畏,产生无义之果,故称为“与无义相连”。唯令自身遭受疲惫,名为“自我折磨”。此基于先前见取的邪见而生起,以苦行精进等特殊行为辗转,随顺彼见而行,故称为“自我折磨随行”。因其与自我分离、损耗精力,以非方便而行,正修之时便堕入畜生、牛、狗、猪等生中;成熟之时则引入地狱,故称为“与无义相连”。“这些呢”意为“这些却”。“由如来”是显示如来无颠倒地证达,以此表明:“并非仅凭我的思惟,而是由我如来自身以现等觉智所现等觉。”显示巴利原文
Yo cāyaṃ kāmesu kāmasukhallikānuyogoti ettha kāmesūti vatthukāmo adhippeto, dutiyo kilesakāmo . Taṃsampayuttasukhamettha kāmasukhaṃ nāma. Tena vipākasukhassa niravajjabhāvaṃ dīpetīti. Allīyanaṃ nāma tadabhinandanā. Anuyogo nāma bhavantare tadanuyogapatthanā. Hānabhāgiyakarattā kusalapakkhassa, hīnapuggalabhāvitattā, hīnadhātupabhavattā ca lāmakaṭṭhena hīno. Gāmanivāsisattadhammattā gammo. Puthujjanasādhāraṇattā pothujjaniko. Anariyoti ariyānaṃ anadhippetattā, ariyadhammapaṭipakkhattā, anariyakarattā, anariyadhammattā, anariyāciṇṇattā ca veditabbo. Anatthasaṅkhātasaṃsārabhayāvahattā, anatthaphalanibbattakattā ca anatthasaṃhito. Attano kevalaṃ khedūpagamo attakilamatho nāma. So diṭṭhigatapubbakattatapānukkamakiriyāvisesaṃ nissāya pavattati, tassa diṭṭhivasena anuyogo attakilamathānuyogo nāma. Attaviyogavittāparissamattā, anupāyapavattattā sampajjamāno migayonigoyonikukkurayonisūkarayonīsu pātāyati. Vipaccamāno narakaṃ netīti anatthasaṃhito. Ete tvāti ete tu. Tathāgatenāti attānaṃ avitathāgamanaṃ āvi karoti, tenetaṃ dasseti ‘‘na mayā parivitakkitamattena vitakkitā, kintu mayā tathāgateneva satā abhisambodhiñāṇena abhisambuddho’’ti. Cakkhukaraṇītiādīhi pana tameva paṭipadaṃ thometi. Bhesajjaṃ āturassa viya ‘‘cakkhukaraṇī’’ti iminā ñāṇacakkhuvisodhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Ñāṇakaraṇīti iminā andhakāravidhamanaṃ vuttaṃ. Upasamāyāti kilesapariḷāhapaṭippassaddhi vuttā. Abhiññāyāti saccapaṭivedhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Sambodhāyāti saccapaṭivijjhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Nibbānāyāti sopādisesanibbānadhātuyā anupādisesanibbānadhātuyāti evaṃ yathāsambhavaṃ yojetvā kathetabbaṃ.
14 然而,世尊为何在此没有像在别处那样次第说法,而是先宣说两种不应修习的极端,然后才开示中道呢?这是为了遮止以自我为首的邪慢,以及遮止对邪道的修行。在宣说应远离两种极端之后,为了显示自身证得殊胜的方式,他开示了非勤修等形式,也为了通过开示他们的中道而令其趣入,之后才开示正行道。其次,为了显示那称为中道的圣道境界,世尊欲以略说和广说的方式开示四谛法,故说:“诸比丘,此是苦……”等语,应知这便是此处的文句衔接。据说,憍陈如听闻世尊所说的行道后,心想:“世尊所说的行道如何能生起呢?因为,此行道只有在烦恼不生起时才可能存在,否则不然。而烦恼若从贪而生,犹如饥渴,那么通过修习彼行,烦恼可能不生起;或者对于处于彼状态者,烦恼可能生起。通过修习与此状态相反的自我折磨,烦恼可能不生起。这两者都被世尊称为‘极端’,那么,此正行道又如何能生起呢?”世尊对此的回答是:由于不修习非方便。何以故?——显示巴利原文
14. Kasmā panettha bhagavā aññattha viya anupubbiṃ kathaṃ akathetvā paṭhamameva asevitabbamantadvayaṃ vatvā majjhimapaṭipadaṃ desesīti? Attādimicchābhimānanivāraṇatthaṃ, kummaggapaṭipattinivāraṇatthañca antadvayavajjanaṃ vatvā attano visesādhigamadīpananayena abāhullikādibhāvadassanatthaṃ, tesañca majjhimapaṭipadādīpanena tattha anuyojanatthaṃ pacchā sammāpaṭipadaṃ desesi, tato tassa majjhimapaṭipadāsaṅkhātassa ariyamaggassa visayadassanatthaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ saṅkhepavitthāravasena desetukāmo ‘‘idaṃ kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkha’’ntiādimāha, ayamettha anusandhi. ‘‘Idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccanti me, bhikkhave’’tiādi suttānusandhipakaāsanatthaṃ ayamanukkamo veditabbo. Yathāvuttaṃ paṭipadaṃ sutvā kira koṇḍañño āha ‘‘kathaṃ bhagavatā vuttapaṭipadāya uppatti siyā. Ayañhi paṭipadā kilesānaṃ anuppattiyā sati sambhavati, na aññathā. Kilesānañca yadi lobhato uppatti khuppipāsānaṃ viya, tadāsevanāya anuppatti siyā, tadavatthussa vā tesaṃ uppatti. Tadavatthuviparītakāyakilamathāsevanāya anuppatti siyā. Ubhopetā bhagavatā ‘antā’ti vuttā, tasmā kathaṃ panetissāya sammāpaṭipadāya uppatti sambhaveyyā’’ti. Bhagavā āha anupāyāsevanato. Kathanti ce? –
了知轮回之根本,并以此智断轮回;
命存则智存,而此生命正是智的资具。
“因此,智者当为成就智慧而守护自己的生命;
并应护持作为智慧资具的戒。”
“正如世间,身体坏灭之时,生命便不复存在;
同样地,戒毁坏者,无有智的生起。
因此,具念者为成就智,守护寿命与戒;
不应亲近诸欲,亦不应毁伤身体。
沉溺诸欲而趋入,便成下劣、鄙俗,
愚痴者贫乏无财,却走向自我折磨;
有人证入殊胜中道,
他便迅速证得殊胜的解脱。
听闻了善逝的此言后,
那位牟尼证得了闻所生的智慧;
进入思所成智,
断除之后,他问了这个问题。
“舍弃了通达的近因——那可怕的苦行,”
你问:“苦行是怎样的?”
请说,比丘,那正是你的行持,
他趋向离欲,也趋向苦谛。
憍陈如听罢牟尼之语,
欢喜起立,急忙说道:
“世尊,请您为我开示此事:
比丘如何见苦谛。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Saṃsāramūlato ñāṇaṃ, tañca ñāṇā pahiyyati; Jīvite sati taṃ hoti, tañca jīvitasādhane. ‘‘Tasmā ñāṇāya medhāvī, rakkhe jīvitamattano; Ñāṇasādhanabhūtañca, sīlañca paripālaye. ‘‘Jīvitañca yathā loke, bhinne kāye na vijjati; Tatheva bhinnasīlassa, natthi ñāṇassa sambhavo. ‘‘Tasmā āyuñca sīlañca, ñāṇatthaṃ rakkhatā satā; Sevitabbā na kāmāpi, nāpi kāyavināsanā. ‘‘Kāmesu gedhamupagamma hino gammañca, Accuddhano kilamathaṃ gamupeti mūḷho; Yo majjhimaṃ paṭipadaṃ paramaṃ upeti, So khippameva labhate paramaṃ vimokkha’’nti. Sutvā tadetaṃ sugatassa vākyaṃ, Paññaṃ munī so sutajaṃ labhitvā; Cintāmayaṃ ñāṇa pavesamāno, Ucchindayaṃ pañhamimaṃ apucchi. ‘‘Nibbedhapadaṭṭhānaṃ pahāya ghoraṃ, Tapaṃ kathamivāti so tvaṃ; Brūhi tadeva hoti bhikkhu cara, Virāgamupayāti ca dukkhasaccassa; Dassaneneva dukkhānubhavanā, Tamhi dosassa paccayo’’ti. Sutvāva koṇḍañño munivacanaṃ, Vuṭṭhāya haṭṭho sahasā avoca; ‘‘Udāhara tvaṃ bhagavā mametaṃ, Bhikkhu yathā passati dukkhasacca’’nti.
据说,世尊因此经而说:“由此应知,思所成慧圆满即是修所成慧的成就。”为何世尊不先为憍陈如详尽开示四谛,而宣说自己证悟的次第呢?是为了显示:“我不为任何人传授传承,而是我自己如此证得。”其中,“于前所未闻的法中”显示了两种含义:这并非我从阿罗逻、优陀迦处听闻的法,而是于前所未闻之中,我生起了智,由此阐明中道的威力。再者,为说明如此行道者即使不依靠他人教导也能证见圣谛,故说:“你们为何不依我的教导而见呢?”显示巴利原文
Cintāmayissa paññāparipuṇṇā bhāvanāmayipaññāsampatti jānitabbā imehi iti bhagavā suttamidamāhāti kira. Kasmā bhagavā koṇḍaññassa purimameva saccadesanaṃ avaḍḍhetvā attano adhigatakkamamāhāti? Nāhaṃ kassaci āgamaṃ desemi, apica kho sayameva evamadhigatomhīti dassanatthaṃ. Tattha ‘‘pubbe ananussutesu dhammesū’’ti iminā idaṃ atthadvayaṃ dasseti, na mayā āḷārato, udakato vā ayaṃ dhammo suto, kintu pubbe ananussutesveva ñāṇaṃ me udapādīti majjhimāya paṭipadāya ānubhāvaṃ pakāseti. Apica yasmā evaṃ paṭipanno vināpi paropadesena ariyasaccāni passati, tasmā kathaṃ tumheva mamāpadesena na passathāti.
15 “眼”等五词,皆是智的同义词。由于智照明诸谛,故名“眼”;由于了知已生起的真实义,故名“智”;由于以种种方式了知,故名“慧”;由于破除烦恼、觉了,故名“明”;由于破坏覆盖诸谛的黑暗,开显诸谛的究竟边际,故应知为“光”。其中,第一转显示安立诸谛互不混杂的慧;第二转显示决断应作之相的慧;第三转显示于诸谛中智的作用圆满。显示巴利原文
15.Cakkhuntiādīni pañca padāni ñāṇavevacanāneva. Ñāṇañhi saccānaṃ ālocanato cakkhubhūtatthajānanato ñāṇaṃ. Pakārehi jānanato paññā. Kilesavidāraṇato, vijjanato ca vijjā. Saccacchādakatamavināsanato, tesaṃ gatikoṭipakāsanato ālokoti veditabbaṃ. Tattha paṭhamena parivaṭṭena saccānaṃ aññamaññaṃ asaṅkarato ṭhapanapaññaṃ dasseti, dutiyena tesaṃ kattabbākāraparicchindanapaññaṃ, tatiyena saccesu ñāṇakiccasanniṭṭhānaṃ dasseti.
16 “Yāvakīvañca”是以两个词表达“yāva icc eva”,如同“iti cittamano”等。不被贪等所动故,是不动解脱。“Veyyākaraṇa”指说法。因为说法能解释、阐明诸法,故称为“记说”。“Virajaṃ vītamalaṃ”中,virajaṃ是远离不平等因论故;vītamalaṃ是远离无因论故。virajaṃ是断除常见故;vītamalaṃ是断除断见故。virajaṃ是断除缠缚烦恼故;vītamalaṃ是断除随眠烦恼故。“法眼”指唯见诸法,不见其中有众生、命者、作者或受者,因此说:“凡任何集起之法,彼一切即灭尽之法。”这是为了说明法眼生起的行相。法眼以灭为所缘,唯依作用现观诸行而生起。显示巴利原文
16.Yāvakīvañcāti dvīhi padehi yāvaicceva vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘iti cittamano’’tiādi viya. Rāgādīhi akuppatāya akuppā vimutti. Veyyākaraṇanti dhammadesanā. Sā hi dhammānaṃ byākaraṇato pakāsanato ‘‘veyyākaraṇa’’nti vuccati. Virajaṃ vītamalanti ettha virajaṃ visamahetuvādavigamato. Vītamalaṃ ahetukavādavigamato. Virajaṃ sassatadiṭṭhippahānato. Vītamalaṃ ucchedadiṭṭhippahānato. Virajaṃ pariyuṭṭhānappahānato. Vītamalaṃ anusayappahānato. Dhammacakkhunti dhammamattadassanaṃ, na tattha satto vā jīvo vā kārako vā vedako vāti, tenevāha ‘‘yaṃ kiñci samudayadhammaṃ, sabbantaṃ nirodhadhamma’’nti. Idañhi tassa dhammacakkhussa uppattiākāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tañhi nirodhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā kiccavasena eva saṅkhataṃ paṭivijjhantaṃ uppajjati.
17 第十七,“法轮”在此处意指说法之智,同时也包含证悟之智。此处诸天为何发出“善哉”之声?他们说:因为驱散了种种邪见之黑暗而获得光明,因为超越了恶趣之怖畏而得安稳,因为见到了天宫而喜悦踊跃——类似这些便是原因。有些人说,大地震动并发出大音声,是法性自然如此。另一些人则说,大地震动是由于诸天想要嬉戏,由于众多天众聚集,也由于世尊身体放出光网。显示巴利原文
17.Dhammacakkanti ettha desanāñāṇaṃ adhippetaṃ, paṭivedhañāṇañca labbhateva. Ettha kimatthaṃ devā saddamanussāvesunti? Nānādiṭṭhigatandhakāravidhamanato laddhālokattā, apāyabhayasamatikkamanato assāsaṃ pattattā, devakāyavimānadassanato pītipāmojjacalitattā cāti evamādīnettha kāraṇāni vadanti. Pathavikampanamahāsaddapātubhāvo ca dhammatāvaseneva hotīti eke. Devatānaṃ kīḷitukāmatāya pathavikampo. Bahuno devasaṅghassa sannipātato, bhagavato sarīrappabhājālavisajjanato cāti ekacce.
18 第十八,“出家与具足戒的差别”是此处所指的含义。其中,“iti”一词,是表示他获得“善来比丘”具足戒的因缘语到此结束,因为他的比丘身份即以那句话为告终。“善说”等语,则是为了显示“善来”这一召唤的目的而说。句义的关联是:世尊说“善来,比丘”,又说“法已善说,修……圆满……”。其中,“修梵行”指的是证得其余三道的梵行。目的是什么?是为了“作苦之究竟边际”。“善来比丘”一语,因世尊此言而成就,故以因由代称,说为“善来比丘具足戒”。其含义是:那位尊者终其一生即以此具足戒作为具足戒。因此,在注释书中显示了这双重含义:他的这种具足戒不会因舍戒等而中断,也不需要其他具足戒的作用。在八种具足戒中,善来比丘、受教诫、答问、受持八敬法这四种具足戒,受具者不会中断,也不需要其他具足戒的作用;其余四种则有中断的可能。然而,诸部论师说:“佛与独觉佛的入决定具足戒,以及将白四甘马具足戒分为十众所作和五众所作两种,共为十种具足戒。”那么在此处,从意义上说,什么是具足戒呢?它是由证得彼法之行所生起的无学五蕴,是由随顺忍可之思所修习的内在相续。显示巴利原文
18. Pabbajjupasampadāvisesanti attho. Tattha iti-saddo tassa ehibhikkhūpasampadāpaṭilābhanimittavacanapariyosānadassano. Tadavasāno hi tassa bhikkhubhāvo. Svākkhātotiādi ‘‘ehī’’ti āmantanāya payojanadassanavacanaṃ. ‘‘Ehibhikkhū’’ti bhagavā avoca ‘‘svākkhāto dhammo cara…pe… kiriyāyā’’ti ca avocāti padasambandho. Tattha cara brahmacariyanti avasiṭṭhaṃ maggattayabrahmacariyaṃ samadhigaccha. Kimatthaṃ? Sammādukkhassantakiriyāyāti attho. ‘‘Ehibhikkhū’’ti iminā bhagavato vacanena nipphannattā kāraṇūpacārena ‘‘ehibhikkhūpasampadā’’ti vuttā. Sāva tassāyasmato yāvajīvaṃ upasampadā ahosīti attho. Tena tassā upasampadāya sikkhāpaccakkhātādinā vicchedā vā tadaññāya upasampadāya kiccaṃ vā natthīti idamatthadvayaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ dasseti. Aṭṭhannampi upasampadānaṃ ehibhikkhuovādapaṭiggahaṇapañhabyākaraṇagarudhammapaṭiggahaṇūpasampadānaṃ catunnaṃ aññatarāya upasampannassa antarā vicchedo vā tadaññūpasampadāya kiccaṃ vā natthi, itarassatthīti. Nikāyantarikā panāhu ‘‘buddhapaccekabuddhānaṃ niyāmokkantisaṅkhātāya upasampadāya ñatticatutthakammupasampadañca dasavaggapañcavaggakaraṇīyavasena dvidhā bhinditvā dasavidhopasampadā’’ti. Kā panettha atthato upasampadā nāmāti? Tadadhigatakiriyāvasena nibbattiyā asekkhā tadadhivāsanacetanāya paribhāvitapañcakkhandhikā ajjhattasantati. Kā panettha paribhāvanā nāma? Tabbipakkhadhammajjhācāraviruddhabhāvo, tassa pattiyā tāya paribhāvanāya vasena katthaci ‘‘samannāgato’’ti vuccati. Yathāha ‘‘lobhena samannāgato, bhikkhave, abhabbo cattāri satipaṭṭhānāni bhāvetu’’ntiādi. Etthāhu nikāyantarikā ‘‘yathāvuttāya upasampadāya pattisaṅkhāto cittavippayutto saṅkhārakkhandhapariyāpanno dhammo atthi, tassa santativasena pubbāpariyaṃ uppajjamānassa yāva avicchedo, tāva upasampannoti, aññathā tato dhammantaruppattikkhaṇe tassa upasampannassa anupasampannabhāvappasaṅgo āpajjatī’’ti. Te vattabbā ‘‘suttaṃ āharathā’’ti. Te ce vadeyyuṃ ‘‘yo tesaṃ dasannaṃ asekkhānaṃ dhammānaṃ upādāya paṭilābhasamannāgamo ariyo hoti vippahīnoti evamādīni no suttānī’’ti. Evaṃ sati asantadhammehi, parasattehi ca samannāgamadosappasaṅgo nesaṃ pāpuṇāti. Kiṃkāraṇaṃ? Suttasambhavato. Yathāha – ‘‘rājā, bhikkhave, cakkavattī sattahi ratanehi samannāgato hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.199-200 atthato samānaṃ) vitthāro. Vasibhāvo tattha samannāgatasaddena vutto. Tassahitesu ratanesu vasibhāvo kāmacāro atthīti ce? Ettha vasibhāvo samannāgamasaddena vutto, aññattha pattisaṅkhāto, taṃ dhammantaranti. Kimettha visesakāraṇaṃ? Natthi ca, tasmā yathāvuttalakkhaṇāva upasampadā. Ayameva nayo pabbajjādīsupi netabbo.
19 第十九,虽然瓦帕长老在初转法轮之日……阿说示长老在第四日,如此在不同的日子里各自证得了法眼,但应知,此处由于所施教诫的共同性,将瓦帕与跋提亚、摩诃男与阿说示合在一处宣说。显示巴利原文
19. Kiñcāpi vappattherassa pāṭipadadivase…pe… assajittherassa catutthiyanti evaṃ nānādivasesu pāṭekkaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ udapādi, tathāpi ovādasāmaññena vappabhaddiyānaṃ, mahānāmaassajīnañcettha ekato vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
20 “色,比丘们,是无我。”为何一开始就开显无我相呢?因为在他们是凡夫时,其余二相(无常相、苦相)已明显。他们因见到可爱欲乐的无常,心生悚惧而出家,因此无常相在他们那里已部分明显;出家后,由于从事自我折磨的苦行,身苦明显,而身苦又是心苦的缘,故心苦也明显。因此,避开此二相,仅从无我相开始开示。而开示无我相时,是以苦相来开显的,所以说“色,比丘们,若此是我”等语。为何以苦相开显?因为较之无常相,苦相对于他们更为明显。他们曾从事自我折磨的苦行,并以苦行为皈依,故苦相非常明显。因此,先以此极为明显的苦相来开示无我相,然后再用无常相与苦相一同来开示同一个无我相,所以(世尊)将说:“诸比丘,你们怎么认为?色是常还是无常?”“Kallaṃ nu”意为“是否合适”。“这是我的”是渴爱执。“我是这个”是慢执。“这是我的我”是见执。其中,渴爱执应依一百零八种渴爱行相来理解,慢执应依九种慢来理解,见执应依显示巴利原文
20. ‘‘Rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, anattā’’ti kimatthaṃ āditova anattalakkhaṇaṃ dīpetīti? Tesaṃ puthujjanakālepi itaralakkhaṇadvayassa pākaṭattā. Te hi manāpānaṃ kāmānaṃ aniccatādassanena saṃviggā pabbajiṃsūti aniccalakkhaṇaṃ tāva nesaṃ ekadesena pākaṭaṃ, pabbajitānañca attakilamathānuyogato kāyikadukkhaṃ, tañca mānasassa paccayoti mānasikadukkhañca pākaṭaṃ, tasmā tadubhayaṃ vajjitvā anattalakkhaṇameva dīpetuṃ ārabhi. Tañca dīpento dukkhalakkhaṇeneva dīpetuṃ ‘‘rūpañca hidaṃ, bhikkhave, attā abhavissā’’tiādimāha. Kimatthanti? Aniccalakkhaṇatopi tesaṃ dukkhalakkhaṇassa suṭṭhutaraṃ pākaṭattā. Tesañhi attakilamathānuyogamanuyuttattā, tapparāyaṇabhāvato ca dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ suṭṭhu pākaṭaṃ, tasmā tena tāva suṭṭhu pākaṭena anattalakkhaṇaṃ dīpetvā puna tadeva tadubhayenāpi dīpetuṃ ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vā’’ti vakkhati. Kallaṃ nūti yuttaṃ nu. Etaṃ mamāti taṇhāggāho. Esohamasmīti mānaggāho. Eso me attāti diṭṭhiggāho. Taṇhāggāho cettha aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritavasena, mānaggāho navavidhamānavasena, diṭṭhiggāho dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhivasena veditabbo.
出家故事注释显示巴利原文
Pabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā
25 “那时,世尊使五群比丘中第五位证得阿罗汉后,于第七日向那拉卡长老开示那拉卡行道,于跋达巴达满月日了知耶舍诸根成熟,便观察着他而住于波罗奈”,这是与“那时,有位名叫耶舍的”的关联。据说,从他出生起,其家族的名声称谓或随从称谓的“声誉”便特别增长,因此父母为他取此名。“柔软”等语,是优波离长老为激发后人出离的踊跃心而说。意思是:如此具足最胜妙欲享受之人,尚因微小的不净相而心生厌离,不顾时机,以好乐远离之心,将大财富堆如草芥般舍弃而出家,那么还有谁不能呢?“具足”意为与那些财富等合一,即不相离。“入睡”意为:在可爱的所缘上,止息了心的活动后,超越了、征服了心,令心处于自己的掌控下。“整夜”指三个时分。以此显示耶舍见到随从们变形相的原因。此处的“夜”字,应知用于“太阳不现之时”和“时分”二义。在“时分”义上,也应用于“三衣别处”等处。“腋下”指腋窝旁。“喉部”指喉咙下方。意思是:将鼓的上部放在喉咙处而睡。显示巴利原文
25. Yena samayena bhagavā pañcavaggiye pañcamiyaṃ arahatte patiṭṭhāpetvā sattamiyaṃ nāḷakattherassa nāḷakapaṭipadaṃ ācikkhitvā bhaddapadapuṇṇamāyaṃ yasassa indriyānaṃ paripakkabhāvaṃ ñatvā taṃ udikkhanto bārāṇasiyaṃ vihāsi, tena samayena yaso nāmāti sambandho. Tassa kira uppattito paṭṭhāya tassa kulassa kittisaddasaṅkhāto, parijanasaṅkhāto vā yaso visesato pavaḍḍhati. Tena tassa mātāpitaro evaṃ nāmamakaṃsu. ‘‘Sukhumālo’’tiādi kimatthaṃ āyasmatā upālittherena vuttanti? Pacchimajanassa nekkhamme samussāhanajananatthaṃ. Evaṃ uttamabhogasamappitānampi uttamesu bhogesu appamattakenāpi asubhanimittena vitajjetvā kālākālaṃ agaṇetvā vivekābhiratiyā mahantaṃ bhogakkhandhaṃ tiṇaṃ viya pahāya gehato nikkhamanā ahosi, kassa panaññassa na siyāti adhippāyo. Samaṅgībhūtassāti tehi ekattaṃ upagatassa, avivittassāti attho. Niddā okkamīti manāpesupi visayesu pavattiṃ nivāretvā tassa cittaṃ atikkamitvā abhibhavitvā attano vasaṃ upanesīti attho. Sabbarattiyo cāti tayopi yāme. Tena parijanassa vikāradassane kāraṇaṃ dasseti. Ratti-saddo panettha kāle sūriyābhāve, yāme ca pavattatīti viññeyyo. Yāmevidha viññeyyo ticīvaravippavāse ca. Kaccheti kacchapasse. Kaṇṭheti kaṇṭhassa heṭṭhā. Mudiṅgassa hi upari kaṇṭhaṃ ṭhapetvā sayantiyā kaṇṭhe mudiṅgaṃ addasāti attho. Āḷambaranti paṇavaṃ. Ubhatomukhassa tanukā dīghā. Vitthinnasamatalassa vāditassa etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vippalapantiyoti supinadassanādivasena asambandhapalāpaṃ vippalapantiyo. Susānaṃ maññeti susānaṃ viya addasa sakaṃ parijananti sambandho. Ādīnavoti asubhabhāvo. Nibbidāya cittaṃ saṇṭhātīti vimuccitukāmatāsaṅkhātāya ukkaṇṭhāya cittaṃ namīti attho. Udānaṃ udānesīti ‘‘ito paṭṭhāya imāhi itthīhi saha nāhaṃ bhavissāmī’’ti attamanavācaṃ nicchāresi. Dve kira ākārā tassa pamādasuttaparijanadassane pākaṭā jātā kilesānaṃ balavabhāvo, asubhākārassa atioḷārikabhāvo ca. Evaṃ sati oḷārikatare ca asubhākāre kilesavasenāyaṃ sabbopi loko ettha pīḷito mucchito. Aho kilesā balavatarāti hi passato passato tassa dvepi te ākārā pākaṭā jātā, yenevamavocāti.
“穿上金拖鞋”以此显示他因无执着而步履从容。因为他被强烈的悚惧所逼迫,即便随从们醒来,他也无法忍受他们可能阻止自己离去,于是独自思惟,从容而行。“非人”指天神。因为天神与人类在善趣通达智的安立等功德上有共通性,所以称为“非人”。并非因为种类不同,如畜生等被称为“非婆罗门”或“贱民”,而是因为种姓相同,贱民等才被称为“非婆罗门”。同样地,由于在某些方面与人类共通,天神被称为“非人”。否则,畜生等不是人,也应被称为“非人”了。显示巴利原文
‘‘Suvaṇṇapādukāyo ārohitvā’’ti etenassa nissaṅgatāya vissaṭṭhagamanaṃ dīpeti. So hi balavasaṃvegābhitunnahadayattā parijanassa pabodhe satipi attano gamananivāraṇasamatthabhāvaṃ asahamāno attānaṃ takkento vissaṭṭho agamāsi. Amanussāti devatā. Tā hi manussehi sugatipaṭivedhañāṇasaṇṭhānādiguṇasāmaññena ‘‘amanussā’’ti vuccanti. Na hi asamānajātikā tiracchānādayo ‘‘abrāhmaṇā’’ti vā ‘‘avasalā’’ti vā vuccanti, kintu jātisabhāgatāya eva vasalādayo ‘‘abrāhmaṇā’’ti vuccanti, evaṃ manussehi kenaci ākārena sabhāgatāya devatā ‘‘amanussā’’ti vuttā. Aññathā manussā na hontīti tiracchānagatāpi ‘‘amanussā’’ti vattabbā bhaveyyuṃ.
26 他看到森林住处,心想:“我已从城中解脱”,心生喜悦,在世尊不远处发出感叹。世尊所说的“这确实是耶舍”,是就涅槃而言。因为涅槃不被渴爱等烦恼所逼恼、所侵扰,且仅凭见道也能产生喜乐。世尊的意思是:“我将说法,你仅坐在这里,便能证得那涅槃。”据说“Kira”一词用于表示不信、无知或轻蔑,此处表示无知。所谓“从金拖鞋下来”,即从金拖鞋中走出。此处是以具格表示“从……出来”的意义。他刚一坐下,世尊未作任何寒暄问候,也未加告知,便为他次第说法。这是因为他的根器已极为成熟,为不让他错过证悟的时机,他的心已倾向于不被逼恼、不被侵扰的善法之教说,而且世尊看到那位富有的居士不久将至。为何世尊对这位内心深感怖畏、渴望解脱轮回者,首先开示关于诸有及其过患、出离功德的次第说法呢?是为了让他见到一切有的过患。因为他只见到人间的逼恼侵扰,未见天界的,可能会认为天界是快乐的。若对天界生起乐想,便可能将心导向涅槃,因此世尊为了也显示天界的过患,而开始了次第说法。在此,讲说布施、布施的功德、持戒的功德时,称为说布施持戒论。讲说……显示巴利原文
26. Vanagahanaṃ disvā ‘‘sumuttohaṃ nagarato’’ti pamuditattā bhagavato avidūre udānesi. Idaṃ kho yasāti bhagavā nibbānaṃ sandhāyāha. Tañhi taṇhādikilesehi anupaddutaṃ, anupasaṭṭhatañca dassanamattenāpi assādajananato. Dhammaṃ desessāmīti yena taṃ nibbānaṃ idha nisinnamattova tvaṃ adhigamissasīti adhippāyo. Kirāti assaddheyyaabyattiparihāsesu nipāto, idha abyattiyaṃ. Suvaṇṇapādukāyo orohitvāti ca suvaṇṇapādukāhi otaritvā. Nissakkatthe hi idaṃ paccattavacanaṃ. Tassa nisinnamattasseva aññaṃ sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ akatvā anāmantetvā anupubbiṃ kathaṃ kathesi. Suparipakkindriyattā, paṭivedhakkhaṇānatikkamanatthaṃ anupaddutānupasaṭṭhatānaṃ pāpakadhammadesanābhimukhacittattā, seṭṭhissa gahapatino acirāgamanadassanato ca. Kimatthaṃ bhagavā tassa suṭṭhutaraṃ saṃviggahadayassa bhavato muccitukāmassa bhavābhavūpāyānisaṃsakathaṃ paṭhamameva kathesīti? Sabbabhavādīnavadassanatthaṃ. So hi manussalokasseva upaddutaupasaṭṭhabhāvaṃ addasa, na saggānanti kadāci saggalokaṃ sukhato maññeyya. Tattha sukhasaññena nibbānābhimukhaṃ cittaṃ peseyyāti saggānampi ādīnavaṃ dassetukāmatāya anupubbiṃ kathaṃ ārabhi. Ettha dānaṃ, dānānisaṃsaṃ, sīlānisaṃsañca kathento dānasīlakathaṃ katheti nāma. Saggavaṇṇaṃ kathento saggakathaṃ katheti nāma. Tattha vatthukāmakilesakāmānaṃ aniccataṃ, apasādataṃ, mahādīnavatañca kathento kāmānaṃ ādīnavaṃ, okāraṃ, saṃkilesañca pakāseti. Nekkhamme tadabhāvato ca taṃnissaraṇato ca tabbiparītaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ kathento nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ pakāseti nāma. Tattha okāranti avakāraṃ lāmakabhāvaṃ. Saṃkilesanti saṃkilissanaṃ bādhanaṃ upatāpanaṃ vāti attho. Kallacittaṃ paññindriyassa ānubhāvena, diṭṭhiyogavicikicchāyogānaṃ paññindriyena vihatattā. Muducittaṃ satindriyasamāyogena, vihiṃsāsārambhādikilesapavesaṃ nivāretvā cittamudutādikusaladhammappavesanaṃ karontaṃ sahajātaṃ cittaṃ muduṃ karoti. Samādhindriyassa ānubhāvena vinīvaraṇacittaṃ. Tañhi visesato nīvaraṇavipakkhabhūtanti. Vīriyindriyavasena udaggacittaṃ. Tañhi thinamiddhasaṅkhātalīnabhāvavipakkhanti. Saddhindriyassa ānubhāvena pasannacittaṃ tassa pasādalakkhaṇattā. Sāmukkaṃsikāti etaṃ visayavasena desanaṃ upālitthero pakāseti. Saccāni hi sāmukkaṃsikadesanāya visayāni. Aññathā dukkhādīni sāmukkaṃsikā dhammadesanāti āpajjati tassa vibhāvane saccānaṃ niddiṭṭhattā.
27 “四方”指四个方向。“作了准备”即作了安排。何以故?为遮止两人获得应得殊胜果证的障碍。如果那位父亲见到儿子,儿子将证得法眼与阿罗汉果,而那位富有的居士则可能无法证得法眼。即使是已见谛者,若有人说“还你母亲的生命”,他还有什么做不出来的呢?耶舍听到此话,虽已是阿罗汉,若他自己不拒绝,只是仰望着世尊,他又如何能安立呢?显示巴利原文
27.Catuddisāti catūsu disāsu. Abhisaṅkharesīti abhisaṅkhari. Kimatthanti ce? Ubhinnaṃ paṭilabhitabbavisesantarāyanisedhanatthaṃ. Yadi so puttaṃ passeyya, puttassapi dhammacakkhupaṭilābho arahattuppatti, seṭṭhissapi dhammacakkhupaṭilābho na siyā. Diṭṭhasaccopi ‘‘dehi te mātuyā jīvita’’nti vadanto kimaññaṃ na kareyya. Yasopi taṃ vacanaṃ sutvā arahāpi samāno sayaṃ appaṭikkhipitvā bhagavantaṃ ullokento kimaññāya saṇṭhaheyya.
28 由于两人都已达到应证得的殊胜究竟,世尊便再次让他平静下来。所谓“先前曾是在家人”,是就他证得须陀洹之时而言。因为须陀洹尚可住于家中,故称为在家人、未出家。如今他已出家,不可能再住于家中,故不被称为“在家人”,因此世尊这样说。“所见”是关联词,意为“由他所见”。由于前面“譬如先前曾是在家人”一句已得理解,后来世尊针对身着在家白衣的耶舍说“由善男子耶舍为随从沙门”。其中,“修习梵行”意为:你且修习、圆满增上戒学所摄的梵行,直到彻底灭尽苦,直到死心为止。这是其意旨。古师说这是指象征性的梵行,这也合理。因为那位尊者正是就象征意义而说:“尊者,愿我得受出家与具足戒。”显示巴利原文
28. Ubhohipi pattabbavisesakoṭiyā pattattā bhagavā puna taṃ paṭippassambhesi. Pubbe agārikabhūtoti tassa sotāpannakālaṃ sandhāyāha. Sotāpanno hi agāramajjhe vasanārahattā agāriyabhūto nāma hoti apabbajito. Sampati pabbajito samāno agāramajjhavasanassa abhabbattā ‘‘agāriko’’ti na vuccati, tasmā evamāha. Yassa diṭṭhoti sambandho, yena diṭṭhoti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Seyyathāpi pubbe agārikabhūto’’ti vacanena laddhanayattā pacchā gahapati gihivesadhārimeva yasaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘yasena kulaputtena pacchāsamaṇenā’’ti. Tattha cara brahmacariyanti ābhisamācārikasīlaṃ brahmacariyaṃ cara paripūrehi tāva, yāva sammādukkhassantakiriyā, yāva cuticittāti adhippāyo. Liṅgabrahmacariyaṃ sandhāyāti porāṇā, tañca yuttaṃ. Liṅgamattañhi sandhāya so āyasmā ‘‘labheyyāhaṃ, bhante, pabbajjaṃ upasampada’’nti āha.
为何世尊在耶舍母亲和妻子尚未供养饮食之前,就先为她们说法呢?因为她们被耶舍出家的忧悲之箭所刺伤,若先供食,便不会以欢喜心行布施;若对导师心生忧恼,也无法证得道果。因此,世尊先令她们的心远离忧悲之箭、获得安稳,然后再完成供食之事。显示巴利原文
Kimatthaṃ bhagavā yasassa mātu, pajāpatiyā ca bhattakiccaṃ akatvāva dhammaṃ desesīti? Yasassa pabbajjāya sokasallasamappitattā dānañca somanassikacittena na dadeyyuṃ, satthari ca domanassappattā hutvā maggapaṭivedhampi na labheyyunti bhagavā paṭhamaṃ tāva tā vigatasokasallahadayāyo katvā puna bhattakiccaṃ akāsi.
30 “富豪与随从富豪”:古师解释为“依次第的富豪”。有记载说:“富豪与随从富豪的家族,即那些富豪与随从富豪的家族,就叫做富豪与随从富豪家族。”“法与律”,在此处,从意义上说,与教法、梵行、圣典是同一回事。或者,以法而制定的律,非以刑罚等制定,故称“法与律”;为法而制定的律,非为伤害而制定,故称“法与律”;依法而制定的律,非非法而制定,故称“法与律”;法即是律,并非非法,故称“法与律”;是诸法的律,非其他的律,故称“法与律”;或者,因为世尊是法身、法主,所以称为“法”,彼法的律,非诡辩者的律,故称“法与律”。或者,依同位关系,“法与律”如同“青莲花”,法与律二者一体,故称“法与律”;如同“果与非果”为中性词,此处依阳性词形而词性得以成立;或者,以法为律者,即“法与律”,如同“白衣之人”;或者,与法相应的律,即“法与律”,如同“马与车”等。应以这些方式理解其释义。显示巴利原文
30.Seṭṭhānuseṭṭhīnanti anukkamaseṭṭhīnanti porāṇā. ‘‘Seṭṭhino cānuseṭṭhino ca yāni kulāni, tāni seṭṭhānuseṭṭhāni kulāni, tesaṃ seṭṭhānuseṭṭhīnaṃ kulāna’’nti likhitaṃ. Dhammavinayoti sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ pāvacananti idha atthato ekaṃ. Atha vā dhammena vinayo, na daṇḍasatthehīti dhammavinayo, dhammāya vinayo, na hiṃsatthanti vā dhammato vinayo, nādhammatoti vā dhammo vinayo, nādhammoti vā dhammānaṃ vinayo, na aññesanti vā dhammakāyattā, dhammasāmittā vā dhammo bhagavā, tassa dhammassa vinayo, na takkikānanti vā dhammavinayo. Samānādhikaraṇavasena vā dhammavinayo nīluppalaṃ viya, dhammo ca vinayo cāti dhammavinayo phalāphalaṃ viya napuṃsakamiti pulliṅgāpadesato assa liṅgabhāvo siddho, yassa vā dhammo vinayo, so dhammavinayo setapaṭo puriso viya, dhammena yutto vā vinayo dhammavinayo assaratho viyāti evamādinā nayena yojanā veditabbā.
34 “带到断界”之语,是为了告知剃发事宜及取回衣而说的。因此,说“在有比丘的寺院里,也可让其他人为他剃发”是不允许的。为了阐明“令出家后”的用意,而说“覆上袈裟再来吧”。如果戒师未作剃除须发等事,便为求出家者授予三皈依,此出家不成立。若诵了甘马语之后令他受具足戒,则具足戒成立。有一类人认为:由于这显示了未得衣钵者也能成就具足戒,且无羯磨过失,因此是合理的。在此有偈颂——显示巴利原文
34.‘‘Khaṇḍasīmaṃ netvā’’ti bhaṇḍukammārocanapaṭiharaṇatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena ‘‘sabhikkhuke vihāre aññampi etassa kese chindā’’ti vattuṃ na vaṭṭatīti. Pabbājetvāti imassa adhippāyapakāsanatthaṃ ‘‘kāsāyāni acchādetvā ehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Upajjhāyo ce kesamassuoropanādīni akatvā pabbajatthaṃ saraṇāni deti, na ruhati pabbajjā. Kammavācaṃ sāvetvā upasampādeti, ruhati upasampadā. Appattacīvarānaṃ upasampadāsiddhidassanato, kammavipattiyā abhāvato cetaṃ yujjatevāti eke. Hoti cettha –
出家,仅是对舍弃外相者而言;而此二者,亦非对不舍弃外相者而言。
对于先前已舍弃俗衣者,这两者(出家与具足戒)也是如此”——这是其他论师的说法。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Saliṅgasseva pabbajjā, viliṅgassāpi cetarā; Apetapubbavesassa, taṃ dvayaṃ iti cāpare’’ti.
比丘亲手给予,或通过指示给予的袈裟,方为如法;未给予的,则不如法。但这仅在有袈裟可给时才成立;若无袈裟,便不可能——这是他们的意趣。再者:“诸比丘,应如此令其出家、受具足戒。首先……诸比丘,我允许以此三次皈依即得出家与具足戒。”在此处,意在显示:我允许仅以这依次受持的三次皈依,便成就出家与具足戒,而非通过其他方式。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhunā hi sahatthena vā āṇattiyā vā dinnameva kāsāvaṃ vaṭṭati, adinnaṃ na vaṭṭatīti pana santesveva kāsāvesu, nāsantesu asambhavatoti tesaṃ adhippāyo. Evañca pana, bhikkhave, pabbājetabbo upasampādetabbo. Paṭhamaṃ…pe…anujānāmi, bhikkhave, imehi tīhi saraṇagamanehi pabbajjaṃ upasampadanti ettha iminā anukkamena dinnehi tīhi saraṇagamanehi pabbajjaṃ upasampadaṃ anujānāmi kevalehīti adhippāyadassanato –
对于先前已取得特征者,即使裸体,两者亦可成立;
若非此人,则不予认可,此说与一切经典文句相符。
显示巴利原文 Ādinnapubbaliṅgassa, naggassāpi dvayaṃ bhave; Netarassāti no khanti, sabbapāṭhānulomatoti. –
阿阇梨。关于“阿阇梨未给予的则不适宜”,此处记载为:“他们说,出家不成立。”古抄本中亦如是记载。Urā等是处所的名称。Saṃvuta等是作法的名称。记载中说:“应作鼻音化,作一连接,在施与时不应中间停顿而说。即使分断而施,亦仅可在所说之处分断,他处则不许。”当以鼻音化施与时,若失误说成“buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi”,则堕入与m音相混的过失,优波提舍长老认为这是允许的。法喜长老说:相混而说是允许的,但在说时不应于鼻音处作分断。“于甘马语亦然”,如此说。仅以双方清净方为允许——在此,当大长老因缺齿等原因而说不清楚时,聪明的沙弥令近前的求出家者清楚地说出。若令其说出大长老未说之语,则不允许。若甘马语由其他比丘说出,则是允许的。因为作羯磨的是僧团,而非个人。不应以不同界内所行甘马语的共通性为由而否定。若长老清晰说出,而求出家者不能说,沙弥自己先说一遍再令其说,则双方清净,因为所说正是长老所说之语。皈依佛时,是皈依不共的佛之功德;皈依法时,是皈依涅槃;皈依僧时,是皈依有学法与无学法——应作此说。显示巴利原文
Ācariyo . Ācariyena adinnaṃ na vaṭṭatīti ettha ‘‘pabbajjā na ruhatīti vadantī’’ti likhitaṃ. Porāṇagaṇṭhipadepi tatheva likhitaṃ. Urādīni ṭhānāni nāma. Saṃvutādīni karaṇāni nāma. ‘‘Anunāsikantaṃ katvā ekasambandhaṃ katvā dānakāle antarā aṭṭhatvā vattabbaṃ. Vicchinditvā dānepi yathāvuttaṭṭhāne eva vicchedo, aññatra na vaṭṭatī’’ti likhitaṃ. Anunāsikante diyyamāne khalitvā ‘‘buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’ti makārena missībhūte khette otiṇṇattā vaṭṭatīti upatissatthero. Missaṃ katvā vattuṃ vaṭṭati, vacanakāle pana anunāsikaṭṭhāne vicchedaṃ akatvā vattabbanti dhammasiritthero. ‘‘Evaṃ kammavācāyampī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ubhatosuddhiyāva vaṭṭatīti ettha mahāthero patitadantādikāraṇatāya acaturassaṃ katvā vadati, byattasāmaṇero samīpe ṭhito pabbajjāpekkhaṃ byattaṃ vadāpeti. Mahātherena avuttaṃ vadāpetīti na vaṭṭati. Kammavācāya itaro bhikkhu ce vadati, vaṭṭatīti. Saṅgho hi kammaṃ karoti, na puggaloti. Na nānāsīmapavattakammavācāsāmaññanayena paṭikkhipitabbattā. Atha therena caturassaṃ vuttaṃ pabbajjāpekkhaṃ vattuṃ asakkontaṃ sāmaṇero sayaṃ vatvā vadāpeti, ubhatosuddhi eva hoti therena vuttasseva vuttattā. Buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchanto asādhāraṇe buddhaguṇe, dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchanto nibbānaṃ, saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchanto sekkhadhammaṃ, asekkhadhammañca saraṇaṃ gacchatīti aggahitaggahaṇavasena yojanā kātabbā. Aññathā saraṇattayasaṅkaradoso. Sabbamassa kappiyākappiyanti dasasikkhāpadavinimuttaṃ parāmāsāparāmāsādi. ‘‘Ābhisamācārikesu vinetabbo’’ti vacanato sekhiyaupajjhāyavattādiābhisamācārikasīlamanena pūretabbaṃ. Tattha cārittassa akaraṇe vārittassa karaṇe daṇḍakammāraho hotīti dīpeti.
第二魔事解释显示巴利原文
Dutiyamārakathāvaṇṇanā
35 由“以此因缘”之语可知,经典中的“如理作意与正勤”是以因缘义而使用的从格。显示巴利原文
35. ‘‘Tena hetunā’’ti vacanato pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘yonisomanasikārāsammappadhānā’’ti hetvatthe nissakkavacananti veditabbaṃ.
优楼频螺示现神通事解释显示巴利原文
Uruvelapāṭihāriyakathāvaṇṇanā
37-8 “我们应住”——据说这是以爱语摄受他而说:“你与我应住”。“以光明对光明”即以威力对威力,或以火界对火界。“两者成为同焰”——这是轻视义的属格,或是处格第七义。仅火屋被燃烧,并非住于其中的有情众生,因为神通境界不可思议。然而,为何世尊不令火屋也不燃烧呢?因为会招致“自身无苦却非极稀有”等讥嫌。为何要毁坏属于他人、以大量资具建成的房屋呢?因为世尊有意以神通威力使其恢复原状。“被耗尽”即被灭尽。“以光明对光明”即以威力对威力。由于火屋狭小,其余的解释便不成立。这一含义与“不能忍受毁坏”甚为相符。因为在那里,对神通威力的毁坏即称为“毁坏”。“以叶”——古师也作“以莲叶”。他们认为世尊当时立于莲丛之中。显示巴利原文
37-8.Vaseyyāmāti ‘‘tvañca ahañca vaseyyāmā’’ti piyavacanena tassa saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ vuttaṃ kira. Tejasā tejanti ānubhāvena ānubhāvaṃ. Tejodhātuyā vā tejodhātuṃ. Ubhinnaṃ sajotibhūtānanti anādaratthe sāmivacanaṃ, bhāvasattamīatthe vā. Agyāgārameva ādittaṃ, na tattha vasanako sattajātiko. Acinteyyo hi iddhivisayo. Kasmā pana bhagavā agyāgārampi anādittaṃ nādhiṭṭhāsīti? Attano dukkhuppādābhāvassa anativimhādibhāvappasaṅgato. Kimatthaṃ parasantakaṃ mahāsambhārapavattaṃ taṃ vināsetīti? Puna yathāporāṇaṃ iddhānubhāvena kattukāmatādhippāyato. Pariyādinnoti khayaṃ nīto. Tejasā tejanti ānubhāvena ānubhāvaṃ. Agyāgārassa parittattā itaro attho na sambhavati. Ayamattho ‘‘makkhaṃ asahamāno’’ti iminā ativiya sameti. Iddhānubhāvamakkhanañhi tattha makkho nāma. Pattenāti padumapattenātipi porāṇā. Paduminisaṇḍe ṭhito hi bhagavā tattha ahosīti tesaṃ mati.
39 “已给与”意为已允许。“无畏”即无怖畏。为何?因为他已依道超越了怖畏。记载说:“‘善心’即名为善心所之心,或即是善心。”“有光辉”即如火。“善于界”即善于火界。“若被隔开”——因音声特征之故,此为前缀,义即善于火界等至。“他们仰望”即他们向上看,也记载为“他们环绕”,这是如是说的含义。“被摧毁”即平息之义,据说在此处意为变成黑色。他们不作丝毫功用,保持与寂止相应而住。为了显示那些具有种种颜色的火焰,而说“青色、赤色”等。显示巴利原文
39.Dinnanti anumatinti attho. Abhīto nibbhayo. Kasmā? Yato so maggena bhayamatīto. ‘‘Sumanamanasoti sundaracittasaṅkhātamano. Sumano eva vā’’ti likhitaṃ. Tejovāti aggi viya. Dhātukusaloti tejodhātumhi kusalo. ‘‘Byavahitā ce’’ti saddalakkhaṇattā ca upasaggo. Tejodhātusamāpattīsu kusalo iccevattho. Udicchareti ullokesuṃ. ‘‘Saṃparivāresu’’nti ca likhitaṃ. Iti evaṃ bhaṇantīti attho. Hatāti samāti attho, kāḷakāva hontīti kirettha adhippāyo. Īsakampi byāpāraṃ akatvā upasamānurūpaṃ tiṭṭhanti. Ye ca anekavaṇṇā acciyo hontīti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘nīlā atha lohitikā’’tiādimāha.
40 40.“四方”意指四个方向。显示巴利原文
40.Catuddisāti catūsu disāsu.
44 44.“粪扫衣生起”意指:对于寻求者,由获得而生起。而此寻求是为了显示种种心神变。“sā”即“此”(ayaṃ),“sāyaṃ”即“此”(ayaṃ)。“tā”即“这些”(imā),“tayimā”即“这些”(imā)。将两者合在一起说。“āyāmi”即“我来”(ahaṃ)。“etanti”即“此的”(etassa)。“yathā mayan”ti即“因为我们”(yasmā mayaṃ)。显示巴利原文
44.Paṃsukūlaṃ uppannanti pariyesamānassa paṭilābhavasena uppannaṃ hoti. Cittavicittapāṭihīradassanatthāya ca sā pariyesanā. Sā ayaṃ sāyaṃ. Tā imā tayimā. Dve ekato gahetvā vadati. Āyāmi ahaṃ āyamahaṃ. Etanti etassa. Yathā mayanti yasmā mayaṃ.
50-51 50-51.“运水者”是指水流。“水流”是古师之说。“你以何”是就前分观行而说。“长久以来”意指从很久以前,自调伏龙时起即是长久以来。他们也说“长久随念”。在“发混”等词中,因头发等被分别绑缚后反复投入,故古师称为“发混”。此处的“筐混”中,“筐”指苦行者的资具。“遣送至结发者处”意为遣送两三个苦行者。经中说:“十六万零半千神变”。显示巴利原文
50-51.Udakavāhakoti udakogho. Udakasototi porāṇā. ‘‘Yāya tva’’nti pubbabhāgavipassanāpaṭipadaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Cirapaṭikāti cirapabhuti, nāgadamanato paṭṭhāya cirapaṭikā. ‘‘Cirapaṭisaṅkhā’’tipi vadanti. Kesamissantiādimhi abbokiṇṇaṃ visuṃ visuṃ bandhitvā pakkhittattā kesādayova kesamissāti porāṇā. Khārikājamissanti ettha khārī vuccati tāpasaparikkhāro. Jaṭile pāhesīti dve tayo tāpase pāhesi. ‘‘Soḷasātirekaaḍḍhauḍḍhāni pāṭihāriyasahassānī’’ti vuttaṃ.
54 54. 世尊因他们于火祭已为熟习,故为他们开示《燃烧经》(相应部4.28)。其中,一种依所缘而说燃烧,即眼等被贪火所烧;一种依结合而说燃烧,即由眼触所生受等而烧;一种依克服之义而说燃烧,即眼等被生等所克服;一种依缘之义而说燃烧,即彼眼等作为愁等之缘。当知于此随应各处,皆有燃烧之义。此处虽似唯显苦相,然应知依此法门,其余二相亦为他们所了达——以显示苦之行相,即已显示余相。然因他们安住于有身见与乐想之渴爱,故应知此教法是以苦相为先导而宣说。显示巴利原文
54. Aggihutte kataparicayattā bhagavā tesaṃ ādittapariyāya-mabhāsi (saṃ. ni. 4.28). Tattha ekaccaṃ ārammaṇavasena ādittaṃ cakkhādi rāgagginā, ekaccaṃ sampayogavasena cakkhusamphassapaccayā vedayitādikeneva, ekaccaṃ abhibhūtatthena cakkhādi eva jātiādinā , ekaccaṃ paccayatthena, tadeva sokādināti yathāsambhavamettha ādittatā veditabbā. Ettha kiñcāpi dukkhalakkhaṇamevekaṃ pākaṭaṃ, tadanusārena pana itaraṃ lakkhaṇadvayampi tehi diṭṭhanti veditabbaṃ dukkhākārassa itarākāradīpanato. Santasukhataṇhābhiniviṭṭhattā panesaṃ dukkhalakkhaṇapubbaṅgamā desanā katāti veditabbā.
频婆娑罗会见故事的注释显示巴利原文
Bimbisārasamāgamakathāvaṇṇanā
55-7 55-57. 作为所贪之物基础的女人,即“欲女”。第二等是施予安慰者。因为当世尊尚未出现于世时,世中先起佛陀的传闻,长达一千年。梵天们化作婆罗门容貌,将约三千部与佛陀相关的教法编入吠陀而令其传诵;又从世尊诞生以来,由通晓相术的婆罗门所引发,佛陀的传记在世间流布,因此是合理的,并非虚妄。“频婆娑罗立于宫殿见彼”等偈颂,说明频婆娑罗在菩萨时代即已被灌顶成就。显示巴利原文
55-7. Vatthukāmabhūtā itthiyo kāmitthiyo. Dutiyādayo assāsakā. Yasmā anuppanne eva bhagavati buddhakolāhalaṃ loke paṭhamameva vassasahassaṃ uppajjati. Brahmāno ca brāhmaṇavaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvā vedesu sahassattayamattaṃ buddhapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ pariyattiṃ pakkhipitvā vācenti, bhagavato jātito paṭṭhāya ca buddhakathā lakkhaṇaññūhi brāhmaṇehi uppāditā, patthaṭā loke, tasmā yujjanti, na aññathā. ‘‘Tamaddasa bimbisāro, pāsādasmiṃ patiṭṭhito’’tiādigāthāhi bodhisattakāle eva abhisittatā bimbisārassa siddhā.
58 58. “诸贤,此中漏尽比丘断除五支,具足六支,有一守护,四依止,舍遣独谛,度脱诸寻,无浊思惟,身行轻安,心善解脱,慧善解脱”——这即是十种圣住。色界定与无色界定共八种,灭尽定及大悲定——这是古师所说。其中,五支即五盖;六支即六支舍;一守护即念守护。依于如理思择而受用、依于忍受、依于避离、依于遣除——此即四依止。已断除种种沙门婆罗门的四种独异之谛,故为“舍遣独谛”。已断除欲寻与有寻,已止息梵行寻,故为“度脱诸寻”。已断除欲寻、害寻,故为“无浊思惟”;“又断除乐……乃至……入住第四禅”,故为“身行轻安”。贪已断除,根已断除……乃至……了知不复生起;嗔、痴亦了知不复生起,故为“慧善解脱”。显示巴利原文
58. Idhāvuso khīṇāsavo bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti chaḷaṅgasamannāgato ekārakkho caturāpasseno paṇunnapaccekasacco samavayasaṭṭhesano anāvilasaṅkappo passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro suvimuttacitto suvimuttapaññoti (dī. ni. 3.348, 360; a. ni. 10.19) dasa ariyavāsā nāma. Rūpārūpasamāpattiyo aṭṭha nirodhasamāpatti mahākaruṇāsamāpattītipi porāṇā. Tattha nīvaraṇā pañcaṅgā ca. Chaḷaṅgupekkhā chaḷaṅgā. Satārakkhena ekārakkhā. Saṅkhāya ekaṃ paṭisevati, adhivāseti, parivajjeti, saṅkhāya ekaṃ vinodetīti ayaṃ caturāpasseno. Puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ puthupaccekasaccāni cattāri pahīnāni, evaṃ paṇunnapaccekasacco. Kāmesanā bhavesanā pahīnā hoti, brahmacariyesanā paṭippassaddhā, evaṃ samavayasaṭṭhesano. Kāmabyāpādavihiṃsāsaṅkappo pahīno hoti, evaṃ anāvilasaṅkappo, sukhassa ca pahānā…pe… catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati evaṃ suvimuttacitto hoti. Rāgo pahīno ucchinnamūlo…pe… anuppādadhammoti pajānāti, doso, moho anuppādadhammoti pajānāti, evaṃ suvimuttapaññoti.
处非处及果报之智,与一切处导引之智;
种种界、世间,及有情的信解,
牟尼了知诸根的胜劣。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ṭhānāṭhānaṃ vipākañca, ñāṇaṃ sabbatthagāminiṃ; Anekadhātuyo lokaṃ, adhimuttiñca pāṇinaṃ. ‘‘Jānāti indriyānañca, paropariyataṃ muni; Jhānādisaṃkilesādi-ñāṇaṃ vijjattayaṃ tathā’’ti. –
此即十力。无学支者,谓无学正见……乃至……无学解脱、无学解脱智见。其中,第十为无学支。古师云:“具足此十力与诸波罗蜜。”显示巴利原文
Imāni dasa balāni. Asekkhaṅgāni nāma asekkhā sammādiṭṭhi…pe… asekkhavimutti asekkhavimuttiñāṇadassananti. Tattha dasamaṃ asekkhaṃ. Etehi dasahi cupeto pāramīhīti porāṇā.
舍利弗与摩嘎剌那出家论释显示巴利原文
Sāriputtamoggallānapabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā
60 “kiṃ kāhasī”即“kiṃ kāhati”。其义为:以“作何?你作何?”等多种文句来说。“paṭipādento”即是“nigamento”(令出离)。也有读作“paccabyathā, paccabyathā”的。于此,“kappanahutehī”当知:十之百为千,千之百为十万,十万之百为俱胝,俱胝之百为阿由多,阿由多之百为那由他,那由他之百为迦罗那,迦罗那之百为迦罗那迦罗那,迦罗那迦罗那之百为那胡多。“kappanahutehī”依此序列,得名为“过去”——此为《犍度诵者》的读法。显示巴利原文
60.Kiṃ kāhasīti kiṃ kāhati. ‘‘Kiṃ karoti, kiṃ karosī’’ti vā byañjanaṃ bahuṃ vatvāti attho. Paṭipādentoti nigamento. ‘‘Paccabyathā , paccabyatha’’ntipi paṭhanti. Kappanahutehīti ettha dasakānaṃ sataṃ sahassaṃ, sahassānaṃ sataṃ satasahassaṃ, satasahassānaṃ sataṃ koṭi, koṭisatasahassānaṃ sataṃ pakoṭi, pakoṭisatasahassānaṃ sataṃ koṭipakoṭi, koṭipakoṭisatasahassānaṃ sataṃ nahutanti veditabbaṃ. Kappanahutehīti evamanusārato abbhatītaṃ nāmāti khandhakabhāṇakānaṃ pāṭhoti.
63 “kulacchedāyā”是读法,义为“kulupacchedāyā”(断绝家族)。人们说:“沙门释子依法引导,不依非法”,因此不再指责——应依此读法作如是关联。显示巴利原文
63. ‘‘Kulacchedāyā’’ti pāṭho, kulupacchedāyāti attho. Manussā ‘‘dhammena kira samaṇā sakyaputtiyā nayanti, nādhammenā’’ti na puna codesunti evaṃ pāṭhasesena sambandho kātabbo.
至此,应知长老已讲说缘起圆满。此中有偈:显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā thero nidānaṃ niṭṭhapesīti veditabbaṃ. Honti cettha –
法将(舍利弗)于此论之根本——
与成就之次第显示,
诸法,他们作缘起之结语;
结集者他们,通达律之次第。
正是这些缘起中深隐的义理之句
了知此缘起的结说
此后若与律义相应
应知,“诸句”即是须审察之义。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yaṃ dhammasenāpati ettha mūla- Ganthassa siddhikkamadassanena; Nidānaniṭṭhānamakaṃsu dhamma- Saṅgāhakā te vinayakkamaññū. ‘‘Nidānalīnatthapadānameva, Nidāniṭṭhānamidaṃ viditvā; Ito paraṃ ce vinayatthayutta- Padāni vīmaṃsanameva ñeyya’’nti.
亲教师义务论释显示巴利原文
Upajjhāyavattakathāvaṇṇanā
64 佛陀与亲教师所度的比丘,以及以“来,比丘”方式得度的其他比丘,在着下衣、覆上衣的仪则上彼此一致,因此被说为“著衣不整、覆衣不整、威仪不具”。他们不仅如此行乞,更有在人们进食时从其上方等处行乞的情形。人们因难忍饥渴而讥嫌,也因对另一些威仪具足者生起净信而讥嫌。显示巴利原文
64. Buddhupajjhāyakānaṃ itaresaṃ ehibhikkhūnaṃ nivāsanapārupanakappato nesaṃ visuṃ visuṃ sadisattā ‘‘dunnivatthā duppārutā anākappasampannā’’ti vuttā. Na kevalañca itthambhūtā piṇḍāya caranti, apica manussānaṃ bhuñjamānānaṃ uparītiādi. Manussā ujjhāyanti pipāsāsahanato, itaresaṃ ākappasampattiyā pasannattā ca.
65 “依谁、如何得受亲教师?”有人如此写道:“那时,他在谁座下出家,如今便是在谁座下希求达上。这是就亲教师以‘善哉’应允而说的。”他们这样理解:“亲教师以‘善哉’等语应允后,同住弟子说‘善哉,我欣然应允’——这话仅是比丘们的惯例,在任何处都未见有明文规定,因此即使不说此语,亲教师也已算被接受。”在此,“sāhū”即“善哉”之意。“lahū”即“轻”,意为“你于我并非重担”。“opāyikaṃ”即“与方便相应”,其义为:“以此方便,你从今往后成为我的担荷。”“paṭirūpaṃ”其义为:“接受你为亲教师,乃是与你相称之事。”显示巴利原文
65. Kena ko upajjhāyo gahetabboti? ‘‘Tadā so yassa santike pabbājito, etarahi yassa santike upasampadāpekkho hoti. Upajjhāyena ca sādhūti sampaṭicchanaṃ sandhāyā’’ti kehici likhitaṃ. Taṃ te evaṃ jānanti ‘‘upajjhāyena ‘sāhū’tiādinā sampaṭicchite saddhivihārikassa ‘sādhu suṭṭhu sampaṭicchāmī’ti vacanaṃ kevalaṃ bhikkhūhi āciṇṇameva, na katthaci dissati, tasmā vināpi tena upajjhāyo gahitova hotī’’ti. Tattha sāhūti sādhūti vuttaṃ hoti. Lahūti lahu, tvaṃ mama na bhāriyosīti vuttaṃ hoti. Opāyikanti upāyapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ, iminā upāyena tvaṃ me ito paṭṭhāya bhāro jātosīti attho. Patirūpanti anurūpaṃ te upajjhāyaggahaṇanti attho.
66 漱口水亦同此例,于同一时节中。“从此以后”——此语是从“不得在亲教师说话时……”这一规定中的“不”字开始算起。因此,有人解释说:“‘不得走得太远,不得走得太近’规定中的‘不’字,即表明无犯。”此犯是有心之犯,还是无心之犯?由于是以不恭敬为因缘,故为有心之犯。如何知道是以不恭敬为因缘?因为它被归摄于不恭敬之缘中。在巴帝摩卡诵戒中,将应学法的数量范围加以确定,是为了将其归摄于篇聚所属之犯。然而此相应当只在行持规范中理解,而不在禁止规范中——例如不净肉食等犯属于无心之犯。老师说:篇聚禁止规范中的那些犯,由无心之犯所摄,如应学法禁止规范中以汤饭作乞求为缘等。凡是以‘不’字作禁止之处,是否一律皆犯恶作?是的。凡是注疏未示明方法之处,一律如此。此后注疏以‘若为黑色或以石灰涂抹、无尘土之地,则可置于其上’等方式示明了方法。显示巴利原文
66.Tādisameva mukhadhovanodakaṃ utumhi ekasabhāgeti. Ito paṭṭhāyāti ‘‘na upajjhāyassa bhaṇamānassā’’ti ettha vuttana-kārato paṭṭhāya. Tena ‘‘nātidūre gantabbaṃ, nāccāsanne gantabba’’nti ettha vuttana-kārena anāpattīti dīpetīti eke. Sacittakā ayaṃ āpatti, udāhu acittakāti? Anādariyapaccayattā sacittakā. Anādariyapaccayatā kathaṃ paññāyatīti ce? Anādariyapaccayehi saṅgahitanti. Pātimokkhuddese sekhiyānaṃ gaṇaparicchedākaraṇañhi khandhakapariyāpannāpattiyā saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ. Idaṃ pana lakkhaṇaṃ cāritteyeva veditabbaṃ, na vāritte akappiyamaṃsakhādanādiāpattīnaṃ acittakattā. Khandhakavārittānaṃ tehi saṅgaho, sekhiyavāritteyeva acittakehi sūpodanaviññattipaccayādīhīti ācariyo. Yattha yattha na-kārena paṭisedho karīyati, kiṃ sabbattha dukkaṭāpattīti? Āma. Yattha aṭṭhakathāya nayo na dassito, tattha sabbattha. Parato hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sace pana kāḷavaṇṇakatā vā sudhābaddhā vā hoti nirajamattikā, tathārūpāya bhūmiyā ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’tiādinā nayena nayo dassito.
有人于此问道:既然在巴利圣典中,便有“若亲教师生起不乐,或生起邪见”(《大品》第66节)之语,为表明注疏所说的方法乃依世尊之语而成立,那么关于“不得太远,不得太近”这一句,世尊之言的依据何在?答曰:“应当先到,备好座位”等语,是就教导的规范而言。若说亲教师已默许,那么首次前往便是被允许的?并非如此,因为此说尚未成立;即便成立,依上述方法也已成立。在禁止规范中,默许并不能使其成为无犯;即便如此,仍须审察后方可接受。“门廊”即是门洞。不得舍弃,亦不得藏匿。显示巴利原文
Etthāha – yasmā pāḷiyaṃyeva ‘‘sace upajjhāyassa anabhirati uppannā hoti, diṭṭhigataṃ uppannaṃ hotī’’ti (mahāva. 66) bhagavato vacanavasena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayo yuttoti dassetuṃ ‘‘nātidūre nāccāsanne’’ti ettha ko bhagavato vacanalesoti? Vuccate – ‘‘paṭhamataraṃ āgantvā āsanaṃ paññāpetabba’’ntiādīni vadanti desaniyamanato. Upajjhāyena anumataṃyeva paṭhamagamananti ce? Na, asiddhattā, siddhepi yathāvuttanayasiddhito ca . Na hi vārittassa anumati anāpattikarā hoti, evaṃ santepi vicāretvā gahetabbaṃ. Koṭṭhakanti dvārakoṭṭhakaṃ. Na nissajjitabbaṃ, na nidahitabbaṃ vā.
不如法行为等论的注释显示巴利原文
Nasammāvattanādikathāvaṇṇanā
68 “不得有过度的在家依附之情”——在此,“在家依附之情”不应仅仅被视为不善,因为此相也通于漏尽者。若说漏尽者不会有不如法行为?并非如此,因为对他们而言,“不得驱出”的规定,正是依于具足此相者而成立的。因此应当理解:在此,“这是我的担负”——这种生起我执的情感,即是“情”。如同“若有一位具足行仪的比丘……他们无犯”那段所说:若有一位具足行仪的比丘说:“尊者,请您不必操心,我将照料您的同住弟子或亲近弟子中的病者;需要教诫时我会教诫,该做的事我会尽力而为。”而那些同住弟子等却说:“尊者,请您自己不必操心。”或者不接受这样的行仪,从那时起,亲教师与老师便无犯。显示巴利原文
68.Adhimattaṃ gehassitapemaṃ na hotīti ettha gehassitapemaṃ na akusalamicceva daṭṭhabbaṃ khīṇāsavānampi sādhāraṇattā imassa lakkhaṇassa. Na khīṇāsavānaṃ asammāvattanābhāvatoti ce? Na, tesaṃ na paṇāmetabbaṃ taṃsamannāgamanasiddhito, tasmā ‘‘mamesa bhāro’’ti mamattakaraṇaṃ tattha pemanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Eko vattasampanno…pe… tesaṃ anāpattī’ti ettha viya sace eko vattasampanno bhikkhu ‘bhante, tumhe appossukkā hotha, ahaṃ tumhākaṃ saddhivihārikaṃ, antevāsikaṃ vā gilānaṃ vā upaṭṭhahissāmi, ovaditabbaṃ ovadissāmi, iti karaṇīyesu ussukkaṃ āpajjissāmī’ti vadati, te evāsaddhivihārikādayo ‘bhante, tumheva kevalaṃ appossukkā hothā’ti vadanti, vattaṃ vā na sādiyanti, tato paṭṭhāya ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ anāpattī’’ti vuttaṃ.
罗达婆罗门事论释显示巴利原文
Rādhabrāhmaṇavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
73 先解释为“腐尿,即如腐臭之身所出的尿”,而后又写道:“以腐臭之性而被排出的尿,用作药物,即是腐尿药。”于一切处,“名为如此”一语中,唯有一个“不”字。显示巴利原文
73.‘‘Pūtimuttanti muttaṃ pūtikāyo viyā’’ti vatvāpi ‘‘pūtibhāvena muttaṃ paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ bhesajjaṃ pūtimuttabhesajja’’nti likhitaṃ. Sabbattha itthannāmoti ekova na-kāro hoti.
阿阇梨义务论释显示巴利原文
Ācariyavattakathāvaṇṇanā
76 经中说“我将依止具寿而住”。应依文句省略而理解为“我将依止具寿的教导而住”。“nissāya”或作“nissayā”,意为“凭借依止”。“āyasmato”或为表具格义的属格。显示巴利原文
76. ‘‘Āyasmato nissāya vacchāmī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Āyasmato ovādaṃ nissāya vasāmī’’ti pāṭhasesavasena veditabbā. Nissāyāti vā nissayā, nissayenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Āyasmatoti vā upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ.
依止舍断论的注释显示巴利原文
Nissayapaṭippassaddhikathāvaṇṇanā
83 “前往某方”:即于该处卸下职责而住,随后前往村外。“应前往能获得依止之处”:此处亦如前述亲教师所说,以“我将于数日后出发”来策励出行。“莫于此处返回”:意为不要往这边来。所谓“同类”,指亲教师的弟子们。于彼处受取依止后——若如此,有何差别?故说“或许能容忍”。“得以居住”:意即已被亲教师舍弃,与亲教师会合已无意义。若亲教师有意于久后方予摄受,则从那时起,仍以亲教师为依止。若亲教师是无惭者,同住弟子应屡屡制止;若亲教师不肯停止,则可舍弃该亲教师,无须经由依止驱摈,直接往他人处受取依止而住。若亲教师改变性别,一日也不必守护。若亲教师为半月般哒咖,依止者若说“请等待亲教师白分到来”,或亲教师自行等待,皆可。若亲教师已受举罪甘马,因其处于不同住状态,依止即告寂止。若见其如法行持,则可等待羯磨解除。若亲教师正在行僧悦,应等待出罪。若行长期别住,应往他人处受取依止,与亲教师会合则无限量。因为别住与僧悦行者不应给予依止。至于《别住犍度注疏》所说“对同住弟子亦随喜者,仅为恶作”。显示巴利原文
83.Disaṃ gatoti tattha dhuranikkhittavāso hutvā tirogāmaṃ gato. Yattha nissayo labbhati, tattha gantabbanti etthāpi upajjhāye vuttanayeneva ‘‘katipāhena gamissāmī’’ti gamane cesa ussāho rakkhati. Mā idha paṭikkamīti mā idha gaccha. Sabhāgā nāma upajjhāyassa sissā. Tattha nissayaṃ gahetvā. Yadi evaṃ ko visesoti ce? Tena idaṃ vuccati ‘‘appeva nāma khameyyā’’ti. Vasituṃ vaṭṭatīti upajjhāyena pariccattattā upajjhāyasamodhānaṃ niratthakanti attho. Sace upajjhāyo cirena anuggahetukāmo hoti, tato paṭṭhāya upajjhāyova nissayo. Upajjhāyo ce alajjī hoti, saddhivihārikena anekakkhattuṃ vāretvā aviramantaṃ upajjhāyaṃ pahāya vināpi nissayapaṇāmanena aññassa santike nissayaṃ gahetvā vasitabbaṃ. Upajjhāyassa ce liṅgaṃ parivattati, ekadivasampi na rakkhati. Pakkhapaṇḍako ce hoti, nissayajātiko ce ‘‘upajjhāyassa sukkapakkhaṃ āgamehī’’ti vadati, sayameva vā āgameti, vaṭṭati. Upajjhāyo ce ukkhepaniyakammakato hoti, nānāsaṃvāsakabhūmiyaṃ ṭhitattā nissayo paṭippassambhati. Sammāvattantaṃ pana passitvā kammapaṭippassaddhiṃ āgametuṃ labhati. Mānattācārī ce hoti, abbhānaṃ āgametabbaṃ. Dīghaṃ ce parivāsaṃ carati, aññassa santike nissayo gahetabbo, upajjhāyasamodhānaṃ appamāṇaṃ. Parivāsamānattacārinā hi na nissayo dātabbo. Yaṃ pana pārivāsikakkhandhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘saddhivihārikānampi sādiyantassa dukkaṭamevā’’tiādi (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 75), taṃ yathāvuttamatthaṃ sādheti eva. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘sace saddhāpabbajitā kulaputtā ‘tumhe, bhante, vinayakammamattaṃ karothā’’ti vatvā vattaṃ karontiyeva, gāmappavesanaṃ āpucchantiyeva, taṃ vāritakālato paṭṭhāya anāpattī’’ti. Taṃ vattasādiyanapaccayā dukkaṭābhāvamattadīpanatthaṃ, saddhivihārikānaṃ sāpekkhataṃ vā sandhāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tasmā te ce upajjhāyena vāritānurūpameva paṭipajjanti, nissayo tesaṃ paṭippassaddhoti siddhaṃ hoti.
“越过两块土块投掷距离后返回”——有文献记载:“达到此一程度,即名为离去此方。因此,纵使同住弟子尚未放下职责,依止亦告寂止。若师长与亲教师不越过两块土块投掷距离,而住于两块土块投掷距离内——不论该处有围墙或无围墙,皆属可行。”然而,乌波底萨长老对“即在无围墙处”之说并不认同:此处所谓住于无围墙处,意指住于应有围墙范围以外的另一寺院。此处所称“寺院”,据说乌波底萨长老认为,是指位于该寺院边陲的一间小屋。于此,“若师徒二人皆因某事……依止不得寂止”这句依通说而作的注疏语,与法喜长老之说相符。而“或在无围墙处”,即两块土块投掷距离以内,不论有围墙与否。然而,由于亦提到“寺外界”,若住于寺界之内而超出两块土块投掷距离者,依止亦得成立;据此,乌波底萨长老之说便无法相符。在同一住处,不论有墙无墙,纵使住于三由旬之内,依止亦不寂止。该住处由近行界所界定,而近行界乃以有围墙寺院之围墙、无围墙寺院之应围区域为界限,视为同一住处。显示巴利原文
Dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvā nivattatīti ‘‘ettāvatā disāpakkanto nāma hoti, tasmā antevāsike anikkhittadhurepi nissayo paṭippassambhati. Ācariyupajjhāyā dve leḍḍupāte anatikkamma leḍḍupātadvayabbhantare tirovihārepi parikkhitte, aparikkhitte vā vasituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti likhitaṃ. Aparikkhitteyevāti no takkoti ācariyo, ettha pana aparikkhittassa parikkhepārahaṭṭhānato vimutte aññasmiṃ vihāre vasantīti adhippāyo. Vihāroti cettha ‘‘tādisassa vihārassa ante ṭhitā ekā kuṭikā adhippetāti upatissatthero’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘sace ubhopi ācariyantevāsikā kenaci…pe… nissayo na paṭippassambhatī’’ti iminā sāmaññato vuttena aṭṭhakathāvacanena dhammasirittheravādo sameti. Aparikkhitte vāti dvinnaṃ leḍḍupātānaṃ anto parikkhitto vā hoti aparikkhitto vā. ‘‘Bahisīma’’nti ca vuttattā antovihārasīmāyaṃ dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvāpi vasituṃ vaṭṭatīti siddhattā pana upatissattheravādo na sameti. Ekāvāse hi parikkhitte vā aparikkhitte vā antamaso antotiyojanepi vasato nissayo na paṭippassambhati. So ca upacārasīmāya paricchinno, sā ca upacārasīmā parikkhittassa vihārassa parikkhepena aparikkhittassa parikkhepārahaṭṭhānena paricchinno ekāvāso.
若问:《布萨犍度》中关于同一住处的疑惑,是否因界已开许?答:并非如此,因为《衣犍度注疏》已作辨析。如说:“界内僧团应分取”。那么,应于何种界分取?据说大西瓦长老说:“于不别住界”。对此有人反驳:“所谓不别住界,可达三由旬。若是如此,住于三由旬处者将领取利养,住于三由旬处须完成客比丘义务方可入寺,出行者往三由旬处须告假住处,依止行者若越过三由旬,依止即舍断,别住者须越过三由旬后令明相现起,比丘尼须住于三由旬处告假入寺——凡此种种,依近行界来划分方为合理。”因此,安住于近行界之内,即使越过两块土块投掷距离,依止并不因越过三由旬而舍断,此义已得成立。当然,此处若近行界恰好为三由旬或更大,前述过失便可能产生。因其随住处增大而增大,随减少而减少,故此处所谓“寺院”,是指位于该寺院边缘的一间小屋。因其也是该寺院所属的小屋,故为同一住处。若所指为不同住处,则不应说“位于边缘之小屋”。而于两块土块投掷距离内、无围墙的不同住处,依止不舍断——这即是前文所说“不以为然”之论,乃是针对此类不同住处中,住处执取不舍断的道理。显示巴利原文
Uposathakkhandhake ekāvāsavimatiyaṃ sīmāya anuññātattāti ce? Na, cīvarakkhandhakaṭṭhakathāya vicāritattā. Yathāha ‘‘sīmaṭṭhakasaṅgho bhājetvā gaṇhātū’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 379). Katarasīmāya bhājetabbaṃ? Mahāsivatthero kirāha ‘‘avippavāsasīmāyā’’ti. Tato naṃ āhaṃsu ‘‘avippavāsasīmā nāma tiyojanāpi hoti, evaṃ sante tiyojane ṭhitā lābhaṃ gaṇhissanti, tiyojane ṭhatvā āgantukavattaṃ pūretvā ārāmaṃ pavisitabbaṃ bhavissati, gamiko tiyojanaṃ gantvā senāsanaṃ āpucchissati, nissayapaṭippannassa tiyojanātikkame nissayo paṭippassambhissati, pārivāsikena tiyojanaṃ atikkamitvā aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpetabbaṃ bhavissati, bhikkhuniyā tiyojane ṭhatvā ārāmappavesanā āpucchitabbā bhavissati, sabbametaṃ upacārasīmāparicchedavasena kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti. Tasmā antoupacārasīmāya leḍḍupātadvayaṃ atikkamitvāpi vasato nissayo tiyojanātikkame nissayo na paṭippassambhatīti siddhaṃ. Kāmañcettha upacārasīmāya tiyojanappamāṇāya, atirekāya vā yathāvuttadosappasaṅgo siyāti. Sā hi āvāsesu vaḍḍhantesu vaḍḍhati, parihāyantesu parihāyatīti vuttattā, tasmā tādisassa vihārassa ante ṭhitā ekā kuṭi vihāroti idhādhippetā. Sāpi tasseva vihārassa kuṭikāva hotīti katvā so āvāso hoti. Nānāvāso eva ce adhippeto, ‘‘ante ṭhitā kuṭikā’’ti na vattabbaṃ. Dvinnaṃ leḍḍupātānaṃ abbhantare pana aparikkhitte nānāvāse nissayo na paṭippassambhatīti yvāyaṃ ‘‘no takko’’ti vutto, so tādise nānāvāse senāsanaggāhassa appaṭippassaddhinayena vutto. Senāsanaggāho hi ‘‘gahaṇena gahaṇaṃ ālayo paṭippassambhatī’’ti lakkhaṇattā itarattha paṭippassambhati. Tatrāyaṃ pāḷi ‘‘tena kho pana samayena āyasmā upanando sakyaputto eko dvīsu āvāsesu vassaṃ vasi…pe… detha, bhikkhave, moghapurisassa ekādhippāya’’nti (mahāva. 364). Aṭṭhakathāyañcassa evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘idañca nānālābhehi nānūpacārehi ekasīmavihārehi kathitaṃ, nānāsīmavihāre pana senāsanaggāho paṭippassambhatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 364). Aparikkhittā nānāvāsā ekūpacārasaṅkhyaṃ gacchanti. Parikkhittañca ekūpacāraṃ aparikkhittasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Ettāvatā leḍḍupātadvayabbhantare aparikkhitte aññasmiṃ vihāre vasato nissayo pana na paṭippassambhati, parikkhitte paṭippassambhati evāti ayamattho sādhitoti. Etthāha – dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvāva satopi nissayo na paṭippassambhati. Vuttañhi nissaggiyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sace gacchantānaṃyeva asampattesu daharesu aruṇaṃ uggacchati, cīvaraṃ nissaggiyaṃ hoti, nissayo pana na paṭippassambhatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.495)? Vuccate – taṃ upajjhāyena samāgame saussāhatāya vuttaṃ. Idha dhuvavāsaṃ sandhāya, tasmā aññamaññaṃ na vilomenti . Keci pana ‘‘dve leḍḍupātaṃ atikkammāti idaṃ devasikaṃ ārocetvā vasanavasena vutta’’nti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattamevāti mama takko. Devasikaṃ ārocetvā vatthabbanti hi neva pāḷiyaṃ na aṭṭhakathāyaṃ dissati, tañca pana apakataññūhi āciṇṇanti veditabbaṃ.
应授具足戒五法论解释显示巴利原文
Upasampādetabbapañcakakathāvaṇṇanā
84 84.“非以无学戒蕴”等语,是依“先自安立于相应处”的经文而说,并非从犯戒的要素而言。正如与蓝色结合而说为蓝色,同理,也说“以无学解脱智见蕴”。在增上戒中,“戒律败坏者”是指已犯戒而尚未出罪者。显示巴利原文
84.Naasekkhena sīlakkhandhenātiādi ‘‘attānameva paṭhamaṃ, patirūpe nivesaye’’ti (dha. pa. 158) vacanavasena vuttaṃ, na āpattiaṅgavasena. Nīlasamāyogato nīlaṃ viya vuttaṃ ‘‘asekkhena vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandhenā’’ti. Adhisīle sīlavipanno nāma āpajjitvā avuṭṭhito.
外道先前事论解释显示巴利原文
Aññatitthiyapubbavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
86 “彼名为曾属外道者”一语有两种解释:一、依彼波苏拉比丘的身份而言,原先曾属外道,后来又转向同一外道宗派,此为一解。二、如此脱离外道后,又以在家者身份前来,彼即为曾属外道者,此人前来不可令其受具足戒,此为另一解。除去这些离开外道者,“比丘们,彼名为曾属外道者”中的“曾”字,并非仅指身穿在家服装者,也包含仍穿着其所受外道服装者。因邪见而曾为外道之人,若还俗后再来,无需给予别住。这位曾属外道者,身穿比丘服装,是否通过皈依成为沙弥而出家?就此事而言:若已得出家,则与“比丘们,若有其他曾属外道者,希望于此法律中出家、希望受具足戒,应给予四个月别住”之语相矛盾;若未得出家,则又与别住甘马语中未提及出家之说相矛盾。对此,大寺住者说:“应对尚为沙弥者给予别住。”其余人则不如此说。他们认为:“‘比丘们,如此随顺者,曾属外道者前来应令受具足戒’这一经文必须维护;而且由于前后皆有‘曾属外道者’之语,若未成沙弥——便等于未经出家即令受具足戒,这便是所陷入的过失。由此,最初所说的经文即相矛盾。‘转入外道宗派’的读法也不妥善。若违显示巴利原文
86.Yo so aññatitthiyapubboti ettha dve atthavikappā – tassa pasūrassa bhikkhubhāvaṃ sandhāya aññatitthiyapubbo, so bhikkhu taṃyeva titthāyatanaṃ saṅkamīti ayameko attho. Evaṃ titthiyapakkantako puna gihivesena āgato aññatitthiyapubbo, so āgato na upasampādetabboti ayameko attho. Taṃ aññatitthiyapakkantakaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘yo so, bhikkhave, aññatitthiyapubbo’’ti ettha na gihivesadhāraṇova pubbasaddena vutto, kintu tasmiṃ attano yathāsamādinnatitthiyavese ṭhitopi. Diṭṭhivasena atitthiyabhūtattā atitthiyapubbo, so panāgato vibbhanto āgacchati, tassa parivāsadānakiccaṃ natthi. Kiṃ imassa aññatitthiyapubbassa bhikkhuvesaṃ gahetvā saraṇagamanena sāmaṇerapabbajjā jātā, na jātāti? Kiñcettha yadi jātā, ‘‘yo so, bhikkhave, aññopi aññatitthiyapubbo imasmiṃ dhammavinaye ākaṅkhati pabbajjaṃ, ākaṅkhati upasampadaṃ, tassa cattāro māse parivāso dātabbo’’ti (mahāva. 86) vacanaṃ virujjhati. Atha na jātā, parivāsakammavācāya pabbajjāya aparāmasanaṃ virujjhatīti. Tattha mahāvihāravāsino ‘‘sāmaṇerasseva sato parivāso dātabbo’’ti vadanti. Itare tathā na vadanti. Te hi ‘‘evaṃ ārādhako kho bhikkhave aññatitthiyapubbo āgato upasampādetabbo’ti (mahāva. 87) suttapadaṃ pariharitabbaṃ, pure ca pacchā ca ‘aññatitthiyapubbo’ti vacanasāmaññato na sāmaṇero jātoti ce, yadi evaṃ apabbājetvāva upasampādetabboti āpajjati. Tato ca sabbapaṭhamaṃ vuttasuttaṃ virujjhati. ‘Titthāyatanaṃ saṅkanto’ti pāṭhopi na sundaraṃ. Pāṇātipātādīsu aññataraṃ sace bhindati, cattāro māse paripuṇṇepi puna paripūretabbaṃ viya dissati. Vuttampi tassa saṃvaraṃ bhikkhukaraṇatthāya anuññātattā sīle vattabbaṃ natthī’’ti vadanti, vicāretvā gahetabbaṃ. Saraṇāni sace bhijjanti sāmaṇerasseva.
五病事论释显示巴利原文
Pañcābādhavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
88 “指甲背面”是指小指的指甲背面。有人说:“在遮蔽处,从指甲背面起,即使纹身面积较大也可以,其他部位也是如此。”这似乎与注疏不相符。莲花花蕊处,攀上时呈现红莲色的彩纹。显示巴利原文
88.Nakhapiṭṭhīti cūḷaṅgulinakhapiṭṭhi adhippetā. ‘‘Paṭicchanne nakhapiṭṭhito mahantampi vaṭṭati, evaṃ sesesupī’’ti keci vadanti, taṃ aṭṭhakathāya na sameti viya. Padumakaṇṇikāpi āruḷhe rattapadumavaṇṇacitraṃ.
盗贼事论注释显示巴利原文
Coravatthukathāvaṇṇanā
91-2 “法主”一词:因世尊自身即是法主,所以使诸比丘将鸯掘摩罗——即便是应被摈逐的盗贼——也度令出家,并在将来如此宣说,这就是它的含义。在巴利语本中,也有写作“持刀者”的版本。“已就坐者”,意为“已平息者”。显示巴利原文
91-2.Dhammasāmīti yasmā sayaṃ dhammasāmī, tasmā bhikkhūhi apabbājetabbakampi coraṃ aṅgulimālaṃ pabbājetvā āyatiṃ evamāhāti attho. Pāḷipotthakesu ‘‘kharabhedako’’tipi likhitaṃ. Sannisinnāsūti vūpasantāsu.
负债者与奴仆事论注释显示巴利原文
Iṇāyikadāsavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
96 “请看,我仅有钵与衣,我愿以此布施”——此为如法之举,故无犯戒。所谓“各半各半”,即是“少许少许”的意思。显示巴利原文
96. Passa me pattacīvaramattaṃ, ahaṃ idaṃ dassāmīti sāmīci, yato natthi āpatti. Upaḍḍhupaḍḍhanti thokaṃ thokaṃ.
97 所谓“地方习俗”,是指各地所遵行的习俗,如宣告、署名等。注疏中写道:“神庙女婢之子可行。”又说:“若想让园丁出家,须另交一人代替,方可令其出家。”这便是《大护钵》在此处的意趣。由于是以“我们将此人布施给比丘僧团作为园丁”的名义而施与的,所以他们并非僧团的奴隶。注疏中也写道:“园丁既非奴隶,亦非自由人,因此就‘不可称为奴隶’来说,他并非奴隶。”在僧伽罗岛,以酪浆浇洒乃是当地风俗。他们既是僧团的园丁,故应允许其出家。无主的奴隶,也可以自行使他成为自由人。注疏中还写道:“据说,奴隶出家后,若见到原来的主人而逃走,并不犯戒。”其含义是:或者该奴隶原本就属于自己,而此人现已出家成为比丘。至于无主的奴隶,国王即是其主人,因此应先禀明国王或该村之人,方可令其出家——这是一些人的观点。注疏中写的是“使其成为自由人”。他们就其解脱的方法说道:“应使他达到自由人的状态。”在如此表明意向后,有些典籍写道“无实际用途”。“必须使其成为自由人方可”——这是就“如果被发现,将会被追究”而说的,在此情况下无犯戒。据说“他们不清净,我也同样”,这句话也是就此而说的。显示巴利原文
97.Desacārittanti sāvanapaṇṇāropanādi taṃ taṃ desacārittaṃ. ‘‘Devadāsiputte vaṭṭatī’’ti likhitaṃ. ‘‘Ārāmikaṃ ce pabbājetukāmo, aññamekaṃ datvā pabbājetabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Mahāpaccarivādassa ayamidha adhippāyo. ‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghassa ārāmike demā’’ti dinnattā na te tesaṃ dāsā. ‘‘Ārāmiko ca neva dāso na bhujissoti vattabbato na dāso’’ti likhitaṃ. Takkāsiñcanaṃ sīhaḷadīpe cārittaṃ. Te ca pabbājetabbā saṅghassārāmikattā. Nissāmikaṃ dāsaṃ attanāpi bhujissaṃ kātuṃ labhati. ‘‘Dāsassa pabbajitvā attano sāmike disvā palāyantassa āpatti natthīti vadantī’’ti ca likhitaṃ. Attano vā dāso assa bhikkhunoti attho. Nissāmikassa dāsassa rājā sāmi, tasmā rājānaṃ vā tasmiṃ gāme manusse vā āpucchitvā pabbājetabboti eke. ‘‘Bhujissaṃ katvā’’ti likhitaṃ. Tassa parihāraṃ bhaṇanti ‘‘yathā bhujisso hoti, tathā kattabbo’’ti. Evaṃ saṅkappena vatvā ‘‘payojanaṃ natthī’’ti kehici likhitaṃ. Bhujissaṃ kātumeva vaṭṭatīti ‘‘sace passanti, anubandhissantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Āpatti natthi. ‘‘Asuddhā kira metipi taṃ sandhāyeva vutta’’nti vadanti.
铁匠般度事缘等释义显示巴利原文
Kammārabhaṇḍuvatthādikathāvaṇṇanā
98 “铁匠般度”:此处,孩童仅留着顶髻前来,故可加以询问。若他本人或他人将其带走,亦无过失。他们还说:“未剃除须发,因疏忽而授予皈依并令其出家,也依然成立。”显示巴利原文
98.Kammārabhaṇḍūti ettha dārako cūḷāmattaṃ ṭhapetvā āgacchati, tasmā āpucchituṃ labhati. Tañce so vā añño vā avaharati, doso natthi. ‘‘Kesamassuorohanaṃ akatvā asatiyā saraṇāni datvā pabbājeti, ruhatevā’’ti vadanti.
101-3 此处,关于“家族”一词。文中说:“‘彼之两者……乃至……随好相’——有关一切方法的分类,在《摩呾理迦注疏》中当可了知。”又说:“即便‘知犯戒’这一文句不成立,若知‘因做此事而犯此戒’,亦无不可。”又说:“应当这样理解:须先令其熟习前面的文句;对阿阇梨与和尚也是如此。”显示巴利原文
101-3.Ettha kule. ‘‘Ubhayāni kho panassa…pe… anubyañjanasoti sabbopāyaṃ pabhedo mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ ñāto hotī’’ti ca ‘‘āpattiṃ jānātīti pāṭhe avattamānepi idaṃ nāma katvā idaṃ āpajjatīti jānāti ce, vaṭṭatī’’ti ca likhitaṃ. ‘‘Tañca kho tato pubbe pāṭhe paguṇe kateti gahetabbaṃ, ācariyupajjhāyānampi eseva nayo’’ti vuttaṃ.
罗睺罗事缘释义显示巴利原文
Rāhulavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
105 “尊者,树木现今已成炭色”等(出自《长老偈》第527偈),共有约六十首偈颂。“请这样命令我”——此处当引入“这样”一词来理解。“如莲叶色的雨”:即颜色如同莲叶的水;当雨降落时,想被淋湿的人便让自己淋湿。“从头巾处起”:即从头顶开始。显示巴利原文
105. ‘‘Aṅgārino dāni dumā bhadante’’tiādīhi (theragā. 527) saṭṭhimattāhi. Dassehi iti maṃ āṇāpesi. Ettha iti-saddo āharitabbo. Pokkharavassanti pokkharapattavaṇṇaṃ udakaṃ, tamhi vassante temitukāmāva tementi. Uṇhīsato paṭṭhāyāti muddhato paṭṭhāya.
润泽、绀青、柔软、卷曲之发,
其额如日轮般清净无垢,
鼻梁匀称、高挺、柔软而修长,
光芒之网遍覆,人中狮子。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Siniddhanīlamudukuñcitakeso , Sūriyanimmalatalābhinalāṭo; Yuttatuṅgamudukāyatanāso, Raṃsijālavitato narasīho’’ti. (apa. aṭṭha. 1.santikenidānakathā; jā. aṭṭha. 1.santikenidānakathā) –
以最初偈颂说明。又或者——显示巴利原文
Ādigāthāhi. Atha vā –
轮相庄严、红润善美的双足,
相好严饰、修长的脚踵;
足为拂尘、华盖所庄严
这就是您的父亲,人中狮子。
释迦族最胜王子,身极柔嫩,
全身充满种种相好庄严
人中勇士,为利益世间而行
那就是你的父亲,人中狮子
面色如满月般皎洁,
天人所爱,人中龙象;
行步如醉象王般威仪游戏,
这就是你的父亲,人中狮子。
刹帝利种姓,出于最胜家族,
为诸天与人所礼足者;
心安住于戒与定
此即汝父,人中狮子
鼻梁修长、匀称、安立端正
眼睫如牛王,目色深蓝美妙。
颈项圆润,形状妙好,相好安立,
颔如狮王,身似兽王,
皮肤呈金色之净,端严美妙,具足最上之色相,
这就是你的父亲,人中狮子。
他的音声清净、甚深、柔和、美妙,
舌如朱砂般红润善美。
发色深蓝,宛如眼膏般美妙,
额头犹如金片般清净;
眉间白毫,如药星般洁白清净,
这便是你的父亲,人中狮子。
如月游于青空之道,
为群星所拱卫之相;
沙门之主处声闻众中,
这正是你的父亲,人中狮子。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Cakkavaraṅkitarattasupādo, Lakkhaṇamaṇḍitaāyatapaṇhi; Cāmarachattavibhūsitapādo, Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Sakyakumāravaro sukhumālo, Lakkhaṇacittikapuṇṇasarīro; Lokahitāya gato naravīro, Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Puṇṇasasaṅkanibho mukhavaṇṇo, Devanarāna piyo naranāgo; Mattagajindavilāsitagāmī, Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Khattiyasambhavaaggakulīno , Devamanussanamassitapādo; Sīlasamādhipatiṭṭhitacitto, Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Āyatayuttasusaṇṭhitanāso, Gopakhumo abhinīlasunetto; Indadhanū abhinīlabhamūko, Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Vaṭṭasuvaṭṭasusaṇṭhitagīvo, Sīhahanū migarājasarīro; Kañcanasucchaviuttamavaṇṇo, Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Suddhasugambhīramañjusaghoso, Hiṅgulabaddhasurattasujivho; Vīsati vīsati setasudanto, Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Añjanavaṇṇasunīlasukeso, Kañcanapaṭṭavisuddhanalāṭo; Osadhipaṇḍarasuddhasuuṇṇo, Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Gacchatinīlapathe viya cando, Tāragaṇāpariveṭhitarūpo; Sāvakamajjhagato samaṇindo, Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho’’ti. (jā. aṭṭha. 1.santikenidānakathā) –
‘应起’的意思是‘应当如此行持’,是对自己而言。而‘uttiṭṭhe’是《法句》中的读法。‘法’是指次第乞食的行仪。远离邪命之后,应行善法。显示巴利原文
Uddiṭṭheti evaṃ caritabbanti attano, ‘‘uttiṭṭhe’’ti dhammapadapāṭho. Dhammanti sapadānacārikavattaṃ. Anesanaṃ vajjetvā sucaritaṃ care.
‘剃发’,即除去五髻之形,唯留一髻之形。‘头巾’,此处指该家族所惯用的特殊装饰。‘家庆’,即家中的庆典。‘伞庆’,即太子的伞盖庆典。‘随转’,指随烦恼而轮转。因有障碍之缘故,故说为有障碍。长老先前已令罗陀婆罗门出家,现在为何又说‘尊者,我如何令罗睺罗出家’呢?这是意指拒绝授与具足戒。由此可知,世尊为了断除未来的疑惑而如此说:‘世尊本身拒绝授与具足戒。’依心生色之理,故说‘触及骨髓’。诸佛与转轮圣王的差别,应以智慧等来觉了;否则,难陀等人出家后也应成佛,因为经中有‘若出家,则成佛’之语。显示巴利原文
Kesavissajjananti pañcasikhākāraṃ vajjetvā ekasikhākāraṃ. Paṭṭabandhoti ettha paṭṭoti tasmiṃ kule āciṇṇo alaṅkāraviseso. Gharamaṅgalanti gharamaho. Chattamaṅgalanti yuvarājachattapaṭṭi. Vaṭṭānugatanti kilesavaṭṭānugataṃ. Vighātapaccayattā savighātakaṃ. Thero rādhaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ pubbe pabbajitvā kasmā idāni ‘‘kathāhaṃ, bhante, rāhulaṃ pabbājemī’’ti āhāti ce? Tattha upasampadāpaṭikkhepo adhippeto, tasmā ‘‘bhagavā upasampadameva paṭikkhipi, idāni anāgate saṃsayāpanayanādhippāyo bhagavā’’ti ñatvā āha. Cittasamuṭṭhānarūpavasena ‘‘aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhaccā’’ti vuttaṃ kira. Buddhānaṃ, cakkavattīnañca byattādivasena nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ, aññathā nandādayopi pabbajitvā buddhā siyuṃ ‘‘sace pabbajati, buddho hotī’’ti vacanato.
‘遣送’,指可令相见;‘我将问’,指可令出家。这是因为,远行者依世俗惯例,也被称为脱离父母住处、各自随意而住的人,因此他们如同不在场的一方,故说‘不对其出家阿阇梨等生起不信’,这样的说法并没有过失。‘出家者同行’是世俗的用语。因此,这里以遭遇苦难等而前往他方,也视为同行。‘往他方’:此处的‘他方’是指父母住处以外的地方,并非指出生地。如果仅仅依字面意思为准则,则不合道理。这样一来,连父母已死的人也不应许其出家。所以应知此处意谓:尚未到达不应到达之处而住、且未得父母许可的孩子,不应令其出家。否则便与圣典相违,而且注疏不应让犯缘变得宽松。暂且如此,但‘我将烧寺院’等说法如何不构成相违呢?因为这是出于害怕自身灾难的危险而最终出家,也是为了护持儿子而出家。如此则是他自己出家,并非被任何人诱导出家。‘出于对儿子的爱或为护子而成为所爱’,依因缘之理,故不相违。显示巴利原文
Pesetvā dassetuṃ vaṭṭati, āpucchissāmāti pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭatīti ca idaṃ yasmā videsappatto nāma lokasaṅketenāpi mātāpituvāsato mutto serivihārīti vuccati, tasmāssa te asantapakkhe ṭhitā viya hontīti katvā ‘‘na tassa pabbajjācariye vā appasādaṃ karontī’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ naṭṭhameva. Pabbajitā samagatikāti lokavohāro. Teneva cettha dukkhappattādinā desantaragamanañca samagatikaṃ kataṃ. Videsaṃ gantvāti cettha videso nāma mātāpituvāsato añño deso, na uppattidesato. Byañjanattho eva ce pamāṇaṃ, na yutti. Matamātāpitikopi na pabbājetabboti āpajjati, tasmā anuppattabbaṭṭhāne ṭhitehiyeva mātāpitūhi ananuññāto putto na pabbājetabboti evamidhādhippāyo veditabbo, aññathā pāḷiyā virujjheyya, āpattiṭṭhānassa ca sithilakaraṇaṃ aṭṭhakathāya na yujjati. Idaṃ tāva evaṃ hotu, ‘‘vihāraṃ vā jhāpemī’’tiādinayo kathaṃ na virujjhatīti ce? Attaparūpaddavappasaṅgabhayena avasena pabbajitattā, puttarakkhaṇatthaṃ pabbajitattā ca. Evañhi sati sayameva so attanā pabbajito hoti, na kenaci upalāpetvā pabbajito. ‘‘Puttapemaṃ vā puttarakkhe piyo hotī’’ti nidānānulomato na virujjhati.
学处罚羯磨事缘释义显示巴利原文
Sikkhāpadadaṇḍakammavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
107 ‘自己的住处’,即私人的住处。‘口食’,指应通过口门而进食。对于此处应使用的,他们施设障碍加以遮止。或者,在‘诸比丘,我允许施设障碍’中,所允许的障碍,他们将该障碍做成口食的食物,这是意趣所在。显示巴利原文
107.Attanopariveṇañcāti puggalikaṃ. Mukhadvārikanti mukhadvārena bhuñjitabbaṃ. Tattha niyojitabbakaṃ, tassa āvaraṇaṃ nivāraṇaṃ karonti. Atha vā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, āvaraṇaṃ kātu’’nti yaṃ āvaraṇaṃ anuññātaṃ, taṃ āvaraṇaṃ mukhadvārikaṃ āhāraṃ karontīti adhippāyo.
不问遮难事缘等释义显示巴利原文
Anāpucchāvaraṇavatthuādikathāvaṇṇanā
108 “他之破戒比丘”是其义。有人写作“破戒比丘们”,这并不妥当。然而古师们说:“若被劝告至第三次仍不停止,应征求僧团后灭摈;即使他再乞求出家,也应征求僧团后方可令出家。”“如同诸比丘的具足戒甘马语”这句话的意思是:“如同已受具足戒者舍弃学处之后,仍如原来着衣之相,后来再受具足戒时,对先前比自己戒腊低者,要重新行礼拜等;同样地,沙弥再受皈依后,亦当对此前比自己戒腊低的沙弥,重新行礼拜等。然而在这里,容色并不能成就更长的戒腊,这是所说的意思。”有人说:“非时食对沙弥们仅是一种违犯。”应当以“尊者,罪过已降临于我”等事理,令其忏悔罪过。有说:“若不舍弃邪见,仅被说‘你,沙弥,离去’便成波罗夷”;又说:“因为说‘至第三次’,且仅以说佛陀等恶语及仅以执取邪见,皈依体并未破失。”如此,我思惟对作杀生等者亦应如此。有人说:“对无戒者更应加以灭摈”,这似乎合理。因为世尊不允许对有戒者作形的灭摈,此事应审察。古师们说:“是以染污比丘尼为借口,而摄受应得与不应得者。”“亦不得出家”,即如此中所示的义理;同样地,以“诸比丘,黄门未受具足戒者不应令受具足戒,已受具足戒者应当灭摈。”
},
{显示巴利原文
108. Parassa dussīlabhikkhussapīti attho. Keci ‘‘dussīlabhikkhūpī’’ti likhanti, taṃ na sundaraṃ. Porāṇā pana ‘‘yāvatatiyaṃ vuccamāno ce na oramati, saṅghaṃ apaloketvā nāsetabbo, puna pabbajjaṃ yācamānopi apaloketvā pabbājetabbo’’ti vadanti. Bhikkhūnaṃ upasampadakammavācāsadisanti ettha ‘‘yathā upasampanno sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya yathānivatthapārutova hutvā pacchā upasampanno pubbe attano navakatarassa samānavassikassa puna vandanādīni karoti, evaṃ sāmaṇeropi puna gahitasaraṇo tato pubbe attano navakatarassa samānavassikassa sāmaṇerassa puna vandanādīni karoti. Liṅgaṃ panettha vuḍḍhatarabhāvaṃ na sādhetīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Vikālabhojanaṃ sāmaṇerānaṃ vītikkamevāti eke. ‘‘Accayo maṃ, bhante, accāgamā’’tiādinā nayena accayaṃ desāpetabbo. ‘‘Diṭṭhiyā anissajjanena ‘tvaṃ, sāmaṇera, gacchā’ti vutteyeva pārājiko hotī’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘yāvatatiyanti vuttattā buddhādīnaṃ avaṇṇabhāsitamattena ca diṭṭhiggahitamattena ca saraṇāni na bhijjantīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti vadanti. Evaṃ sante pāṇātipātādiṃ karontassāpi taṃ sambhotīti mama takko. ‘‘Nissīlassa puna nāsanā vuttā’’ti ca keci vadanti, taṃ yuttaṃ viya. Na hi bhagavā sīlavantassa liṅganāsanaṃ anujānātīti vicāretabbaṃ, bhikkhunidūsakāpadesena bhabbābhabbe saṅgaṇhātīti porāṇā. ‘‘Pabbajjampi na labhatīti yathā cettha ayamattho dassito, tathā ‘paṇḍako, bhikkhave, anupasampanno na upasampādetabbo, upasampanno nāsetabbo’ti (mahāva. 109) ādinā nayena vuttānampi pabbajjaṃ natthīti dīpitaṃ hoti. Na hi idaṃ ṭhānaṃ ṭhapetvā tesaṃ pabbajjāya vāritaṭṭhānaṃ atthi. ‘Bhikkhunidūsako, bhikkhave, anupasampanno na upasampādetabbo, upasampanno nāsetabbo’ti (mahāva. 114) vuttenapi samānattā tassa pabbajjā viya tesampi pabbajjā vāritāva hotītipi dassetuṃ puna bhikkhunidūsakoti gahitanti apare’’ti vuttaṃ. Kiṃ iminā? Nanu aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘yassa cettha pabbajjā vāritā, taṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ anupasampanno na upasampādetabbo, upasampanno nāsetabbo’’ti.
般哒咖事缘释义显示巴利原文
Paṇḍakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
109 生来般哒咖因下劣根性故,未出家者出家被遮止,已出家者不应作具足戒。若先前已具足戒者有亲近行为,不应作灭摈,这不是推论,阿阇梨如是说。断根生者非般哒咖。五种无男根般哒咖中,只有无男根般哒咖是无性者。其余四种应知为有性者。然而他们之性为般哒咖。有些人说此四种亦为男子。有些人说女人亦有偏般哒咖。作行为后,般哒咖性必定有,故不得出家。“然而若对某人无,出家不被遮止,如是说决断”,如是所说。显示巴利原文
109. Opakkamikapaṇḍakassa hīnaṅgattā apabbajitassa pabbajjā vāritā, pabbajitassa upasampadā na kātabbā. Pubbe upasampannassa ce upacaraṇaṃ atthi, na nāsanā kātabbāti no takkoti ācariyo. Chinnaṅgajāto na paṇḍako. Pañcasu napuṃsakapaṇḍakova abhāvako. Itare cattāro sabhāvakāti veditabbā. Bhāvo pana tesaṃ paṇḍako hoti. Ete cattāropi kira purisāvāti eke. Itthīpi pakkhapaṇḍakī hotīti eke. Upakkame kate paṇḍakabhāvo avassaṃ hoti, tasmā pabbajjaṃ na labhati. ‘‘Yadi pana kassaci na hoti, pabbajjā na vāritāti vinicchayaṃ vadantī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“出家被遮止”者,意趣为:在非般哒咖方面应令出家,在般哒咖方面应灭摈。如是所书。然而在古义疏中,与马萨般哒咖、列卡般哒咖一起说有七种般哒咖。其中,列卡般哒咖者,据说是依咒术而被损坏种子者。于此说:“奥巴咖米咖列卡般哒咖已出家者不应灭摈。若令出家者,犯恶作。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Pabbajjā vāritāti apaṇḍakapakkhe pabbājetvā paṇḍakapakkhe nāsetabboti adhippāyo’’ti likhitaṃ. Porāṇagaṇṭhipade pana māsapaṇḍakalekhapaṇḍakehi saha satta paṇḍakā vuttā. Tattha lekhapaṇḍako nāma kira mantavasena upahatabījo. Tattha ‘‘opakkamikalekhapaṇḍakā pabbajitā na nāsetabbā. Yo pabbājeti, tassa dukkaṭa’’nti ca vuttaṃ.
贼住者事缘释义显示巴利原文
Theyyasaṃvāsakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
110 一一〇、关于“贼住”者:在此,虽然依文义仅以“共住”之义而显现为“贼住”,然而实则有三种贼住。此处所说的“共住”,并非指同一羯磨等共住,而是指比丘的戒腊计算等行事差别,在此称为共住。因为此事可以盗窃方式为之,而非其他,这是注疏的意旨。往赴他国出家者,若在被问时声称“有十年戒腊”等,即有过失。若对在家人说,则无过失,有人如此主张。因王难等而取著袈裟相者,虽有“愿在家人知我是沙门”的欺诳心,但因没有欺诳比丘的意图,也没有与他们共住的意图,故不构成过失。“一切外道之食”者,指来到寺院而取用僧团物品者,因其难以避免共住之嫌疑,故如此说,这是记载中所说。因说“善具戒者”,故若在家人,若令其受具足戒,则成为犯“善具戒”;“正在未具足戒时”一语,是显示:若在具足戒羯磨进行时听闻其事,即使不告知,也是“善具戒者”。在《安德咖注疏》及《古义疏》中,将恶戒比丘称为“贼住”,应理解为以“诸比丘,汝等以盗窃方式受用国家布施的食物”这一方式而言。因此说“不应取彼”。“在玛哈贝喇等处”一语,以此显示在家人之相续。显示巴利原文
110.Theyyasaṃvāsakoti ettha kiñcāpi byañjanatthavasena saṃvāsatthenakova theyyasaṃvāsakoti paññāyati, atha kho tayo theyyasaṃvāsakā. Saṃvāsoti cettha na ekakammādiko saṃvāso, kintu bhikkhuvassagaṇanādiko kiriyabhedo idha saṃvāso nāma. Imañhi sakkā theyyāya kātuṃ, netaranti aṭṭhakathāya adhippāyo. Videsaṃ gantvā pabbajitehi pucchite ‘‘dasavasso’’tiādiṃ bhaṇantassa doso. Gihīnaṃ vutte doso natthīti keci. Rājabhayādīhi gahitaliṅgānaṃ ‘‘gihī maṃ samaṇoti jānātū’’ti vañcanacitte satipi bhikkhūnaṃ vañcetukāmatāya, tehi saṃvasitukāmatāya ca abhāvā doso na jāto. ‘‘Sabbapāsaṇḍiyabhattānīti vihāraṃ āgantvā saṅghikaṃ gaṇhantassa saṃvāsaṃ pariharituṃ dukkaraṃ, tasmā vutta’’nti ca likhitaṃ. ‘‘Sūpasampanno’’ti vuttattā gahaṭṭhampi sace upasampādenti, sūpasampannoti āpannaṃ, ‘‘anupasampannakāleyevā’’ti iminā sace upasampannakāle suṇāti, sūpasampanno eva anārocentopīti dasseti. Andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ, porāṇagaṇṭhipadesu ca dussīlabhikkhu ‘‘theyyasaṃvāsako’’ti vutto ‘‘theyyāya vo, bhikkhave, raṭṭhapiṇḍo bhutto’’ti (pārā. 195) iminā kira pariyāyenāti veditabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘taṃ na gahetabba’’nti. ‘‘Mahāpeḷādīsū’’ti etena gihisantakaṃ dassitaṃ.
自己仅作为沙弥而虚报戒腊并受取者,即犯波罗夷,然而并非贼住;比丘也是如此。但此人应以物品价值来处置,出于此意而说“自己仅作为沙弥”等语。然而,这名为“贼住”者,因为已经属于出家者,而非未出家者,所以不能如对待般哒咖等人那样,制定“诸比丘,贼住者,未出家者不应令出家,已出家者应驱摈”这样的规定。经典中之所以安立“未受具足戒者不应令受具足戒”等条文,并非仅仅因为受具足戒本身无资格,而是为了避免这十一类人亦可出家的过失。又为避免出现不欲之过失,经典才如此安立。因为外道离去者与破僧者,仅是已受具足戒者的事,不是未受具足戒者的事;那两种人也已经是出家者,并非未出家者。因此,若有“诸比丘,外道离去者,未出家者不应令出家”等经文,这二者就都会变成不应令出家,从而陷入不欲之过失。然而,在三种贼住之中,依止沙弥而作者是持相盗窃者,依止受具足戒而作者是共住盗窃者,兼具二义的则是二义盗窃者。因为沙弥的共住在教法中并不称为“共住”,所以注疏中有人说:“比丘的戒腊计算等一切行事差别,于此义中称为共住。”依循长幼之礼拜、欢喜承事、拒绝迎接、遮止等,依沙弥共住之共通性而非如是,这是阿阇黎所说。显示巴利原文
Sayaṃ sāmaṇerova kūṭavassāni gaṇetvā gaṇhanto pārājiko hoti, theyyasaṃvāsako pana na hoti, tathā bhikkhupi, so pana bhaṇḍagghena kāretabboti iminā adhippāyena ‘‘sayaṃ sāmaṇerovā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ pana theyyasaṃvāsako nāma yasmā pabbajitova hoti, nāpabbajito, tasmā ‘‘theyyasaṃvāsako, bhikkhave, apabbajito na pabbājetabbo, pabbajito nāsetabbo’’ti vattuṃ na sakkāti katvā imassa vasena paṇḍakato paṭṭhāya ‘‘anupasampanno na upasampādetabbo’’tiādinā pāḷi ṭhapitā, na upasampadāmattasseva abhabbattā ekādasannampi nesaṃ pabbajjārahabhāvappasaṅgato. Apica aniṭṭhadosappasaṅgato tathā eva pāḷi ṭhapitā. Yasmā titthiyapakkamanaṃ, saṅghabhedanañca upasampannasseva hoti, nānupasampannassa, so duvidhopi pabbajitova hoti, nāpabbajito, tasmā ‘‘titthiyapakkantako, bhikkhave, apabbajito na pabbājetabbo’’tiādipāḷiyā sati te ubhopi apabbājetabbā hontīti aniṭṭhappasaṅgo āpajjatīti. Tīsu pana theyyasaṃvāsakesu sāmaṇerālayaṃ karonto liṅgatthenako, upasampannālayaṃ karonto saṃvāsatthenako, ubhayatthenako ca. Na hi sāmaṇerasaṃvāso idha saṃvāso nāma, teneva aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘bhikkhuvassagaṇanādiko hi sabbopi kiriyabhedo imasmiṃ atthe saṃvāso’’ti vuttanti eke. Yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanasādiyanāsanapaṭibāhanānaṃ sāmaṇerasaṃvāsasāmaññato nevāti ācariyo.
外道离去事缘释义显示巴利原文
Titthiyapakkantakakathāvaṇṇanā
“诸比丘,外道离去者”等语,本应在作为其缘起的巴苏喇事件中宣说,虽应如此,但因那里没有限制的场地而不可能出现,故唯有在此处,因不涉及贼住的情形下才宣说。其中,“则不应令出家”一语,应该理解为仅仅是此处之言说,这是因为看出巴苏喇只对受具足戒有乞求意欲,以及世尊以“他再来时不应令受具足戒”一语,只禁止了受具足戒,因此有允许其出家的过失的顾虑。那些人,无论是否取得了他们所取著之相,皆成为外道离去者,或者,取得不应礼拜的裸形相之最胜地位,不得解脱。对此,有人说道:“于足处得恶作,将成为邪命外道,因以不正之心而离去故;非裸形者,以行动离去故。”依此二者之说皆合理,这是我的推论。彼于暂时护持其见,因未被受取故。由受具足戒的比丘所说,如何了知?有人说:“依注疏言说的量为准。”有人说:“依其因缘而知。”还有人说:“因巴苏喇是受具足戒者,故外道离去性之说,唯属受具足戒者。”正如阿阇黎所说:“或和尚离去,或还俗,或命终,或转派。”有人说:“所谓‘或转派’者,因为这在驱摈沙弥的事情中是没有的。”又有人说:“因为有其他外道先前受具足戒者转派的顾虑,故在未受具足戒时,为受具足戒的目的而制定别住。”是否也为了让其出家为目的?不是,因为先前已经考察过,而且未出家者没有增上戒的缘故。巴帝摩卡戒称为增上戒,这……显示巴利原文
Titthiyapakkantako, bhikkhavetiādi attano nidānabhūte pasūravatthusmiṃ eva vattabbaṃ samānampi tattha vāritaadhikārābhāvā abhabbā. Idheva theyyasaṃvāsakena vinā sambhavato vutto. Tattha ‘‘atha kho na pabbājetabbopī’’ti idheva vacanaṃ pasūrassa upasampadāya eva yācanicchāya dassanena, ‘‘so āgato na upasampādetabbo’’ti bhagavato upasampadāmattapaṭisedhanena ca pabbajjānumatidosappasaṅgabhayāti veditabbaṃ. Tesaṃ liṅge ādinnamatte laddhiyā gahitāyapi aggahitāyapi titthiyapakkantako hoti, avandanīyasseva naggaliṅgassa seṭṭhabhāvaṃ vā upagacchati, na muccati, ettha ‘‘padavāre dukkaṭaṃ, ājīvako bhavissanti visamacittavasena gatattā naggo hutvā na gamanenā’’ti vadanti. Ubhinnampi vasena yuttanti mama takko. Tāva naṃ laddhi rakkhati asampaṭicchitattā. Upasampannabhikkhunā kathitoti kathaṃ paññāyati? Aṭṭhakathāvacanappamāṇatovāti eke. Nidānavasenāti eke. Pasūrassa upasampannattā upasampannānaṃ eva titthiyapakkantatāvacanatoti eke. Yathāha ‘‘upajjhāyo pakkantovā hoti, vibbhanto vā, kālaṃkato vā, pakkhasaṅkanto vā’’ti ācariyo. Pakkhasaṅkanto vāti sāmaṇeranāsanāvatthūsu abhāvatoti eke. Aññatitthiyapubbassa upasampannassa sato pakkhasaṅkantabhayā anupasampannakāle upasampadatthaṃ parivāsapaññāpanenāti eke . Pabbajjatthampīti ce? Na, pubbe vicāritattā, apabbajitassa adhisīlābhāvato ca. Pātimokkhasīlañhi adhisīlaṃ nāma, tañca apabbajitassa natthi. Imassa ca parivāsavatte adhisīlaṃ vuttaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, aññatitthiyapubbo tibbacchando hoti uddese paripucchāya adhisīle’’ti (mahāva. 87). Apica ‘‘sace, bhikkhave, jātiyā sākiyo aññatitthiyapubbo āgacchati, so āgato upasampādetabbo’’ti (mahāva. 87) ettha upasampadāmattaparidīpanato. Upasampadāmattaparidīpanañhettha tasseva parivāsadānasiddhito. Parivāsadānattanidassanatthe hesā pāḷi.
畜生事缘释义显示巴利原文
Tiracchānagatavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
111 一一一、「龙种」:即从龙种而来,意指因自身的龙族之因。是何缘故?因为一切龙都频繁地与同类交合,并且全都放逸耽著于睡眠。显示巴利原文
111.Nāgayoniyāti nāgayonito, attano nāgajātihetūti adhippāyo. Kiṃkāraṇā? Abhikkhaṇaṃ sakajātiyā methunapaṭisevane, vissaṭṭhaniddokkamane ca sabbesampi.
杀母等事缘释义显示巴利原文
Mātughātakādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
112-5 一一二至五、「堕胎」:即令滑落,是指希望穿着袈裟衣(而作此)。以恶心。以怎样的恶心?意指以杀心。有些人说「因为产生出血,所以说是恶心」,这并不恰当。显示巴利原文
112-5.Apavāhananti pakkhalanaṃ, kāsāyavatthanivāsanaṃ icchamānanti attho. Duṭṭhacittena. Kīdisena? Vadhakacittenāti adhippāyo. Lohituppādanavasena duṭṭhacittanti keci, taṃ na sundaraṃ.
二根者事缘释义显示巴利原文
Ubhatobyañjanakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
116 一一六、如所记载:「若于结生时,依所生起的性根而获得此名,这便是其意旨所在。」显示巴利原文
116. ‘‘Yadi paṭisandhiyaṃ uppannaliṅgena etaṃ nāmaṃ labhantīti adhippāyo’’ti likhitaṃ.
无和尚等事缘释义显示巴利原文
Anupajjhāyakādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
117 至于有人主张“羯磨被破坏”,此说不应采纳——此说善矣。何以故?依据“比丘们,若应由五人僧团执行的羯磨,由以比丘尼为第五人的团体执行,则为非法羯磨、不应作”(《大品》390)等律文所示方式,黄门等仅是在充当满数时,羯磨方被破坏,并非在所有情况下皆被破坏。否则,理应有“若以黄门为亲教师而行羯磨,则为非法羯磨、不应作”之类的律文出现。好比为衣钵不具足者授具足戒时,甘马语中宣称“衣钵具足”这一不实之事,即便以不实之言授与具足戒,纵使该事不存在,其具足戒亦得成立。同样,在宣称“此佛护是具寿法护的求具足者”时,若是基于黄门亲教师等不实之事而作,或宣称不实之事而作,由于已有人充数,其具足戒依然成立。正因为没有“比丘们,不应以黄门为亲教师令人出家,若令出家者犯恶作,而此人为未得具足者”这类定文,此义自然得以确立。佛陀绝不会对当说之事保持沉默,是以才制定了“若有比丘明知……年未满二十……而此人为未得具足者”(《巴吉帝亚》403)等条文。由此,也不应采纳下述主张:“依照‘应由一位贤能、称职的比丘向僧团宣告’(《大品》71)一语,若由贼住者等担任老师唱诵,则具足戒不成立”。显示巴利原文
117. ‘‘Keci ‘kuppatī’ti vadanti, taṃ ‘na gahetabba’’nti yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ ‘‘pañcavaggakaraṇīyañce, bhikkhave, kammaṃ bhikkhunipañcamo kammaṃ kareyya, akammaṃ na ca karaṇīya’’ntiādinā (mahāva. 390) nayena vuttattā paṇḍakādīnaṃ gaṇapūraṇabhāve eva kammaṃ kuppati, na sabbanti katvā suvuttaṃ, itarathā ‘‘paṇḍakupajjhāyena kammaṃ kareyya, akammaṃ na ca karaṇīya’’ntiādikāya pāḷiyā bhavitabbaṃ siyā. Yathā aparipuṇṇapattacīvarassa upasampādanakāle kammavācāyaṃ ‘‘paripuṇṇassa pattacīvara’’nti asantaṃ vatthuṃ kittetvā upasampadāya katāya tasmiṃ asantepi upasampadā ruhati, evaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ buddharakkhito āyasmato dhammarakkhitassa upasampadāpekkho’’ti avatthuṃ paṇḍakupajjhāyādiṃ, asantaṃ vā, vatthuṃ kittetvā katāyapi gaṇapūrakānamatthitāya upasampadā ruhateva. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, paṇḍakupajjhāyena upasampādetabbo, yo upasampādeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa, so ca puggalo anupasampanno’’tiādivacanassābhāvā ayamattho siddhova hoti. Na hi buddhā vattabbayuttaṃ na vadanti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yo pana, bhikkhu, jānaṃ ūnavīsativassaṃ…pe… so ca puggalo anupasampanno’’tiādi (pāci. 403). Tathā ‘‘byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo’ti (mahāva. 71) vacanato theyyasaṃvāsakādiācariyehi anussāvanāya katāya upasampadā na ruhati tesaṃ abhikkhuttā’’ti vacanampi na gahetabbaṃ. Kiñca bhiyyo ‘‘imāni cattāri kammāni pañcahākārehi vipajjantī’’tiādinā (pari. 482) nayena kammānaṃ sampattivipattiyā kathiyamānāya ‘‘sattahi ākārehi kammāni vipajjanti vatthuto vā ñattito vā anussāvanato vā sīmato vā parisato vā upajjhāyato vā ācariyato vā’’ti akathitattā na gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Parisato vā’’ti vacanena ācariyaupajjhāyānaṃ vā saṅgaho katoti ce? Na, ‘‘dvādasahākārehi parisato kammāni vipajjantī’’ti etassa vibhaṅge tesamanāmaṭṭhattā. Ayamattho ‘‘yasmā tattha tattha sarūpena vuttapāḷivaseneva sakkā jānituṃ, tasmā nayamukhaṃ dassetvā saṃkhittoti ayamassa yuttigavesanā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatridaṃ vicāretabbaṃ – anupajjhāyakaṃ upasampādentā te bhikkhū yathāvuttanayena abhūtaṃ taṃ vatthuṃ kittayiṃsu, udāhu musāvādabhayā tāneva padāni na sāvesunti. Kiñcettha yadi tāva upajjhāyābhāvata na sāvesuṃ, ‘‘puggalaṃ na parāmasatī’’ti vuttavipattippasaṅgo hoti, atha sāvesuṃ, musāvādo nesaṃ bhavatīti? Vuccate – sāvesuṃyeva yathāvuttavipattippasaṅgabhayā, ‘‘kammaṃ pana na kuppatī’’ti aṭṭhakathāya vuttattā ca, na musāvādassa asambhavato, musāvādenāpi kammasambhavato ca. Na hi sakkā musāvādena kammavipattisampattiṃ kātunti. Tasmā ‘‘anupajjhāyakaṃ upasampādentī’’ti vacanassa ubhayadosavinimutto attho pariyesitabbo.
此处之理据如下——如古注中曾说:“往昔,当亲教师仍在出家与授具足的过程中实际在场,却因未依受亲教师的程序加以受取,故而有‘尔时,有诸比丘而无亲教师’等语句;如今此处亦然,亲教师虽实际存在,仅因未被受取,故说‘为无亲教师者授具足戒’。然而,被甘马语阿阇梨所接受者,应以视彼为师的心来宣称亲教师,继而唱诵甘马语;或者,若亲教师出于某种因缘无法以身体配合,则取得其同意后再唱诵甘马语;又或者,亲教师在将求具足者纳为弟子之后、彼人得戒之后,若于剃度前追查或不追查诸事,该沙弥已自承是舍戒者或犯极重罪者;又或者,如同持欲人等情况一般,亲教师已前往其他结界。有人言‘甘马语仍成立’,并引‘比丘们,我允许在边地以持律者为第五人的团体授具足戒’(《大品》259)一文,主张‘持律者作为第五人的亲教师必须现前’。若唯以此文为量,那么中部地区便不应有此语句。若谓纵使亲教师不现前,甘马语仍得成立,难道不成过失?不然。何以故?在羯磨成就的判定中,我们是以‘触及补特伽罗’那段文句为准则的。实则,彼未现前而被称为亲教师之补特伽罗,不值得被触及,因此,于此处应如此理解方为合理。显示巴利原文
Ayañcettha yutti – ‘‘yathā pubbe pabbajjupasampadupajjhāyesu vijjamānesupi upajjhāyaggahaṇakkamena aggahitattā ‘tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū anupajjhāyaka’ntiādi vuttaṃ, tathā idhāpi upajjhāyassa vijjamānasseva sato aggahitattā ‘anupajjhāyakaṃ upasampādentī’ti vuttaṃ. Kammavācācariyena pana gahito tena upajjhāyoti saññāya upajjhāyaṃ kittetvā kammavācaṃ sāvetabbaṃ, kenaci vā kāraṇena kāyasāmaggiṃ adentassa upajjhāyassa chandaṃ gahetvā kammavācaṃ sāveti, upajjhāyo vā upasampadāpekkhassa upajjhaṃ datvā pacchā upasampanne tasmiṃ tādise vatthusmiṃ samanuyuñjiyamāno vā asamanuyuñjiyamāno vā upajjhāyadānato pubbe eva sāmaṇero paṭijānāti, sikkhāpaccakkhātako vā antimavatthuajjhāpannako vā paṭijānāti, chandahārakādayo viya upajjhāyo vā aññasīmāgato hoti, ‘kammavācā ruhatī’ti vatvā ‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, paccantimesu janapadesu vinayadharapañcamena gaṇena upasampada’nti (mahāva. 259) vuttattā keci ‘vinayadharapañcamena upajjhāyena sannihiteneva bhavitabba’nti vadantī’’ti porāṇagaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. So ce pāṭho pamāṇo majjhimesu janapadesu tassa vacanassābhāvato. Asannihitepi upajjhāye kammavācā ruhatīti āpajjatīti ce? Na, kasmā? Kammasampattiyaṃ ‘‘puggalaṃ parāmasatī’’ti vuttapāṭhova no pamāṇaṃ. Na hi tattha asannihito upajjhāyasaṅkhāto puggalo parāmasanaṃ arahati, tasmā tattha saṅghaparāmasanaṃ viya puggalaparāmasanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Saṅghena gaṇena upajjhāyena upasampādenti tesaṃ atthato puggalattā. Paṇḍakādiupajjhāyena upasampādenti upasampādanakāle aviditattāti porāṇā.
无钵者等事缘释义显示巴利原文
Apattakādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
118 118.「为衣钵不具足者授具足戒」:甘马语阿阇梨或是带着“衣钵已具足”的想法,或全然不顾事实是否具足,仅是随顺文句宣说“衣钵具足”的甘马语罢了。这就像现今,即便是父母已亡故或远走他方之人,当被问到“你已得父母允许吗?”时,仍旧回答“是的,尊者”。不必多言,此处要义如次:由于“彼时,四种羯磨由五种方式而失败”这一判别的特征尚未被确立,他们便为无依止师者等授了具足戒;由于应被拒绝的人尚未被指明,他们便为以黄门为依止师者等授了具足戒;由于未设定关于十三种障碍的询问,他们便为无衣钵者授了具足戒。应知,“比丘们,我允许以白四甘马授具足戒”(《大品》69)——这便是其义理的明证,因为在最初所允许的甘马语中,并无“衣钵具足”之语,该语句确是在后来才被开许的。显示巴利原文
118.Apattacīvaraṃupasampādentīti kammavācācariyo ‘‘paripuṇṇassa pattacīvara’’nti saññāya , kevalaṃ atthasampattiṃ anapekkhitvā santapadanihārena vā ‘‘paripuṇṇassa pattacīvara’’nti kammavācaṃ sāveti. Yathā etarahi matavippavutthamātāpitikopi ‘‘anuññātosi mātāpitūhī’’ti puṭṭho ‘‘āma bhante’’ti vadati. Kiṃ bahunā, ayaṃ panettha sāro – ‘‘tasmiṃ samaye cattāri kammāni pañcahākārehi vipajjantī’’ti lakkhaṇassa na tāva paññattattā anupajjhāyakādiṃ upasampādenti, vajjanīyapuggalānaṃ avuttattā paṇḍakupajjhāyādiṃ upasampādenti. Terasantarāyapucchāya adassanattā apattacīvarakaṃ upasampādenti. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ñatticatutthena kammena upasampādetu’’nti (mahāva. 69) evaṃ sabbapaṭhamaṃ anuññātakammavācāya ‘‘paripuṇṇassa pattacīvara’’nti avacanamettha sādhakanti veditabbaṃ. Tañhi vacanaṃ anukkamenānuññātanti.
断手者等事缘释义显示巴利原文
Hatthacchinnādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
119 暂且搁置其余一切不论:既然最初即已以“诸比丘,我允许以此三皈依出家”等(《大品》34)开许,“为哑者出家,为聋者出家”的情形又如何得以可能?答曰:“诸比丘,应如此令其出家:应对他说‘如是说’……乃至……第三次,我皈依僧”——此处,因误解“应对他说‘如是说’”一语的含义,故有“为哑者出家”之说。所谓“如是说”,本是命令那求度者,而依止师自己应说“第三次,我皈依僧”;求度者受此命令后,无论随依止师之语逐句复诵或不复诵,世尊已多处宣说:“以身表示、以语表示、以身与语表示,依止师已被接受,许可已给予,清净已给予,自恣已给予。”依此推度,求度者以身表示了皈依;或于世间,以身表示者亦被称为“如是说”,依此方便,便有了为哑者出家之说。古注中,先问“如何有哑者之出家?”而后作答:“因其身可能生信,给予身触,以手势表示而令其出家。”何必繁言,此处要义如下:正如先前进行出家仪节时,截断了出家的表述,转而依“诸比丘,黄门、未受具足戒者不应令受具足戒”等,唯以具足戒为据而作表述。于贼住一节中,虽因……”
},
{显示巴利原文
119. Idaṃ tāva sabbathā hotu, ‘‘mūgaṃ pabbājenti, badhiraṃ pabbājentī’’ti idaṃ kathaṃ sambhavitumarahati ādito paṭṭhāya ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, imehi tīhi saraṇagamanehi pabbajja’’ntiādinā (mahāva. 34) anuññātattāti? Vuccate – ‘‘evañca pana, bhikkhave, pabbājetabboti. Evaṃ vadehīti vattabbo…pe… tatiyampi saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’ti ettha ‘‘evaṃ vadehīti vattabbo’’ti imassa vacanassa micchā atthaṃ gahetvā mūgaṃ pabbājesuṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ vadehī’’ti taṃ pabbajjāpekkhaṃ āṇāpetvā sayaṃ upajjhāyena vattabbo ‘‘tatiyaṃ saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’ti, so pabbajjāpekkho tathā āṇatto upajjhāyavacanassa anu anu vadatu vā, mā vā, tattha tattha bhagavā ‘‘kāyena viññāpeti, vācāya viññāpeti, kāyena vācāya viññāpeti, gahito hoti upajjhāyo. Dinno hoti chando. Dinnā hoti pārisuddhi. Dinnā hoti pavāraṇā’’ti vadati. Tadanumānena vā kāyena tena pabbajjāpekkhena viññattaṃ hoti saraṇagamananti vā lokepi kāyena viññāpento ‘‘evaṃ vadatī’’ti vuccati, taṃ pariyāyaṃ gahetvā mūgaṃ pabbājentīti veditabbaṃ. Porāṇagaṇṭhipade ‘‘mūgaṃ kathaṃ pabbājentī’ti pucchaṃ katvā tassa kāyappasādasambhavato kāyena pahāraṃ datvā hatthamuddāya viññāpetvā pabbājesu’’nti vuttaṃ. Kiṃ bahunā, ayaṃ panettha sāro – yathā pubbe pabbajjādhikāre vattamāne pabbajjābhilāpaṃ upacchinditvā ‘‘paṇḍako, bhikkhave, anupasampanno na upasampādetabbo’’tiādinā nayena upasampadavaseneva abhilāpo kato. Theyyasaṃvāsakapade asambhavato kiñcāpi so na kato pabbajjāva tattha katā, sabbattha pana upasampadābhilāpena adhippetā tadanubhāvato. Upasampadāya pabbajjāya vāritāya upasampadā vāritā hotīti katvā. Tathā idha upasampadādhikāre vattamāne upasampadābhilāpaṃ upacchinditvā upasampadameva sandhāya pabbajjābhilāpo katoti veditabbo. Kāmaṃ so na kattabbo, mūgapade asambhavato tassa vasena ādito paṭṭhāya upasampadābhilāpova kattabbo viya dissati, tathāpi tasseva mūgapadassa vasena ādito paṭṭhāya pabbajjābhilāpova kato micchāgahaṇanivāraṇatthaṃ. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Mūgo, bhikkhave, appatto osāraṇaṃ, tañce saṅgho osāreti, sosārito’’ti (mahāva. 396) vacanato mūgo upasampanno hotīti siddhaṃ. So ‘‘kevalaṃ upasampannova hoti, na pana pabbajito tassa pabbajjāya asambhavato’’ti micchāgāho hoti. Taṃ pariccajāpetvā yo upasampanno, so pabbajitova hoti. Pabbajito pana atthi koci upasampanno, atthi koci anupasampanno. Imaṃ sammāgāhaṃ uppādeti bhagavāti veditabbaṃ.
此外,为了阐明截手者等已出家者乃善出家,以及遮止对其无出家之疑虑,此处乃作出家之表述。如何?由于以「比丘们,截手者不应令其出家」等方式之遮止,以及无「已出家者乃善出家」之叙述处,可能引起对他们无出家之疑虑。正如有疑虑之可能,如此则将疑虑确立。在《犍度》中,针对具足戒,世尊以「比丘们,截手者未得接纳,若僧团接纳彼,则已被接纳」等方式加以遮止。依同一方式,则阐明他们一切皆为善出家者,否则,他们一切仅为受具足戒者,而非出家者——此不如意之结论随之而来。如何?若律文中确立了「比丘们,截手者不应令其出家,若已出家者,应驱摈」,或「比丘们,截手者不应令其出家,若令其出家者,犯恶作,彼亦为未出家者」,则由于在《瞻波犍度》中说「已被接纳」,仅仅「此截手者等只是受具足戒者,而非出家者」,或「即便是受具足戒兼出家者,亦应被驱摈」——如此不如意之处境随之而来,此乃其意趣所在。显示巴利原文
Apica tesaṃ hatthacchinnādīnaṃ pabbajitānaṃ supabbajitabhāvadīpanatthaṃ, pabbajjābhāvāsaṅkānivāraṇatthañcettha pabbajjābhilāpo kato. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, hatthacchinno pabbājetabbo’’tiādinā paṭikkhepena, ‘‘pabbajitā supabbajitā’’ti vuttaṭṭhānābhāvena ca tesaṃ pabbajjābhāvappasaṅkā bhaveyya. Yathā pasaṅkābhave, tathā pasaṅkaṃ ṭhapeyya. Khandhake upasampadaṃ sandhāya ‘‘hatthacchinno, bhikkhave, appatto osāraṇaṃ, tañce saṅgho osāreti, sosārito’’tiādinā nayena bhagavā nivāreti. Teneva pana nayena pabbajitā te sabbepi supabbajitā evāti dīpeti, aññathā sabbepete upasampannāva honti, na pabbajitāti ayamaniṭṭhappasaṅgo āpajjati. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Hatthacchinno, bhikkhave, na pabbājetabbo, pabbajito nāsetabbo’’ti vā ‘‘na, bhikkhave, hatthacchinno pabbājetabbo, yo pabbājeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa, so ca apabbajito’’ti vā tantiyā ṭhapitāya campeyyakkhandhake ‘‘sosārito’’ti vuttattā kevalaṃ ‘‘ime hatthacchinnādayo upasampannāva honti, na pabbajitā’’ti vā ‘‘upasampannāpi ce pabbajitā, nāsetabbā’’ti vā aniṭṭhakoṭṭhāso āpajjatīti adhippāyo.
此处应当审察:因无「彼未出家」之语,故哑者之出家得以成就,由此出家亦以一方清净而成,如此,此不可欲之部分如何不陷入?以出家之言说,此处意指达上,以正确把握故不陷入。否则,若依文字取义,则另一不可欲之部分亦陷入,即所谓「如所制之恶作不存在」。如何?「诸比丘,不应令哑者出家,若令出家者,犯恶作」,所说之恶作在出家完成时生起,非因彼未完成。因为首先犯的是前行恶作,故因哑者之出家完成本身不存在,此恶作之机会一切时不可能发生。然而以达上之方式取义时,因羯磨成就故可能发生。正因此,在圣典中未制定「诸比丘,不应令般哒咖达上,若令达上者,犯恶作」之恶作。因未制定故,此处仅前行恶作可能发生,非其他。至此已成立:「以出家之言说,达上在彼处被意指,非出家」。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ panettha vicāretabbaṃ – ‘‘so ca apabbajito’’ti vacanābhāvato mūgassa pabbajjasiddhippasaṅgato pabbajjāpi ekatosuddhiyā hotīti ayamaniṭṭhakoṭṭhāso kathaṃ nāpajjatīti? Pabbajjābhilāpena upasampadā idhādhippetāti sammāgāhena nāpajjati, aññathā yathābyañjanaṃ atthe gahite yathāpaññattadukkaṭābhāvasaṅkhāto aparopi aniṭṭhakoṭṭhāso āpajjati. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, mūgo pabbājetabbo, yo pabbājeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vuttadukkaṭaṃ pabbajjapariyosāne hoti, na tassāvippakatāya. Pubbapayogadukkaṭameva hi paṭhamaṃ āpajjati , tasmā mūgassa pabbajjapariyosānasseva abhāvato imassa dukkaṭassa okāso ca sabbakālaṃ na sambhaveyya. Upasampadāvasena pana atthe gahite sambhavati kammanipphattito. Teneva pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘na, bhikkhave, paṇḍako upasampādetabbo, yo upasampādeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti dukkaṭaṃ na paññattaṃ. Apaññattattā pubbapayogadukkaṭameva cettha sambhavati, netaraṃ, ettāvatā siddhametaṃ ‘‘pabbajjābhilāpena upasampadā ca tattha adhippetā, na pabbajjā’’ti.
此处有问:沙弥出家非由身表而成,如何可知?答:依“以身表示”等三法之说明而得知。有偈曰:显示巴利原文
Etthāha – sāmaṇerapabbajjā na kāyapayogato hotīti kathaṃ paññāyatīti? Vuccate – kāyena viññāpetītiādittikādassanato. Hoti cettha –
纵有某只兔子,能立于大海,
却绝不可能,在四深难测的律海中立足。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Appeva sasako koci, patiṭṭheyya mahaṇṇave; Na tveva catugambhīre, duggāho vinayaṇṇave’’ti.
「梵直身」者,此处释为:「取梵字无过失、最胜之义,无有过失且身躯端直者,是为梵直身。」或谓:因耽于欲乐故,不以帝释天等为譬喻,其身正直如梵天者,即梵直身。大腹瓮,指状如大腹之瓮。与彼相似者,即称为「如大腹瓮」。「颈瘿」云云,唯是举例开示。何以知之?因「诸比丘,不应令患五种病者出家」一语之故。此处亦暗指白癞病,非仅此一人,但凡患五种病者、乃至圣典中所述从王臣下至奴隶、及拉胡喇事中未获父母允许者,此十种人皆在此被意指。正为阐明其义,优波离长老于此《断手》圣典中,引述前已提及的文书作者、曾被打击者等相貌而说。亦因此故,于《瞻波犍度》中:「诸比丘,若有人未达驱摈,而僧团驱摈之,有人是善驱摈,有人是恶驱摈」的分别中,并未将「患五种病者、王臣、盗贼破坏者、负债者、奴隶、未得父母允许者」此七种人纳入其中,亦不可得。若非如此,这些人亦当于彼分别中宣说。若谓:因不应于彼处宣说,故无可能?若如是,于「僧团驱摈,有人是恶驱摈」的分别中,理应述及般哒咖等,然实未述。因两处皆未述及,故知这些人并非不属于两者,是故为摄取如前所述而未明说的十种人,再论书写者等。然则何以在此以倒序宣说?为令承担显得轻微……显示巴利原文
Brahmujugattoti ettha ‘‘niddosatthe, seṭṭhatthe ca brahma-saddaṃ gahetvā niddosaṃ hutvā uju gattaṃ yassa so brahmujugatto’’ti likhitaṃ. Atha vā kāmabhogittā devindādayo upamāvasena aggahetvā brahmā viya ujugatto brahmujugatto. Mahākucchito ghaṭo mahākucchighaṭo. Tena samāno vuccati ‘‘mahākucchighaṭasadiso’’ti. Galagaṇḍīti desanāmattamevetanti kathaṃ paññāyatīti? ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, pañcahi ābādhehi phuṭṭho pabbājetabbo’’ti vacanato. Kilāsopi idhādhippetoti na kevalaṃ so eveko, kintu pañcahi ābādhehi phuṭṭho, pāḷiyaṃ āgatā rājabhaṭādayo dāsapariyosānā, rāhulavatthumhi āgatā ananuññātamātāpitaro cāti dasapi janā idhādhippetā. Tadatthadīpanatthameva likhitakakasāhatalakkhaṇāhate pubbe vuttepi ānetvā upālitthero idha hatthacchinnapāḷiyaṃ āha. Teneva campeyyakkhandhake ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, puggalo appatto osāraṇaṃ, tañce saṅgho osāreti, ekacco sosārito, ekacco dosārito’’ti (mahāva. 396) imassa vibhaṅge ‘‘pañcahi ābādhehi phuṭṭhā, rājabhaṭā, corakārabhedakaiṇāyikadāsā, ananuññātamātāpitaro cā’’ti satta janā na gahitā, na ca labbhanti, aññathā imepi tassa vibhaṅge vattabbā siyuṃ. Na vattabbā tattha abhabbattāti ce? Evaṃ sante ‘‘saṅgho osāreti, ekacco dosārito’’ti imassa vibhaṅge vattabbā paṇḍakādayo viya, na ca vuttā. Ubhayattha avuttattā na cime anubhayā bhavitumarahanti, tasmā avuttānameva dasannaṃ yathāvuttānaṃ saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ puna likhitakādayo vuttāti. Atha kimatthaṃ te idha uppaṭipāṭiyā vuttāti? Iṇāyikadāsānaṃ sosāritabhāvepi iṇāyikadāsā sāmikānaṃ dātabbāti tadadhīnabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Teneva tattha vuttaṃ ‘‘palātopi ānetvā dātabbo’’tiādi. Yo panettha coro katakammo pabbajati, rājabhaṭo vā sace katadoso, iṇāyikaggahaṇeneva gahitoti veditabbo. Atha vā yathāvuttalakkhaṇo sabbopi iṇāyikadāsānaṃ ‘‘sosārito’’ti vattabbāraho na hotīti katvā tesaṃ parivajjanatthaṃ uppaṭipāṭiyā desanā upari ārohati, na heṭṭhāti dīpanato. Likhitako ‘‘sosārito’’ti vuttattā desantaraṃ netabbo. Tathākārabhedakādayopīti veditabbaṃ.
至此,应当了知:世尊以其自身的教法善巧,通过前文所取的纲要,已明示如前所述的十种人之出家与达上羯磨的成就;又通过倒序的言说,向通达教法者揭示了人我的种种差别。于此有言:显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā bhagavatā attano desanākusalatāya pubbe gahitaggahaṇena yathāvuttānaṃ dasannampi pabbajjupasampadākammanipphatti, uppaṭipāṭivacanena puggalavemattatañca desanāya kovidānaṃ dīpitaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ. Hoti cettha –
「以言辞陈述了应说之理,又以理趣的教示,揭示了不相应与所希冀之事;
阐明善逝之语,犹如杂色之心,亦令心成杂色。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Vattabbayuttaṃ vacanena vatvā, ayuttamiṭṭhaṃ nayadesanāya; Sandīpayantaṃ sugatassa vākyaṃ, cittaṃ vicittaṃva karotipī’’ti.
在此有问:在《瞻波犍度》中,未满二十岁者,由于在两处都未提及,是否应是非两者?不,不应是非两者,正因为未提及。如果有第三种状况,那必定是世尊亲自宣说,然而并未宣说,因此他并非是非两者。那么他属于哪一方?他属于有过失的一方。但又为何未宣说?因为被学处所遮止。所谓“结怨恨后”,是指再次结缚。有书写:“以种种药物缚足后,置入坑中,此为应作方法的同义语。” 如迦波头象。所谓“牛食管”,是指为牛制作饮食的管子。所谓“优波迦木口”,是指饥饿口;所谓“瓦丹地迦”,是指具睾丸增大病者。所谓“维迦德”,是指具横行足者。“古尼库尼”,据说有两种读法。“凡出家被拒者,达上亦被拒”等,由于手断等仅就达上而言,所以正是针对他们手断等而说。显示巴利原文
Etthāha – campeyyakkhandhake ūnavīsativasso ubhayattha avuttattā anubhayo siyāti? Na siyā avuttattā eva. Yadi hi tatiyāya koṭiyā bhavitabbaṃ, sā avassaṃ bhagavatā vattabbāva hoti, na ca vuttā, tasmā na so anubhayo hoti. Atha kataraṃ pakkhaṃ bhajatīti? Dosāritapakkhaṃ bhajati. Atha kasmā na vuttoti? Sikkhāpadena paṭisiddhattā. Upanāhaṃ bandhitvāti puna bandhanaṃ katvā. ‘‘Nānāvidhehi osadhehi pādaṃ bandhitvā āvāṭake pavesetvā kattabbavidhānassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti likhitaṃ. Kappasīso vā hatthī viya. Gobhattanāḷikā nāma gunnaṃ bhattapānatthaṃ katanāḷikā. Upakkamukho nāma kudhitamukho vuccati, vātaṇḍiko nāma aṇḍakesu vuḍḍhirogena samannāgato. Vikaṭo nāma tiriyaṃ gamanakapādehi samannāgato. ‘‘Guṇi kuṇī’’ti duvidho kira pāṭho. Yesañca pabbajjā paṭikkhittā, upasampadāpi tesaṃ paṭikkhittāvātiādi yasmā hatthacchinnādayo upasampadāvaseneva vuttā, tasmā te eva hatthacchinnādayo sandhāyāha.
依止无惭者事缘释义显示巴利原文
Alajjīnissayavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
120 “诸比丘,不应给无惭者依止”,以此,由无惭的比丘或沙弥,两种受用——法受用与食受用——皆被遮止,因为他们处于无依止的状态。如所说:“诸比丘,老师应当以诵习、遍问、教诫、教示来摄受、随护弟子”等。由于上师也有给予依止的关系,他也应知为同住弟子的依止,因此,若上师是无惭者,则不应依他而住,这便成立。在诸比丘的正行道中,同等分的比丘为同分。那种状态即是比丘同分性。这比丘同分性。允许以“我当知”之意趣而住。与诸比丘的同分性。那是什么?是有惭的状态。关于“七日……应取”,此处有注:“‘我将仅住七日,何需知比丘同分性’,像这样舍弃知的义务而住,不得。”这是它的意思。“然而,若知比丘同分性,心想‘我明日即去,何需告知依止’”,则不得破晓。“先前以‘黎明升起后我将去’的想法而卧,若黎明升起,允许。”显示巴利原文
120. ‘‘Na , bhikkhave, alajjīnaṃ nissayo dātabbo’’ti iminā alajjīhi bhikkhūhi, sāmaṇerehi vā saddhiṃ dvepi dhammāmisaparibhogā paṭikkhittā honti nissayabhāve bhāvato tesaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘ācariyena, bhikkhave, antevāsiko saṅgahetabbo anuggahetabbo uddesena paripucchāya ovādena anusāsaniyā’’tiādi (mahāva. 79) upajjhāyassapi nissayappaṇāmanasambhavato, sopi saddhivihārikassa nissayoti veditabbaṃ, tasmā upajjhāyo ce alajjī hoti, na taṃ nissāya vasitabbanti siddhaṃ hoti. Bhikkhūnaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyā samānabhāgo bhikkhu sabhāgo. Tassabhāvo bhikkhusabhāgatā. Taṃ bhikkhusabhāgataṃ. Yāva jānāmīti adhippāyena vasituṃ vaṭṭati. Bhikkhūhi sabhāgataṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Lajjibhāvaṃ. ‘‘Sattāhaṃ…pe… gahetabbo’’ti ettha ‘‘sattāhamattaṃ vasissāmi, kiṃ bhikkhusabhāgatājānanenāti jānane dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā vasituṃ na labhatīti attho’’ti likhitaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhusabhāgataṃ pana jānanto sveva gamissāmi, kiṃ me nissayārocanenā’’ti aruṇaṃ uṭṭhapetuṃ na labhati. ‘‘Pure aruṇaṃ uṭṭhahitvā gamissāmī’’ti ābhogena sayantassa ce aruṇo uggacchati, vaṭṭati.
出行者等依止事缘释义显示巴利原文
Gamikādinissayavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
121 “行于道路的比丘,若不得依止,可无依止而住”,此言“唯于必要之时,于雨安居期间,因律藏本身已禁止远行故”,实为无据。因有以七日事、雨安居中断等因由而行路之可能,且正行路者亦有可能在雨安居时继续行路故。“于中途……无罪”,仅指无处可得依止给予者之时。“依彼”乃随顺文句而说,意为依止于彼。以“当合适的依止给予者来时”之语,可成立此规定仅适用于必要时。有言:“然而于雨安居中,实无人前来。”若彼住于水边或陆地,于雨安居入日临近时欲离去,听闻“某大长老将到来”,若他等待彼,是允许的。若等待之时已至雨安居入日,虽如此,亦应前往彼处,于彼处可得依止给予者。若因无巴帝摩卡诵者尚得允许离去,何况因无依止给予者。若彼行时见有命难、梵行难,即应住于彼处,某些人如是说。显示巴利原文
121.‘‘Addhānamaggappaṭipannena bhikkhunā nissayaṃ alabhamānena anissitena vatthunti avassakāleyeva vassakāle addhānagamanassa pāḷiyaṃyeva paṭikkhittattā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ appamāṇaṃ sattāhaṃ vassacchedādivasena addhānagamanasambhavato, gacchantasseva vassakālagamanasambhavato ca. Antarāmagge…pe… anāpattīti nissayadāyakābhāveyeva. ‘‘Tassa nissāyā’’ti pāṭhānurūpaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ nissāyāti attho. ‘‘Yadā patirūpo nissayadāyako āgacchissatī’’ti vacanena ayaṃ vidhi avassakāle evāti siddhaṃ. ‘‘Antovasse pana kassaci āgamanābhāvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sace so jalapaṭṭane vā thalapaṭṭane vā vasanto vassūpanāyikāya āsannāya gantukāmo suṇāti ‘‘asuko mahāthero āgamissatī’’ti, taṃ ce āgameti, vaṭṭati. Āgamentasseva ce vassūpanāyikadivaso hoti, hotu, gantabbaṃ tattha, yattha nissayadāyakaṃ labhatīti. Pātimokkhuddesakābhāvena ce gantuṃ vaṭṭati, pageva nissayadāyakābhāvena. Sace so gacchanto jīvitantarāyaṃ, brahmacariyantarāyaṃ vā passati, tattheva vasitabbanti eke.
122 “我不能直呼长老之名”,故以特征称说:“名为某者,具寿某”。“亦以姓”之语,即允许以称呼所用的方式称呼,此义成立。因此,被问“你戒师何名”时,唯以姓作名而说,亦得成立。所以,于四类名中,可以任一种名相告知。如是说。一人若有多名,于一处以一名作白,以另一名告知,是不被允许的。应以诸义理与文句不变之告知行之。若于某处说“具寿佛护长老”,于另一处仅告知为“佛护”,有人说此不为“失告知”,因名未失故。若于某处说“具寿佛护”,于另一处告知“佛护具寿”,因文句相应,仅属落于琐细处,某些人亦作是说。然因文句有异之过失,于告知中此不为允,某些人作如是说。然若于一切处皆如此说,则被允许,因与世尊所许之相状相应故。若与相状相违,以相异故便不允许耶?不然,因与运用相应故。于彼处如是,于此处运用便相异耶?不然,因与失坏相状相违故。非一切时、一切处,在律藏本身中,告知之失坏正为揭示此义而来,于其余告知语中,欲回避此实不可能,因与惯例规定相违故。彼亦以何为量耶?即以老师所受持之量为量故。显示巴利原文
122. ‘‘Nāhaṃ ussahāmi therassa nāmaṃ gahetu’’nti itthannāmo itthannāmassa āyasmatoti lakkhaṇato āha. ‘‘Gottenāpī’ti vacanato yena vohārena vohariyanti, tena vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ, tasmā ‘ko nāmo te upajjhāyo’ti puṭṭhenāpi gottameva nāmaṃ katvā vattabbanti siddhaṃ hoti, tasmā catubbidhesu nāmesu yena kenaci nāmena anussāvanā kātabbā’’ti vadanti. Ekassa bahūni nāmāni honti, tattha ekaṃ nāmaṃ ñattiyā, ekaṃ anussāvanāya kātuṃ na vaṭṭati, atthato, byañjanato ca abhinnāhi anussāvanāhi bhavitabbanti. Katthaci ‘‘āyasmato buddharakkhitattherassā’’ti vatvā katthaci kevalaṃ ‘‘buddharakkhitassā’’ti sāveti, ‘‘sāvanaṃ hāpetī’’ti na vuccati nāmassa ahāpitattāti eke. Sace katthaci ‘‘āyasmato buddharakkhitassā’’ti vatvā katthaci ‘‘buddharakkhitassāyasmato’’ti sāveti, pāṭhānurūpattā khettameva otiṇṇantipi eke. Byañjanabhedappasaṅgato anussāvane taṃ na vaṭṭatīti eke. Sace pana sabbaṭṭhānepi tatheva vadati, vaṭṭati bhagavatā dinnalakkhaṇānurūpattā. Lakkhaṇavirodhato aññathā na vaṭṭatīti ce? Na, payogānurūpattā. Tattha tathā, idha aññathā payogoti ce? Na, vipattilakkhaṇānaṃ virodhato. Na sabbena sabbaṃ, sāvanāhāpanā eva hi pāḷiyaṃ tadatthavibhāvane āgatāti aññapadesu sāvanesu parihāro na sambhavati āciṇṇakappavirodhato. Sopi kiṃpamāṇanti ce? Pamāṇaṃ ācariyuggahassa pamāṇattā.
123 “二人,一次甘马语”,对此,结集注中首先如此写道:“同时宣读”。“此即是考虑了”之义,乃考虑了“非同一亲教师、由一位老师宣读羯磨”的情形;其意为:由一位亲教师,允许由多位老师为两人或三人共同宣读,而不允许由多位亲教师、一位老师宣读。古结集注中亦作同样说明,并云:“三人以上,无论如何亦不得共同进行”,此说有其道理——老师言:实因僧团不为僧团作羯磨故。然此处有一事须加思量,如何思量?老师言:四人或四人以上之求达上者,因尚未获得比丘身份,故不可称为僧团;然仅因世尊划定限制,说为“三人”,是故超出三人即不得行,此非推论所能及。在补充注中,此义亦经多方考量后得以阐明。同样,在安达咖注疏中亦然。并非在此义的解释上处处皆有见解分歧。然而,关于此二者——即“两人皆满二十岁”、“二人共一位亲教师、一位老师、一篇甘马语、一位已受具足戒者、一位未受具足戒者”——之围绕说明,展示此义后,有人主张:若一位老师为两位或三位求达上者,以一位亲教师宣读一篇甘马语,此为合法。老师认为此说不当——因在当下,不可能展示出具备松缓、紧促等语调特征之甘马语故。显示巴利原文
123.Dve ekānussāvaneti ettha gaṇṭhipade tāva evaṃ likhitaṃ ‘‘ekato pavattaanussāvane’’. Idaṃ sandhāyāti nānupajjhāyaṃ ekācariyaṃ anussāvanakiriyaṃ sandhāya, tañca anussāvanakiriyaṃ ekenupajjhāyena nānācariyehi anujānāmīti attho. Nānupajjhāyehi ekenācariyena na tveva anujānāmīti atthoti. Porāṇagaṇṭhipadepi tatheva vatvā ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ uddhaṃ na kenaci ākārena ekato vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ yuttaṃ, na hi saṅgho saṅghassa kammaṃ karotīti ācariyo. Idaṃ panettha cintetabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Cattāro vā atirekā vā upasampadāpekkhā saṅghavohāraṃ na labhanti bhikkhubhāvaṃ appattattā. Kevalaṃ bhagavatā paricchinditvā ‘‘tayo’’ti vuttattā tato uddhaṃ na vaṭṭatīti no takkoti ācariyo. Anugaṇṭhipadepi ayamevattho bahudhā vicāretvā vutto. Tathā andhakaṭṭhakathāyampi. Na sabbattha imasmiṃ atthavikappe matibhedo atthi. Yā panesā ubho paripuṇṇavīsativassā, ubhinnamekupajjhāyo, ekācariyo, ekā kammavācā, eko upasampanno, eko anupasampannoti parivārakathā, taṃ dassetvā eko ce ācariyo dvinnaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ vā upasampadāpekkhānaṃ ekaṃ kammavācaṃ ekenupajjhāyena sāveti, vaṭṭatīti eke. Taṃ ayuttaṃ, na hi sakkā sithiladhanitādibyañjanalakkhaṇasampannaṃ tasmiṃ khaṇe kammavācaṃ dassetuṃ vimuttadosādīsu patanato . Visuṃ visuṃ karaṇaṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttanti dīpanatthaṃ ‘‘tayo paripuṇṇavīsativassā , tiṇṇamekupajjhāyo, ekācariyo, ekā kammavācā, dve upasampannā, eko anupasampanno’’ti na vutto. Evañhi vutte sakkā tīsu ākāsaṭṭhamapanetvā sīmaṭṭhānaṃ dvinnamanurūpaṃ kammavācaṃ dassetuṃ, tamaniṭṭhappasaṅgaṃ nivāretuṃ ‘‘ubho’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tattha paripuṇṇavīsativassavacanena vatthusampatti, parisāya padhānattā, ācariyupajjhāyavacanena parisasampatti, kammavācāya anussāvanasampatti dassitā, sīmasampatti evekā na dassitā. Tato vipatti jātā kammavācānaṃ nānākkhaṇikattā. Ekakkhaṇabhāve sati ubhinnaṃ sampatti vā siyā vipatti vā, na ekasseva sampatti ekassa vipattīti sambhavati vimuttādibyañjanadosappasaṅgato’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ vacanaṃ ubhopi cete sīmagatāva honti, ubhinnaṃ ekato kammasampattidīpanato dvinnaṃ ekato anussāvanaṃ ekena upajjhāyena ekenācariyena vaṭṭatīti sādheti. Dvinnaṃ, tiṇṇañca ekato sasamanubhāsanā ca pāḷiyaṃyeva dassitā, tañca anulometi. Aṭṭhakathācariyehi nānuññātaṃ, na paṭikkhittaṃ, vicāretvā gahetabbanti ācariyo, taṃ dhammatāya virujjhati.
这是诸佛的法性:凡言辞有别之处,在重大事项上即说相应之语。此处以由使者授具足戒等为例。正因先前所允许的甘马语于此并无差异,故说“诸比丘,我允许一次宣读中为两人或三人作”之后,并未说“诸比丘,应如此而行”。若言:即使有差异,也应依各处为两人或多人所说的甘马语方式来理解,虽未明说,亦应如此取用?导师说:于轻微处说明,于重大处不作说明,这并非法的性质。然而,在另一结集注中如此详加阐述:“两人一次宣读”,即两人同时宣读。若读为“以一人”,则意为以一位老师。“依前述方式”,即依“以一位或两位老师”所说之方式,故由一位老师为两人或三人作宣读。若读为“以两人或三人”。若言:“那么,多位老师、多位亲教师呢?”此处已说“此应以一位亲教师,而非多位亲教师”,是否不合法?合法。如何合法?因“以一人宣读”被解析为“一次宣读”,此解析显而易见,故仅是为了显示简略之义,而说为“同时宣读”之分析形式。因此,就其直接义而言,“以一人宣读”即一次宣读,我允许以一位亲教师宣读,而非以多位亲教师。由此,是故显示巴利原文
Ayañhi buddhānaṃ dhammatā – yadidaṃ yattha yattha vacananānattamatthi, tattha tattha garukesu ṭhānesu vattabbayuttaṃ vadanti. Dūtena upasampadādayo cettha nidassanaṃ. Yasmā cettha pubbe anuññātakammavācāya nānattaṃ natthi, tasmā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dve tayo ekānussāvane kātu’’nti vatvā ‘‘evañca pana, bhikkhave, kātabbo’’ti na vuttaṃ. Nānatte satipi tattha tattha dvinnaṃ, bahūnaṃ vā vasena vuttakammavācānusārena gahetabbato avuttanti ce? Na hi lahukesu ṭhānesu vatvā garukesu avacanaṃ dhammatāti ācariyo. Aññatarasmiṃ pana gaṇṭhipade evaṃ papañcitaṃ dve ekānussāvaneti dve ekato anussāvane. ‘‘Ekena’’ iti pāṭho, ekena ācariyenāti attho. Purimanayenevāti ‘‘ekena vā dvīhi vā ācariyehī’’ti vuttanayena eva, tasmā ekenācariyena dve vā tayo vā anussāvetabbā. ‘‘Dvīhi vā tīhi vā’’ti pāṭho. Nānācariyā nānupajjhāyāti ettha ‘‘tañca kho ekena upajjhāyena, na tveva nānupajjhāyenā’’ti vuttattā na vaṭṭatīti ce? Vaṭṭati. Kathaṃ? Ekena anussāvane ekānussāvaneti viggahassa pākaṭattā līnameva dassetuṃ ‘‘ekato anussāvane’’ti viggahova vutto, tasmā ujukattameva sandhāya tañca kho ekena anussāvanaṃ ekānussāvanaṃ, ekena upajjhāyena anujānāmi, na tveva nānupajjhāyenāti attho. Idaṃ sandhāya hi dvidhā viggaho, tasmā ‘‘nānācariyehi nānupajjhāyā na vaṭṭantīti siddhamevā’’ti aññathāpi vadanti. Tañca kho ekena upajjhāyena ekassa upajjhāyassa vā vattabbaṃ anussāvanaṃ, na tveva nānupajjhāyena anujānāmīti attho. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? ‘‘Eko ācariyo, dve vā tayo vā upasampadāpekkhā dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vā upajjhāyānaṃ na tveva anujānāmī’’ti kira vuttanti. Aparasmiṃ pana gaṇṭhipade ‘‘ekena anussāvaneti viggahassa pākaṭattā taṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘ekenā’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ vutte avassaṃ paṇḍitā jānanti. Taṃpākaṭattā ce jānanti, ekenāti iminā kinti ce? Kiñcāpi jānanti, vivādo pana hoti aladdhalesattā, jānituñca na sakkā, ‘ekenā’ti vutte pana taṃ sabbaṃ na hotīti vutta’’nti likhitaṃ. Evaṃ ettha aneke ācariyā ca takkikā ca anekadhā papañcenti, taṃ sabbaṃ suṭṭhu upaparikkhitvā garukulaṃ payirupāsitvā vaṃsānugatova attho gahetabbo. ‘‘Na sabbattha imasmiṃ atthavikappe matibhedo atthī’’ti vuttameva.
达上仪轨解说之注释显示巴利原文
Upasampadāvidhikathāvaṇṇanā
125 125.“癞病、疮肿”——此处,古师认为:列举癞病等,已包含了截手等情形;因此,以“你是人吗?你是男人吗?”等语,来简别堪任者与不堪任者。以“你是自由人吗?你无债务吗?”等语,支持先前截手等章中所说义理分别中的第二种分别。其中,不依次第先说“无债务吗?自由人吗?”是倒序而说,因为他虽是自由人,却非以国王口粮或薪俸为食的受雇者;但由于他受国王管辖,故倾向于国王雇佣的一方;为询问其是否属于这一方的对立面,才说“你不是王兵吗?”否则,以摄受五种疾病所侵者的语句,已涵盖了对所有人的摄取,其余之语便无须再说。若须说,则一切也都应说。显示巴利原文
125.Kuṭṭhaṃ gaṇḍoti ettha kuṭṭhādiggahaṇena hatthacchinnādayopi gahitāva hontīti porāṇā, tasmā ‘‘manussosi purisosī’’ti etehi bhabbābhabbapuggalaparivajjanaṃ karoti. ‘‘Bhujissosi aṇaṇosī’’tiādīhi pubbe hatthacchinnādhikāre vuttaatthavikappesu dutiyaṃ vikappaṃ upathambheti. Tattha ‘‘aṇaṇosi bhujissosī’’ti anukkamena avatvā uppaṭipāṭiyā vacanena bhujisso hoti, na ca rañño bhattavetanavasena bhaṭo. Rājādhīnattā pana so rājabhaṭapakkhaṃ bhajatīti tabbipakkhabhāvapucchanatthaṃ ‘‘nasi rājabhaṭo’’ti vuttaṃ. Aññathā pañcahi ābādhehi phuṭṭhānaṃ gahaṇeneva sabbesaṃ gahaṇe siddhe itare na vattabbā. Atha vattabbā, sabbepi vattabbā siyuṃ.
四种依止等解说显示巴利原文
Cattāronissayādikathāvaṇṇanā
128-9 128-9.“应即刻量影”等语,是因“令顶礼比丘众之足”之说,为令了知长老与下座的差别而说。据说古本读作“久未去”,也有读作“久作”的。显示巴利原文
128-9.‘‘Tāvadeva chāyā metabbā’’tiādi ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ pāde vandāpetvā’’ti vacanato therātherabhāvajānanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Cirena agamāsī’’ti kira porāṇapāṭho, ciraṃ akāsīti catthi.
130 「于共用共住无犯」——因与被举罪者共用、共住之缘而制立了波逸提罪,由此缘而无犯,此为其义。如何得知?由「共住」这一表述可知。与无惭者共用之缘,应生起恶作罪,确实犯恶作,而非因共住之缘。因为与无惭者共住,并非被一概禁止。然而,此处的共住,是指在可供同宿的住所中共同居住,而非指「犯巴拉基咖者即为不共住」中所说的共住。此种共住与被举罪者共行即不如法。与无惭者共住,在某些情形下则是如法的。其余则脱离法的共用。
然而,此「被举罪者还俗」等经文,乃是在显示应受具足戒者与不应受具足戒者的通义时所宣说。更有甚者,清净唯有从依行持而改悔、从罪中清净,而非从还俗中获得;因此,为了显示已受具足戒比丘的清净方式——已受具足戒比丘即使犯至恶说罪,事后还俗而归来,仍可受具足戒,但须忏悔其罪方能清净,而非以其他方式。
对于非共通之罪,因不承认而被举罪,经由改变形相而从罪中出罪者,若再度现起本来的形相,则成为别众;即使还俗归来,亦依上述方式受具足戒后,并未因此出罪,何以故?并非因为现起了另一形相。并非因还俗而令羯磨得以清净。若羯磨不清净,则再受具足戒的羯磨亦有过失之虞。而羯磨……显示巴利原文
130.Anāpattisambhoge saṃvāseti ukkhittakena saddhiṃ sambhogasaṃvāsapaccayā pācittiyāpatti paññattā, tato anāpattīti attho. Kathaṃ paññāyatīti? Saṃvāsaggahaṇe. Alajjinā saddhiṃ sambhogapaccayā āpajjitabbaṃ dukkaṭaṃ pana āpajjati eva, na saṃvāsapaccayā. Na hi alajjinā saddhiṃ saṃvāso paṭikkhitto. Saṃvāso panettha sahaseyyappahonake āvāse sahavāso, na ‘‘pārājiko hoti asaṃvāso’’ti ettha vuttasaṃvāso. Ayaṃ saṃvāso ukkhittakena saddhiṃ na vaṭṭati. Alajjinā saddhiṃ ekacco vaṭṭati. Dhammasambhogavinimuttovetaro . Idaṃ pana ‘‘ukkhittako vibbhamī’’tiādisuttaṃ imasmiṃ upasampādetabbānupasampādetabbadīpanasāmaññato vuttaṃ. Kiñca bhiyyo paṭipattikkamatova āpattito suddhi hoti, na vibbhamena, tasmā upasampanno bhikkhu antamaso dubbhāsitampi āpajjitvā aparabhāge vibbhamitvā āgato upasampajjati, taṃ āpattiṃ desetvāva sujjhati, na aññathāti upasampannassa suddhikkamadassanatthaṃ. Asādhāraṇāpattiyā adassanapaccayā ukkhittakassa liṅgaparivattanena āpattito vuṭṭhitassa puna ce pakatiliṅgamevuppajjati, nānāsaṃvāsakatāva, vibbhamitvā āgatepi yathāvuttanayeneva upasampādetvā na vuṭṭhitattāti ce? Na liṅgantarapātubhāvā. Na vibbhamena kammāsujjhanato. Na kammāsujjhane puna upasampadākammavipattippasaṅgato. Na ca kammavipatti, na ca kammapaṭippassaddhi. Vibbhamena ca anupasampanno nānāsaṃvāsakabhāvena kammaṃ kopeti dhammissarena āhacca bhāsitattā. Teneva ‘‘passissasī’’ti anāgatavacanaṃ kataṃ. Tādiso pana gahaṭṭho nikkhittavattapārivāsiko viya pakatattabhūmiyaṃ vibbhamādinā anupasampannapakatiyaṃyeva tiṭṭhatīti imassa sabbassapi atthavikappassa dassanatthamidaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Pubbe vuttappakāro pana parivattitaliṅgo hutvā puna pakatiliṅge ṭhitaukkhittako puna pucchitabbo ‘‘passasī’’ti. ‘‘Āma passāmī’’ti vadanto osāretabbo. ‘‘Desehī’’ti na vattabbo liṅgaparivattanena vuṭṭhitattā. Tappaṭikammo ukkhittako pucchitabbo ‘‘paṭikammaṃ kiṃ te kata’’nti, ‘‘āma kata’’nti vadanto osāretabbo. ‘‘Kattabbaṃ me paṭikammaṃ na hotī’’ti vadanto na osāretabboti eke. Asādhāraṇāpattimhi idaṃ vidhānaṃ, na sādhāraṇāya. Tattha ukkhittako liṅgaparivattaneneva paṭippassaddhakammoti eke. Vicāretvā yuttataraṃ gahetabbanti ācariyo. Anugaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘alajjiparibhogo sahatthadānādivasena paricchinditabbo, ‘sāraṇīyadhammapūrakādayo dassetvā alajjissa sahatthā dātuṃ vaṭṭatī’ti vadantānaṃ vādo paṭisedhetabbo. Kathaṃ? Ukkhittakassa sahatthā dātuṃ na vaṭṭatīti vinicchayānusārena. Dāpetuṃ pana vaṭṭatevāti ca. Kiñcāpi alajjiparibhogavasena dukkaṭaṃ, atha kho ayaṃ alajjī na hoti, tasmā sabbākārena nirāpattitaṃ sandhāya ‘anāpatti sambhoge saṃvāse’ti vuttaṃ. Kathaṃ paññāyatīti? Viññeyyo atthato ucchurasakasaṭānaṃ sattāhakālikayāvajīvikattā ‘vaṭṭati vikāle ucchuṃ khāditu’nti saññaṃ uppādetvā taṃ khāditvā tappaccayā pācittiyaṃ na passati, vaṭṭatīti tathāsaññitāya. Yo vā pana āpattiṃ āpannabhāvaṃ paṭijānitvā ‘na paṭikaromī’ti abhinivisati, ime dve –
故意犯戒,覆藏其罪;
又行于非道,如是之人,名为无惭者。
显示巴利原文 ‘Sañcicca āpattiṃ āpajjati, āpattiṃ parigūhati; Agatigamanañca gacchati, ediso vuccati alajjīpuggalo’ti. (pari. 359) –
由于未违犯所说之相,他们并非无惭者。因此,以“若不忏悔其罪,与之共住共享则无犯”这一特别文句,既显示了即使无金银买卖,亦会因买卖而犯戒的道理,也显示了与五者一切无犯的道理。如此,在涉及有罪之处所特别说明的这一文句,此处因未如此说,故不与彼无惭者共住共享。又,“若被亲近,则亲近无惭一方”,依此方便,于他处亦应结合种种而寻求其义——这是其他论师的说法。然而诸阿阇梨不作如是说。因律中说“若我说‘我将不见’,则不应度”,故先前所犯之罪,即使度其出家亦不平息,此事已然成立。正因如此,诸阿阇梨令其忏悔罪后,方令其舍学处。“共住共享无犯”,此应疑为:对先前所犯已有之罪,彼作不见想。为令知“彼罪已平息”,故有论师作是说。“你将见吗?”——因处于在家身份,不适于忏悔,这是就未来而说。“度后你将见吗?”——对于应作别住等事的人,因有事存在,故不说“你见吗”,而就未来说。“令出”者,是依驱出而说。在此,因无复应作之事,故说“你见吗”。这一切皆就承认而言,处处皆同。若于一处亦不承认,以此,不应与彼罪相应者共住,这便是由其无惭的缘故。于“见”等之中,显示巴利原文
Vuttalakkhaṇe apatanato alajjino na honti, tasmā ‘yo āpattidesanapaṭikammāni na karoti, tena saddhiṃ sambhogādikaraṇe anāpattī’ti visesetvā vuttavacanena, itarenapi saddhiṃ kiñcāpi rūpiyasaṃvohāro na hoti, atha kho kayavikkayena āpatti hotiyevāti nayo dinno hoti, pañcahi saddhiṃ sabbathāpi anāpattīti nayo ca. Evaṃ sāpattiṭṭhānesu visesetvā ca vacanato idha tathā avuttattā tena saha alajjiparibhogo natthi. Bhajāpiyamāno pana alajjipakkhaṃ bhajatīti imināpi upāyena sabbattha taṃ taṃ saṃsanditvā attho pariyesitabboti apare. Ācariyā pana evaṃ na vadantī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sacāhaṃ na passissāmīti vadati, na pabbājetabbo’’ti vuttattā pubbe āpannāpattiyo uppabbajitassāpi na paṭippassambhantīti siddhaṃ, teneva ācariyā āpattiṃ desāpetvāva sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ kārāpentīti ca anāpatti sambhoge saṃvāseti idaṃ pubbe āpannaṃ santiṃ eva āpattiṃ na passatīti āsaṅkitabbo. Sā paṭippassaddhāti ñāpanatthaṃ vuttanti ca eke. ‘‘Passissasī’’ti gahaṭṭhattā desetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti anāgatavasena vuttaṃ. ‘‘Upasampādetvā passissasī’’ti parivāsādinā kattabbassa atthibhāvena ‘‘passasī’’ti avatvā anāgatavasena vuttaṃ, osāretvāti abbhānavasena. Tattha puna kātabbassa abhāvā ‘‘passasī’’ti vuttaṃ. Idaṃ sabbaṃ sabbattha paṭijānanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ekatrāpi puna na paṭijānāti, etena saha tassā āpattiyā anurūpena saṃvāso na kātabbo, alajjibhāvenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Diṭṭhiyātiādīsu osāraṇaṃ nāma samānakammādinā karaṇanti attho. Anāpatti sambhogeti ukkhittakena sambhoge anāpatti. Kasmā? Ukkhittakakammassa gahaṭṭhabhāvena paṭippassaddhattā, teneva ‘‘alabbhamānāya sāmaggiyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Idāni bhikkhubhāve kattabbatoti keci. Dvīsupi vāresu kammapaṭippassaddhividhānaṃ teyeva jānanti, tasmā sabbavāresu yuttamayuttañca suṭṭhu sallakkhetvā kathetabbaṃ.
通晓篇集、出家与名字,
种种理趣,为佛教根本;
如实地为他开显,
这在牟尼的教法中最为殊胜。
显示巴利原文 Yo khandhakaṃ pabbajjanāmadheyyaṃ, Nānānayaṃ sāsanamūlabhūtaṃ; Ñatvā pakāseti parassa sammā, Tassādhipaccaṃ munisāsanasminti.
2. 布萨犍度注释显示巴利原文
2. Uposathakkhandhakavaṇṇanā
随许集会等之论释显示巴利原文
Sannipātānujānanādikathāvaṇṇanā
132-3 “于彼时”,是指世尊放下亲自诵出教诫巴帝摩卡的重任、允许比丘们单独举行布萨的那个时节。那么,这是哪一个时节呢?正是中菩提时,也就是足以诵出巴帝摩卡的诸学处圆满制定之时。因此经中说:“应允许他们诵巴帝摩卡。”“诸比丘,应如是诵”这一句,是为了规定序文的读诵,并显示学处读诵的范围与段落而说。否则,若以“诸比丘,应如是诵此学处”已经显示出一切学处皆须读诵的次第,那么此处的“诸比丘,应如是诵”便成了没有意义的话。这句话是针对全体僧团的布萨而说的。显示巴利原文
132-3.Tenasamayenāti attano ovādapātimokkhuddese dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā bhikkhūnaṃyeva visuṃ uposathakaraṇaṃ anujānitvā ṭhitasamayena. Ko pana soti? Majjhimabodhiyaṃ pātimokkhuddesappahonakasikkhāpadānaṃ pariniṭṭhānakālo. Tenevāha ‘‘tāni nesaṃ pātimokkhuddesaṃ anujāneyya’’nti. ‘‘Evañca pana, bhikkhave, uddisitabba’’nti nidānuddesaṃ paññāpetukāmatāya ca sikkhāpadānaṃ uddesaparicchedanidassanatthañca vuttaṃ. Aññathā ‘‘evañca pana, bhikkhave, imaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ uddiseyyathā’’ti sabbasikkhāpadānaṃ uddisitabbakkamassa dassitattā idāni ‘‘evañca pana, bhikkhave, uddisitabba’’nti idaṃ niratthakaṃ āpajjati, idañca sabbasaṅghuposathaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
134 ‘诸尊者何不……集会’,这是多人共行之事的表达。在此,依律而说‘比丘尊者’,并非仅仅为了指称僧团上座,更是为了显示僧团应受敬重的言词,故说‘诸尊者,请听我说’。若自己身为上座,对比丘称说‘贤友’方为合宜。何以得知?佛世时,僧团上座之中堪能者实为难得。在一切甘马语的示范中,世尊仅示‘诸尊者,请听我僧团’,难道不是如此吗?确是如其所显示的:依僧团故,僧团上座也应当说‘诸尊者,请听我僧团’;依比丘故,则应说‘贤友’,此可从大迦叶的甘马语示范得知,又从清净布萨中上座比丘说‘贤友,我清净’的示范可知。‘若僧团时机适合’,此语是为显示他人应当告知行布萨的障碍而说。布萨有多种,就其自相而言,说‘应诵巴帝摩卡’。至此,白已成立。唯有由白二甘马才能成就布萨羯磨。难道不是由第三唱和而成吗?不然,因为与白四甘马等不同。在此并非四次发起‘请听我说’。又难道不因与白二等不同,白二也就不应有吗?不然,因为白二甘马也可依余方式而作,即白二甘马亦可依白的方式而作,其余则不可依余方式而作。何以得知?唯依此白二甘马才能成就布萨羯磨。显示巴利原文
134. ‘‘Yaṃnūna ayyāpi…pe… sannipateyyu’’nti bahūnaṃ adhikārappavatti. Tatrāpi vinayaṃ āgamma vutto bhikkhu sāmi, na kevalaṃ saṅghattheroti dassanatthaṃ, saṅghassa gāravayuttavacanārahatādassanatthañca ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante’’ti āha. Tattha sayaṃ ce thero, bhikkhuṃ sandhāya ‘‘āvuso’’ti vattuṃ yujjati. Kathaṃ paññāyati? Buddhakāle saṅghatthero abyatto nāma dullabho. Sabbakammavācāya payoganidassane ca ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho’’ icceva bhagavā dassetīti ce? Evametaṃ tathā dassanato. Saṅghaṃ upādāya saṅghattherenāpi ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho’’ti vattabbaṃ, bhikkhuṃ upādāya ‘‘āvuso’’ti mahākassapassa kammavācāya payogadassanato, pārisuddhiuposathe ca therena bhikkhunā ‘‘parisuddho ahaṃ, āvuso’’ti payogadassanato ca. ‘‘Yadi saṅghassa pattakalla’’nti parato paññāpetabbe uposathakaraṇantarāye sandhāyāha. Uposathassa bahuvidhattā sarūpato vattuṃ ‘‘pātimokkhaṃ uddiseyyā’’ti āha. Ettāvatā ñattiṃ niṭṭhapesi. Ñattidutiyakammato eva hi uposathakammaṃ. Na, tatiyānussāvanasambhavatoti ce? Na, aññehi ñatticatutthakammehi asadisattā. Na hi ettha catukkhattuṃ ‘‘suṇātu me’’ti ārabhīyatīti. Aññehi ñattidutiyehi asadisattā ñattidutiyampi māhotūti ce? Na, ñattidutiyakammassa aññathāpi kattabbato. Tathā hi ñattidutiyakammaṃ ekaccaṃ apalokanavasenapi kātuṃ vaṭṭati, na aññaṃ aññathā kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Kathaṃ paññāyatīti? Idameva uposathakammaṃ ñāpakaṃ.
‘僧团的前行事务是什么?’——此语不应在动议完成之后才说,因为那事务原本就在动议之前就已经做了。因此,也许有人会想:应当这样说:‘尊者,请僧团听我说,僧团的前行事务是什么?若僧团……’?即便如此,也不应说,因为那事务并不包含在动议之内。若如此,是否在任何处都不应说,因为无有意义?并非如此,因为应在如理相应之处而说,即指有待后续语句。若僧团或个人未做此前行事务而举行布萨,则犯越出规定界限之罪。因为当界限被越过时,扫地、设座、备水、点灯等事并不能使免罪。此罪的因缘,在于未做布萨羯磨之前应做之事,而非待羯磨结束才生起——不同于此处所说明知故犯的妄语之罪。因此,诵戒比丘想说‘诸尊者,请报告清净’时,首先令大众忆念与清净相关的前行事务。因为此前行事务若已做,则成为清净的助缘;若未做,则成为不清净的助缘。正是为了兼顾此二义,故不说‘已做未做’,而说‘僧团的前行事务是什么?’。其中,在未做的情况下,为显示随后报告清净的程序,后文将说‘若有罪者,应发露’;在已做的情况下,则说‘若无罪,应保持沉默’。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kiṃ saṅghassa pubbakicca’’nti idaṃ na ñatti niṭṭhapetvā vattabbaṃ, tañhi ñattito puretarameva karīyatīti. Tasmā ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho, kiṃ saṅghassa pubbakiccaṃ, yadi saṅghassā’’ti vattabbaṃ siyāti? Tathāpi na vattabbaṃ, na hi taṃ ñattiyā antokarīyatīti. Yadi evaṃ sabbattha na vattabbaṃ payojanābhāvāti ce? Na, yathāgataṭṭhāneyeva vattabbato, parapadāpekkhatāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Idaṃ pubbakiccaṃ akatvā uposathaṃ karonto saṅgho, puggalo vā ṭhapanakkhettātikkame āpajjati. Na hi tasmiṃ khette atikkante sammajjanāsanodakapadīpakaraṇe āpattimokkho hoti. Uposathakammato pubbe kattabbakiccākaraṇapaccayattā tassā āpattiyā, na sā kammapariyosānāpekkhā etthāgatasampajānamusāvādāpatti viya, tasmā pātimokkhuddesako bhikkhu ‘‘pārisuddhiṃ āyasmanto ārocethā’’ti vattukāmo paṭhamaṃyeva parisuddhāparisuddhapaccayaṃ pubbakiccaṃ sarāpeti. Tañhi kataṃ parisuddhapaccayo hoti, akataṃ aparisuddhapaccayo, teneva ubhayāpekkhādhippāyena ‘‘kataṃ na kata’’nti avatvā ‘‘kiṃ saṅghassa pubbakicca’’ miccevāha. Tattha akatapakkhe tāva pārisuddhiārocanakkamanidassanatthaṃ parato ‘‘yassa siyā āpatti, so āvi kareyyā’’ti ca, katapakkhe ‘‘asantiyā āpattiyā tuṇhī bhavitabba’’nti ca vakkhati.
诸尊者,请报告清净。原因何在?因为我要诵巴帝摩卡。在此,不取现在时‘我诵’,而取未来时‘我将诵’,这是指在‘现在允许他们诵巴帝摩卡’(《大品》一五〇)中所说的诵巴帝摩卡,而说‘我将诵巴帝摩卡’。因为说‘诸比丘,有五种诵巴帝摩卡’,故对现在正进行、名为序诵的巴帝摩卡,其末尾有‘你们是否清净?’乃至三问,那才是罪的范围所在;又因部分亦可施设整体之名,故此处正是针对罪的范围而说‘我将诵巴帝摩卡’。如此说时,因为随后将进入罪的范围,所以‘你们这些畏罪者,都应首先报告清净’这一意义便得以成立。若依现在时说,则‘诸尊者,请报告清净’这句话本身便不能成立,因为那时的报告应首先被期待,更不用说‘我将诵巴帝摩卡’这句话了,因为那时尚未做此事。此理适用于有罪时的发露,而不适用于沉默,因为沉默乃是在羯磨未结束时才达到的;即便如此,在那种情况下也适用。因为诵戒比丘见到比丘们未互相发露罪而保持沉默,便以彼沉默而成为已报告清净者,于是开始诵巴帝摩卡:‘尊者,请听我说……’。显示巴利原文
Pārisuddhiṃ āyasmanto ārocetha. Kiṃkāraṇā? Yasmā pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmi. Ettha ca ‘‘uddisāmī’’ti vattamānakālaṃ aparāmasitvā ‘‘uddisissāmī’’ti anāgatakālaparāmasanena yvāyaṃ ‘‘dāni nesaṃ pātimokkhuddesaṃ anujāneyya’’nti (mahāva. 150) ettha vuttapātimokkhuddeso, taṃ sandhāya ‘‘pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmī’’ti vuttanti eke. Yasmā ‘‘pañcime, bhikkhave, pātimokkhuddesā’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā vattamānassa nidānuddesasaṅkhātassa pātimokkhassa yadetaṃ ante ‘‘kaccittha parisuddhā’’tiādikaṃ yāvatatiyānussāvanaṃ, tasseva āpattikhettattā, avayavepi avayavīvohārasambhavato ca idha āpattikhettameva sandhāya ‘‘pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmī’’ti vuttaṃ. Evañhi vutte yasmā parato āpattikhettaṃ āgamissati, tasmā āpattibhīrukā tumhe sabbeva paṭhamameva pārisuddhiṃ ārocethāti ayamattho sambhavati. Vattamānakālavasena vutte ‘‘pārisuddhiṃ āyasmanto ārocethā’’ti vacanameva na sambhavati tadārocanassa paṭhamaṃ icchitabbattā, pageva tassa karaṇābhāvena ‘‘pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmī’’ti vacanaṃ. Ayaṃ nayo santiyā āpattiyā ārocane yujjati, na tuṇhībhāve, akammapariyosānā tuṇhībhāvappattito, evaṃ santepi tasmiṃ yujjateva. Pātimokkhuddesako hi aññamaññaṃ āpattiāvikaraṇaṃ akatvā tuṇhībhūte bhikkhū passitvā teneva tuṇhībhāvena ārocitapārisuddhiko hutvā ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante’’ti pātimokkhuddesaṃ ārabhi.
于此有问:既然前文已说“僧团应举行布萨,应诵巴帝摩卡”,此处是否也应说“僧团将举行布萨,将诵巴帝摩卡”?抑或因其性质是“个人诵”,故应依字面直说?还是应说“我将举行布萨,我将诵巴帝摩卡”?不应如此说,因为这有违其性质,且会引生不应有的结论。正是通过个人诵戒,僧团的布萨才得以成就,而非通过个人举行布萨;况且那是他个人将行之事,并非僧团,如此便落入不应有的结论。当说“请听”时,为免导致心不和合的过失,故说“我们听”。若问:既然说了“我将诵”,是否也应说“我们将听”?不必,因为无需顾及显示罪之范围的意趣,故只说“我们听”——仅此一语,其意趣便已超越。既然如此,为何众人都开始应答?正是为了以“我将诵”这一不共之语,防止有罪者产生心不和合的过失。“忆念者”——以此显示明知故犯妄语的刻意性。“世尊说此为障碍法”——以此显示,此妄语虽由不作为而生、看似微细,却有重大过患。“欲求清净者”是指欲求有餘清净(即就残餘罪而言的无罪状态)及无餘清净(即在俗状态)者,为何应当发露?因为不入于障碍,是安乐住的缘。此处未说“今日是显示巴利原文
Etthāha – paṭhamaṃ ‘‘saṅgho uposathaṃ kareyya, pātimokkhaṃ uddiseyyā’’ti vuttattā idhāpi ‘‘saṅgho uposathaṃ karissati, pātimokkhaṃ uddisissatī’’ti vattabbaṃ, atha ‘‘puggalassa uddesā’’ti lakkhaṇattā yathārutameva vattabbaṃ, tathāpi ‘‘uposathaṃ karissāmi, pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmī’’ti vattabbanti? Na vattabbaṃ lakkhaṇavirodhato, aniṭṭhappasaṅgato ca. Puggalassa uddesā eva hi saṅghassa uposatho kato hoti, na puggalassa uposathakaraṇena. Tañca sova karissati, na saṅghoti aniṭṭhappasaṅgova āpajjati. ‘‘Suṇāthā’’ti vutte acittasāmaggippasaṅgabhayā ‘‘suṇomā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Suṇissāmā’’ti vattabbaṃ ‘‘uddisissāmī’’ti vuttattāti ce? Na vattabbaṃ, āpattikhettadassanādhippāyanirapekkhatāya ‘‘suṇoma’’ icceva vattabbaṃ. Ekapadeneva hissa tadadhippāyo atikkantoti. Yadi evaṃ kimatthaṃ taṃ sabbeheva āraddhanti ce? ‘‘Uddisissāmī’’ti iminā asādhāraṇavacanena āpannassa acittasāmaggippasaṅganivāraṇatthaṃ. Saramānenāti iminā cassa sampajānamusāvādassa sacittakataṃ dasseti. Antarāyiko dhammo vutto bhagavatāti evaṃ akiriyasamuṭṭhānassāpi evaṃ parittakassa imassa musāvādassa mahādīnavataṃ dasseti. Visuddhāpekkhenāti sāvasesaṃ āpattiṃ upādāya anāpattibhāvasaṅkhātaṃ anavasesañca upādāya gihibhāvasaṅkhātaṃ visuddhiṃ icchantena kasmā āvi kātabbā? Antarāyabhāvānupagamanena phāsuvihārapaccayattā. Idha ‘‘ajjuposatho pannaraso’’ti na vuttaṃ parato divasaniyamassa kattukāmatādhippāyena avuttattā. Evaṃ pana te bhikkhū sabbadivasesu uddisiṃsu.
135 “起始”即指戒巴帝摩卡,尽管这里意指的是结集的巴帝摩卡。“五者”是依论母中所说而说。“未犯者”是依人而立的教示。然而,《古义疏》中说:“‘应行布萨’至此为动议。所谓三番宣告,即‘若有罪者’等三句,连同末尾的‘我第二次、第三次询问’这一句,共有两种。其中,第一遍是为记起罪而坐者所设,第二遍则是为未记起者提醒。” “于语门”是依显了方式直接说的。虽也以身表进行,但因不属于身业,故只应以语表来表明。“于僧团中”等,据说是特征语。若为了行僧团布萨而坐在僧团中,便是在彼僧团中;若为了行别众布萨而坐在别众中,便是在彼别众中;若欲于一人处行清净布萨,即应于彼一人处表明。对此,思辨者说:“由此表明,此妄语不仅发生于僧团中,而且依此处所说的特征,即便没有‘尊者们,请表明清净’等规定,若于别众布萨中,有罪者欲行布萨而不表明,默然而作,亦犯故意妄语罪。据说这是为了揭示此义而说的特征语。”他们的意思是,否则就不会说“于别众中”了。导师认为,这是依表明的意图而说,并非作此思辨。因为,当表明时,若以“我向僧团表明”的意图而作表明,即称显示巴利原文
135.‘‘Ādimeta’’nti sīlapātimokkhameva vuttaṃ, kiñcāpi ganthapātimokkho adhippeto. ‘‘Pañcannaṃ vā’’ti mātikāyaṃ vuttānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Anajjhāpanno vāti puggalādhiṭṭhānadesanā. Porāṇagaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘‘uposathaṃ kareyyā’ti ettāvatā ñatti hoti. Yāvatatiyānussāvanā nāma ‘yassa siyā āpattī’tiādivacanattayaṃ, ante ‘dutiyampi tatiyampi pucchāmī’ti idañcāti duvidhaṃ. Tattha paṭhamaṃ āpattiṃ saritvā nisinnassa, dutiyaṃ asarantassa sāraṇattha’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Vacīdvāre’’ti pākaṭavasena ujukameva vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi kāyaviññattiyāpi karīyati, kāyakammābhāvā pana vacīviññattiyāyeva āvi kātabbā. ‘‘Saṅghamajjhe vā’’tiādi lakkhaṇavacanaṃ kira. Saṅghuposathakaraṇatthaṃ saṅghamajjhe ce nisinno, tasmiṃ saṅghamajjhe. Gaṇuposathakaraṇatthañce gaṇamajjhe nisinno, tasmiṃ gaṇamajjhe. Ekasseva santike ce pārisuddhiuposathaṃ kattukāmo, tasmiṃ ekapuggale āvi kātabbāti, ‘‘etena na kevalaṃ saṅghamajjhe evāyaṃ musāvādo sambhavati, atha kho ettha vuttalakkhaṇena asatipi ‘pārisuddhiṃ āyasmanto ārocethā’tiādividhāne gaṇuposathepi sāpattiko hutvā uposathaṃ kattukāmo anārocetvā tuṇhībhūtova karoti ce, sampajānamusāvādāpattiṃ āpajjatīti imassatthassa āvikaraṇato lakkhaṇavacanaṃ kireta’’nti vadanti takkikā. Aññathā ‘‘gaṇamajjhevā’’ti na vuttanti tesaṃ adhippāyo. Ārocanādhippāyavasena vuttanti no takkoti ācariyo. Ārocento hi saṅghassa ārocemīti adhippāyena āvi karonto saṅghamajjhe āvi karoti nāma. Attano ubhatopasse nisinnānaṃ ārocento gaṇamajjhe. Ekassevārocessāmi sabhāgassāti adhippāyena ārocento ekapuggale āroceti nāma. Pubbe vibhattapadassa puna vibhajanaṃ atthavisesābhāvadīpanatthanti veditabbaṃ.
136-7 说了“诸比丘,不应每日……乃至……恶作”之后,又接着说“诸比丘,允许在布萨日诵巴帝摩卡”,这便显示:仅在非布萨日有那恶作,而在布萨日,即使每日诵也是许可的。因此,那些比丘在十四日诵后,又在十五日诵了,所以世尊说“每半月一次”。其中,以第一句显示:和合日即是布萨日。凭借这两者遮止第八日,是为了防止“每日”这一遮止被过度扩展。这是什么意思呢?如果僧团分裂后,于月朔日和合,并在该日行和合布萨,便会犯有两种恶作——即被这两条合在一起所遮止,这就是所说的义理。否则,和合布萨并非每日之事,若是,则应当于昼夜皆行。而且,在该半月内,常规布萨也并非每日举行,若是,则应当于昼夜皆行。再者,于该半月,若常规布萨未诵,则应行和合布萨,这便是所犯。是否应依例外原则来理解?不是,因为会导致不欲之过。这是何意呢?即:在和合日行和合布萨后,当该半月的常规布萨日到来时,不应再行常规布萨,这就是例外。也就是说,遮止在应当作为例外之处以外,另行制定通则。显示巴利原文
136-7.‘‘Na, bhikkhave, devasikaṃ…pe… dukkaṭassā’’ti vatvā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, uposathe pātimokkhaṃ uddisitu’’nti idaṃ anuposathe eva taṃ dukkaṭaṃ , uposathe pana devasikampi vaṭṭatīti dīpeti, tasmā te bhikkhū cātuddasiyaṃ uddisitvāpi pannarasiyaṃ uddisiṃsu, tenāha ‘‘sakiṃ pakkhassā’’ti. Tattha purimena sāmaggīdivaso uposathadivaso evāti dīpeti. Ubhayena aṭṭhamiṃ paṭikkhipitvā devasikaṃ paṭikkhepassa atippasaṅgaṃ nivāreti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Bhinno ce saṅgho pāṭipadadivase samaggo hoti, tasmiṃ divase sāmaggīuposathaṃ karonto ubhayampi dukkaṭaṃ āpajjanto ubhayena ekībhūtena nivārito hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Aññathā sāmaggīuposatho na devasiko. Ce, ahorattaṃ kātabbo. Tasmiñca pakkhe pakatiuposatho na devasiko. Ce, ahorattaṃ kātabbo. Tasmiñca pakkhe pakatiuposatho anuddiṭṭho. Ce hoti, sāmaggīuposatho kātabboti āpajjati. Na apavādanayena gahetabbattāti ce? Na, aniṭṭhappasaṅgato. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Sāmaggīdivase sāmaggīuposathaṃ katvā puna tasmiṃ pakkhe pakatiuposathadivase sampatte pakatiuposatho na kātabboti. Apavādoti. Apavāditabbaṭṭhānato aññattha ussaggavidhānaṃ nivāreti.
“和合的范围究竟如何?”此处意为:所谓和合,就是同法者共集一处。而同法者,是指所有的同法者,还是依住处相同而称为同法者?对此,如果是同法者之间的和合才名为和合,那就应期望所有分散而住者的和合。如果是依住处,则称为同一住处中的同法者。否则便会变成“同一住处即是和合”。“愿勿离我”即愿不离去。显示巴利原文
Kittāvatānu kho sāmaggīti etthāyamadhippāyo – sāmaggī nāmesā sabhāgānaṃ sannipāto. Sabhāgā ca nāma yattakā sahadhammikā, te sabbepi honti, udāhu āvāsasabhāgatāya sabhāgā nāma hontīti. Tattha yadi sahadhammikānaṃ sāmaggī sāmaggī nāma, sabbesaṃ puthuvibhattānaṃ sāmaggī icchitabbā. Athāvasathavasena, ekāvāsasabhāgānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Aññathā ekāvāse sāmaggīti āpajjati. Mā no agamāsīti agato mā hoti.
结界允许论之注释显示巴利原文
Sīmānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
138 世尊先遮止了依同一住处的和合,欲允许依同一界的和合,因此说:“诸比丘,允许划定界。”若欲说明住处范围,则应说:“至此为同一住处,乃至同一界。诸比丘,允许划定界。”因此应知,此处并非依允许的已结之界来确定同一住处的范围,而是依近行界来确定。如何得知呢?依经藏本身,如说:“尔时,具寿乌巴难达释子在两处住处安居……乃至……同一意图。”否则,若只依同一住处而有和合,则在众多住处及非住处中,便不可能有和合,这样当他前往那住处时,就在界外行布萨。这与“诸比丘,于布萨日不应前往有比丘的非住处”等经藏相违,因为即使有僧团,也不应在非住处行布萨。如果在非住处也可得和合,就不应说“至此为和合,乃至同一住处”。因此,应知前一种说法方式完全为后说所遮,即使依不同住处也有和合。有人说:“如说‘我们做那羯磨’之后未做等,因观待未来,所以说‘我们做’时无效。”有记载:“即使未清理界,也可以宣说界相。”最低限度为七肘半高,如象之量。若有一处相连,则不应作。此处,《随义疏》中说:“若四方四座山顶之下,有石如背石状而立,虽非同一相连,但如果上方无……”显示巴利原文
138. Ekāvāsagatānaṃ vasena sāmaggiṃ paṭikkhipitvā ekasīmagatānaṃ vasena anujānitukāmo bhagavā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sīmaṃ sammannitu’’nti āha. Atha āvāsaparicchedaṃ vattukāmo bhaveyya. Ettāvatā ekāvāso yāvatā ekāsīmā. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sīmaṃ sammannitu’’nti vadeyya. Tasmā na idha anuññātabaddhasīmāvasena ekāvāsaparicchedo hoti, upacārasīmāvaseneva hotīti veditabbaṃ. Kathaṃ jānitabbanti ce? Pāḷitova, yathāha ‘‘tena kho pana samayena āyasmā upanando sakyaputto eko dvīsu āvāsesu vassaṃ vasi…pe… ekādhippāya’’nti (mahāva. 364). Aññathā vassacchedoti aniṭṭhappasaṅgova, kathaṃ? Ekāvāsavaseneva ce sāmaggī, bahuāvāsaanāvāsesu na sambhaveyya. Tato so taṃ āvāsaṃ gacchanto bahiddhā uposathaṃ karoti. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, tadahuposathe sabhikkhuko anāvāso gantabbo’’tiādi (mahāva. 181)-pāḷivirodho satipi saṅghe anāvāse uposathassa akattabbato. Anāvāsepi ce sāmaggī labbhati, ‘‘ettāvatā sāmaggī, yāvatā ekāvāso’’ti na vattabbaṃ, tasmā sabbathā purimanayo pacchimeneva paṭikkhittoti katvā nānāvāsavasenapi sāmaggīti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Taṃ kammaṃ karomāti vatvā na akaṃsū’tiādīsu viya anāgatampi apekkhati, tasmā ‘karomā’ti vutte na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Sīmaṃ asodhetvāpi nimittaṃ kittetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti likhitaṃ. Heṭṭhimakoṭiyā aḍḍhaṭṭhamaratanubbedho hatthippamāṇo. Sace eko baddho hoti, na kātabboti ettha ‘‘catūsu disāsu catunnaṃ pabbatakūṭānaṃ heṭṭhā piṭṭhipāsāṇasadise pāsāṇe ṭhitattā ekābaddhabhāve satipi pathavito uddhaṃ tesaṃ sambandhe asati heṭṭhā pathavigatasambandhamatte abbohārikaṃ katvā kittetuṃ vaṭṭati. Teneva ‘piṭṭhipāsāṇo atimahantopi pāsāṇasaṅkhyameva gacchatī’ti vuttaṃ. Pathavito heṭṭhā tassa mahantabhāve gayhamāne pabbatameva hotī’’ti anugaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. ‘‘Cinitvā katapaṃsupuñje tiṇagumbarukkhā ce jāyanti, pabbato hotīti dhammasiritthero. Nevāti upatissatthero’’ti vuttaṃ.
“石头”指的是,他们说:“用石灰制成的石头也是可以的。”因为砖已被禁止,故应审察。其量应为重三十二婆罗的球状石块,依重量而非依数量计。“那根”者,指如树桩般竖立的石头。显示巴利原文
Pāsāṇoti ‘‘sudhāmayapāsāṇopi vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Vīmaṃsitabbaṃ iṭṭhakāya paṭikkhittattā. Dvattiṃsapalaguḷapiṇḍappamāṇo tulatāya, na tulagaṇanāya. Sopīti khāṇuko viya uṭṭhitapāsāṇo.
“乃至四、五棵树的相状”:某些版本无“相状”一词。此处若有三种实心树、两种非实心树,应以实心树占多数为宜。又说:“坟场在此亦算作林,因其自然生长故。”然而有些人认为:“若四种树中有两种为实心树,即应行。实心树更多或相等,亦应行。”因此,纵然树木众多,只要有两种实心树存在,便可行。显示巴利原文
Catupañcarukkhanimittamattampīti ekaccesu nimittasaddo natthi. Ettha tayo ce sārarukkhā honti, dve asārarukkhā, sārarukkhānaṃ bahuttaṃ icchitabbaṃ. ‘‘Susānampi idha ‘vanamevā’ti saṅkhyaṃ gacchati sayaṃjātattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘catūsu dve antosārā ce, vaṭṭati. Antosārā adhikā, samā vā, vaṭṭati. Tasmā bahūsupi dve ce antosārā atthi, vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti.
“于后分”:此处有人说:“由于已离开这些绑缚之处,故为可行。同样,在长途道路中,因所取处与所至处不同,亦为可行。”显示巴利原文
Parabhāgeti ettha ‘‘etehi baddhaṭṭhānato gatattā vaṭṭati. Tathā dīghamaggepi gahitaṭṭhānato gataṭṭhānassa aññattā’’ti vadanti.
“每半月”:此处有记载:“随半月而有,或为半月之附属。”有些人认为,因提到“内衣湿透”,故唯有在恰好那样水量的地方才能进行。而“湿透”一词,是从最低限度说明河流的特征。对于这类河流,在四个月中,无论水少水多,凡是水覆盖并流动之处,即使水少,站立其中而行作,也是可以的,有些人这样说。又有人说:“由于流动处方具河流的特征,因此,从桥以下,只要有那样流动之水处,即是河流。”显示巴利原文
Anvaddhamāsanti ettha ‘‘anubaddho addhamāso, addhamāsassa vā anū’’ti likhitaṃ. ‘‘Antaravāsako temiyatī’’ti vuttattā tattakappamāṇaudakeyeva kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti keci. Temiyatīti iminā heṭṭhimakoṭiyā nadilakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Evarūpāya nadiyā yasmiṃ ṭhāne cattāro māse appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā udakaṃ ajjhottharitvā pavattati, tasmiṃ ṭhāne appodakepi ṭhatvā kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti eke. ‘‘Pavattanaṭṭhāne nadinimitta’nti vuttattā setuto parato tattakaṃ udakaṃ yadi pavattati, nadī evā’’ti vadanti.
“于自然池等”:自然池等处静止的水,依自然池等的规定,即使没有间隔,也可以作为界相,如同河彼岸界的界相一样。如果该处后来变为村落或田地,则可在那里另结他界。“可举起者”:指可以取出而持取之物。显示巴利原文
Jātassarādīsu ṭhitodakaṃ jātassarādipadesena anantarikampi nimittaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati nadipārasīmāya nimittaṃ viya. Sace so padeso kālantarena gāmakhettabhāvaṃ pāpuṇāti, tattha aññaṃ sīmaṃ sammannituṃ vaṭṭati. Ukkhepimanti uddharitvā gahetabbakaṃ.
“未结界的寺院,在结界时预留近处”:注疏写道“预留将来应认定的空间”。“已入内相者”:他们说“若有一人半心愿意在内,则所有人到来便无必要,因此说‘已入内相者’,且这是依随顺法而说的”。“不来亦可”:注疏写道“因界未结,故不成别众”。在另一村田站立唱说界相时,以及在认定共住界时,前来集会并无必要——这是所说的。“或击鼓为号”:注疏写道“宣告‘我们作认定的结束’”,由此成立“在那样的情形下,那样的方式是允许的”。为何如此?为了便利。即不举行大众集会之劳苦,以较少人而作便利。若结大界时有障碍,为显示仅以此量也能安乐而住,故有说“第一”者。如何得知“自此以下便不允许”?因为僧羯磨以二十众为作持之极量。若连同堪能作羯磨者,取二十一比丘,是允许的。应知仅以此量为安乐坐卧之量。若将同一界相告知他人后而结,有些说也是允许的。显示巴利原文
Abaddhasīmavihārānaṃ sīmāya upacāraṃ ṭhapetvāti ‘‘āyatiṃ sammannitabbāya okāsaṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti likhitaṃ. Antonimittagatehi panāti ‘‘ekassa upaḍḍhaṃ antokattukāmatāya sati sabbesaṃ āgamane payojanaṃ natthīti katvā ‘antonimittagatehī’ti vuttaṃ, tañca sāmīcivasenā’’ti vadanti. Anāgamanampi vaṭṭatīti ‘‘sīmāya abaddhattā vaggaṃ nāma na hotī’’ti likhitaṃ. ‘‘Aññasmiṃ gāmakhette ṭhatvā nimittakittanakāle, samānasaṃvāsakasīmāya sammannanakāle ca āgamanapayojanaṃ natthī’’ti vuttaṃ. Bherisaññaṃ vāti ‘‘sammannanapariyosānaṃ karomāti vatvā’’ti likhitaṃ, tena tādise kāle taṃ kappatīti siddhaṃ hoti. Kiṃ iminā? Sukhakaraṇatthanti mahājanasannipātanaparissamaṃ akatvā appatarehi sukhakaraṇatthaṃ. Yadi mahāsīmābandhanakāle antarāyo hoti, tattakenapi sukhavihāroti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭhama’’nti vuttanti eke. Tato oraṃ na vaṭṭatīti kathaṃ paññāyatīti? Vīsativaggakaraṇīyaparamattā saṅghakammassa. Kammārahena saddhiṃ ekavīsati bhikkhū ce gaṇhāti, vaṭṭati. Tattakappamāṇaṃ sukhanisajjavasena veditabbaṃ. Tameva nimittaṃ aññepi kittetvā sace bandhanti, vaṭṭatīti eke.
“然而,在如是结界的……界中间者,属于村田”:这是为了显示和合的分界并非依住处而定,而是唯依界而定。“将可移动的相石安置后”:这是就可移动的界相而说的。从此以下为要义次第——“他们不能废除”:指那些未察觉不别住者,心想“我们将废除共住界”而作努力,却不能废除。“一宝石量”:因容易辨别中间故说。即使仅一指节量也是允许的。从破界开始而结,是惯行。依惯行而作,则能远离迷惑。“小屋”:指尖顶屋、地屋。“如臼”:指如地臼般的小坑。“于门前”:有些说是指地屋而言。“不向下入”:因在墙内侧安置界相而唱说,故不向下入于空中,意指在上方所造的殿堂。“附着于墙”:指依附于墙者。据说这些附着于墙者,不被称为“同一结”。整个殿堂是否属于界内?无论是否同一结。所谓多罗树根山,是渐次细小的。空中悬岩:指无围的悬岩。有孔的石,即是窟。内窟:指山的内窟。然而,关于门,后面说“从内”,其意是:从界外的石窟向下进入。显示巴利原文
‘‘Evaṃbaddhāsu pana…pe… sīmantarikā hi gāmakhettaṃ bhajatī’’ti na āvāsavasena sāmaggīparicchedo, kintu sīmāvasenevāti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Nimittupagapāsāṇe ṭhapetvā’’ti sañcārimanimittassa tapparato vuttaṃ. Ito paṭṭhāya gaṇṭhipadakkamo hoti – na sakkhissantīti te avippavāsaṃ asallakkhetvā ‘‘samānasaṃvāsakameva samūhanissāmā’’ti vāyāmantā samūhanituṃ na sakkhissanti. ‘‘Ekaratanappamāṇā’’ti suviññeyyantarā hotīti katvā vuttaṃ. Ekaṅgulamattampi vaṭṭateva. Khaṇḍasīmato paṭṭhāya bandhanaṃ āciṇṇaṃ. Āciṇṇakaraṇena vigatasammoho hotīti. Kuṭigeheti kuṭighare bhūmighare. Udukkhalaṃvāti bhūmiudukkhalaṃ viya khuddakāvāṭaṃ. ‘‘Pamukhe’’ti bhūmikuṭiṃ sandhāya vuttanti eke. Heṭṭhā na otaratīti bhittito oraṃ nimittāni ṭhapetvā kittitattā heṭṭhā ākāse na otarati, upari kate pāsādeti attho. Bhittilaggeti bhittinissitake. Ime kira bhittilaggāpi ‘‘ekābaddhā’’ti na vuccanti. Sabbo pāsādo sīmaṭṭho hotīti ekābaddho vā hotu, mā vā. Tālamūlakapabbato nāma anupubbena tanuko. Ākāsapabbhāranti aparikkhepapabbhāraṃ. Susirapāsāṇo nāma leṇaṃ hoti. Antoleṇanti pabbatassa antoleṇaṃ. Dvāraṃ pana sandhāya parato ‘‘orato’’ti vuttaṃ, sabbathāpi sīmato bahileṇena otaratīti adhippāyo.
“净化大界后”的意思是:凡属界内的比丘,纵然去到了远处,也仍与该界相连、属于该界。因此,不应忽视他而安住(举行羯磨),这是意旨所在。如果这样,那就应当说“除去所依附者之后,可作羯磨”。《大注》中也只说“净化界后应作”而已。有些大长老也说“应当净化”。又有文句作“或净化大界后应作羯磨”。而且后面将说到“依所说的方法”,因此有些认为共同的文句才是善美的。在前一种方式中,意指从破界起身后,处于大界中低下的情况;令其举出之后再作,是不允许的。为什么呢?因为他在界内。有些说树下的地中根即是破界,或是无记事。“然而,若从中间截断,住于大界的根便属于大界,住于破界的根便属于破界,因为不再被彼所系属的地味等所摄持。”这是所说的。“在结界以后才生长出来的树上坐下作羯磨,是允许的,犹如在后结界的房屋中。”这样说明之后,又给出了理由:“在结界时已经存在的树上坐下而作,是不允许的,因为它不曾进入上界。”若是如此,则结界时并未攀登该树,只在已结界后才攀登,这便成了过失。然而,后来生长出来的树因为系属于彼界,所以已入于界数;同样,先前已存在的树也应如此理解。由“任何”一语,草等也被包括在内。大长老们也是净化草之后才作羯磨的。显示巴利原文
Mahāsīmaṃ sodhetvāti sīmaṭṭhaṃ dūragatampi sīmagataṃ sīmasambandhaṃva, tasmā taṃ anāmasitvā ṭhātabbanti adhippāyo. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘tannissitakaṃ apanetvā kammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘sīmaṃ sodhetvā kātabba’’nti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Mahātherāpi ‘‘sodhetabba’’micceva vadantīti eke. ‘‘Mahāsīmaṃ sodhetvā vā kammaṃ kātabba’’nti ca pāṭho atthi. ‘‘Vuttanayenevā’’ti ca parato vakkhati, tasmā sādhāraṇapāṭhova sundaroti eke. Purimanayepīti khaṇḍasīmāya uṭṭhahitvā mahāsīmāya onatepīti attho. Ukkhipāpetvā kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Kasmā? Anto ṭhitattā. Rukkhassa heṭṭhā pathavigataṃ mūlaṃ khaṇḍasīmāva hoti, abbohārikaṃ vāti apare. ‘‘Majjhe pana chinne mahāsīmāya ṭhitamūlaṃ mahāsīmameva bhajati, khaṇḍasīmāya ṭhitaṃ khaṇḍasīmameva bhajati tadāyattapathavirasādīhi anuggahitattā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sīmāya pacchā uṭṭhitarukkhe nisīditvā kammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati pacchāsīmāyaṃ katagehe viyā’’ti vatvā ‘‘bandhanakāle ṭhitarukkhe nisīditvā kātuṃ na vaṭṭati uparisīmāya agamanato’’ti kāraṇaṃ vadanti. Evaṃ sati bandhanakāle puna ārohaṇaṃ nāma natthi, bandhitakāle eva āruhatīti āpajjati. Pacchā uṭṭhitarukkho pana tappaṭibaddhattā sīmasaṅkhyameva gato, evaṃ pubbe uṭṭhitarukkhopīti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Yaṃ kiñcipī’’ti vacanato tiṇādipi saṅgahitaṃ. Mahātherāpi tiṇaṃ sodhetvāva karontīti.
140 因为界域中央出现角,所以说“从角到角”。他们说:“由于是无心的,也会犯戒。”“Pārayatī”意指覆盖。覆盖的是什么?是界。有人说:“‘最末的……携带’——因此,下方的船不算在内”,这是不合理的,因为在第二波罗夷关于船载货物的章节中,那也是被允许的。另有人说:“这是按中等身材男子的负重份量来说的。”由于比丘尼们不可能有河对岸的界,所以对“一位比丘尼前往河对岸”所说的过失的避免,这只是论师的推论。两处都用了“dhuva”一词。因此,为避免诵戒的障碍,诵戒日便确定为固定的。在这里的船,是指尺寸适当、通用的、有柱的船,而不是筏子,这是论师的推论;意思是砍伐树木制成的。如果同属一个村田,所有界标内的比丘都应被置于伸手可及的范围内,然后进行羯磨。如果是不同的村田,不来也可以。仅仅在两岸提及界标,并不包含岛,因此在岛上必须提及界标。他们说:“坐在河下游的比丘会破坏羯磨,因为河流只在上游那一边属于界内。”显示巴利原文
140. Yasmā majjhato koṇaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘koṇato koṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Āpattiñca āpajjati acittakattā’’ti vadanti. Pārayatīti ajjhottharati. Kā sā? Sīmā. ‘‘Yā sabbantimena…pe… vahatī’’ti tato heṭṭhimā nāvāsaṅkhyaṃ na gacchatīti katvā vuttanti eke, taṃ na yuttaṃ dutiyapārājike nāvaṭṭhabhaṇḍādhikāre tassāpi adhippetattā. Majjhimapurisassa bhārappamāṇena vuttanti eke. Bhikkhunīnampi nadīpārasīmāsambhavato tāsaṃ ‘‘ekā vā nadīpāraṃ gaccheyyā’’ti vuttadosapariharaṇatthanti ācariyassa takko. Ubhayatthāpi dhuva-saddo gahito. Tena uposathantarāya pariharaṇatthaṃ uposathadivaso niyamatova vutto. Ettha ca nāvā nāma pamāṇayuttā sabbasādhāraṇā thambhanāvā adhippetā, na kullanāvāti no takkoti ācariyo. Rukkhaṃ chinditvā katoti attho. Sace ekaṃ gāmakhettaṃ, sabbanimittānaṃ anto ṭhite bhikkhū hatthapāsagate katvā sammannitabbā. Nānāgāmakhettaṃ ce, anāgamanampi vaṭṭati. Ubhayatīre nimittakittanamattena dīpako saṅgahito na hoti, tasmā dīpake nimittāni kittetabbāneva. ‘‘Nadiyā heṭṭhā nisinnabhikkhu kammaṃ kopeti. Upariyeva hi nadī hotī’’ti vadanti.
布萨堂等解说显示巴利原文
Uposathāgārādikathāvaṇṇanā
141 由于经中说“若僧团希望,或精舍……乃至……窟”,因此不仅在地面上,在精舍等的上方,界也是被允许的,因为布萨羯磨是主要的,这已成立。若问:“如何知道界是以布萨为主要的呢?”因为正是以布萨为理由而开许的:在羯磨中仅说“共住”就已足够成立,却另说了“同一布萨”。有记载说:“除了布萨以外,其余的羯磨称为共住。”“除去一个后”是圣典的文句。显示巴利原文
141. ‘‘Yaṃ saṅgho ākaṅkhati vihāraṃ vā…pe… guhaṃ vā’’ti vacanato na kevalaṃ pathaviyaṃyeva, vihārādīnaṃ uparipi sīmā anuññātā hoti uposathakammapadhānattāti siddhaṃ. Tappadhānā sīmāti kathaṃ paññāyatīti ce? Tadadhikārānuññātattā, sammutiyaṃ ‘‘samānasaṃvāsā’’ti ettāvatā siddhe visuṃ ‘‘ekūposathā’’ti vacanato ca. ‘‘Uposathaṃ ṭhapetvā sesakammāni samānasaṃvāsā nāmā’’ti likhitaṃ. ‘‘Ekaṃ samūhanitvā’’ti pāḷipāṭho.
142 “已安居者”是针对同一界内和合的情况而说的。否则,若在不同界中,则以能听见为限;若虽在同一界内,却身处伸手可及的范围之外而住,也以能听见为限,这便会导致不合理的结论。此处的“已羯磨或未羯磨”,是指布萨堂的羯磨,而非界的羯磨。何以得知?从上下文主题、从后面的授欲规定以及授清净规定中,便可了知。其中,前一个理由用于遮止前一种不合理的结论,后一个理由用于遮止后一种,应当这样理解。“布萨口”是指布萨的场所。有记载说:“‘布萨口’是指布萨堂的场所。”任何界标都可以提及,这又是如何知道的呢?因为仅仅说到“首先应提及界标,提及界标后”这样一些内容。若问:既然前面已经说过,这里就不再说了吗?那不是理由,因为在佛陀的教说中,不会有懈怠。有些人认为:在取消界时,必须先取消布萨堂,然后才能成功取消界。这种说法并不合理,因为未结界的布萨堂羯磨是成立的,这是论师的推论。“布萨口”是指布萨堂的入口,这是诸论师所说。关于布萨口的界标提及,应按照界中所说的方法来操作。有些人认为:即使一个人也可以提及。他们说:“无论是殿堂,还是凉亭等中的任何一种,但在甘马语中,必须说‘布萨口’。”这是有记载的。显示巴利原文
142.Katovassāti ekasīmāya samagge sandhāya vuttaṃ. Aññathā nānāsīmāyaṃ ṭhitānaṃ savanaṃ pamāṇaṃ, ekasīmāyapi hatthapāsaṃ muñcitvā ṭhitānaṃ vā savanameva pamāṇanti aniṭṭhaṃ āpajjati. Tattha sammatāya vā asammatāya vāti uposathāgārasammutiyā, na sīmāsammutiyā. Kathaṃ paññāyatīti? Adhikārato, parato chandadānapaññattito, pārisuddhidānapaññattito ca. Tattha purimaṃ kāraṇaṃ purimaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ nivāreti, pacchimaṃ pacchimanti veditabbaṃ. Uposathamukhanti uposathaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Uposathamukhassāti uposathāgāraṭṭhānassā’’ti likhitaṃ. Yāni kānici nimittāni kittetuṃ vaṭṭetīti idaṃ kathaṃ paññāyatīti? ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ nimittā kittetabbā nimitte kittetvā’’ti ettakameva vuttattā. Paṭhamaṃ vuttattā na vuccantīti ce? Taṃ pana akāraṇaṃ, na hi buddhānaṃ desanāya ālasiyaṃ atthi. Sīmāsamūhananakāle uposathāgāraṃ samūhanitvāva sīmāsamūhananaṃ ijjhatīti eke. Taṃ ayuttaṃ abaddhāya sīmāya uposathāgārasammutisiddhitoti no takkoti ācariyo. Uposathamukhanti uposathāgārassa mukhanti ācariyā. Uposathamukhassa nimittakittanā sīmāya vuttanayena kātabbā. Ekenāpi kittetuṃ vaṭṭatīti eke. ‘‘Pāsādo vā hotu, maṇḍapādīsu vā aññataro. Kammavācāya pana ‘uposathamukha’micceva vattabba’’nti vadanti. ‘‘Porāṇako āvāso nāma mūlāvāso’’ti likhitaṃ. Vadati ghaṭamattā iti hi lakkhaṇaṃ.
不分离界之开许解说显示巴利原文
Avippavāsasīmānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
143-4 “Manamhi vūḷho”是另一种读法,其意为“我被慢心所载”。除去村落与村落近郊,也就是除去称为内宅的村落及村落近郊。有些人认为:“‘村落’是指有围墙的村落,‘村落近郊’则指没有围墙的。”但这与注释书相违。因此,所谓“村落”,是依住宅、街道等而言;“村落近郊”,则是依适宜围栅的地方而言。然而,此处有多种读法。这又如何?应当仔细审察圣典与注释书,选择彼此相符之处来采纳。比丘们的前甘马语无效,是指在共住界已包含村落与村落近郊而被结出的情况下,于其上再作不离界决意时,这是合理的。但如果仅仅是纯林野被决意,那里为什么无效呢?难道“除去村落与村落近郊”这句话在此没有意义吗?回答:虽然如此,但因为会导致漏失宣告的过失,所以这句话是必须说的。正是依于此意趣,才可能说“前甘马语无效”。或者,从某种意义而言,两种甘马语是不能并存的。若因“他们彼此不成为对方羯磨中的满数者”而这样说,那么两个别住僧团是否也适用于这一法则呢?不适用,因为已允许接受和储存,也因为辱骂等缘没有差别,还因为仅期待羯磨的舍置。Tassā一词指比丘尼僧团。“不令甘马语成……”显示巴利原文
143-4. ‘‘Manamhi vūḷho’’ti vā pāṭho. Tattha manamhi vūḷhoti manaṃ vūḷho amhīti attho. Ṭhapetvā gāmañca gāmūpacārañcāti antaragharasaṅkhātaṃ gāmañca gāmūpacārañca ṭhapetvā. Keci ‘‘parikkhittaṃ gāmaṃ sandhāya ‘gāma’nti vuttaṃ, aparikkhittaṃ sandhāya ‘gāmūpacāra’’nti vadanti, taṃ pana aṭṭhakathāya virujjhati. Tasmā nivesanaracchādayo sandhāya gāmaṃ, parikkhepārahaṭṭhānāni sandhāya ‘‘gāmūpacāra’’nti ca vuttaṃ. Ettha pana anekadhā paṭhanti. Kiṃ tena, pāḷiñca aṭṭhakathañca suṭṭhu upaparikkhitvā yathā samenti, tathā gahetabbaṃ. Bhikkhūnaṃ purimakammavācā na vaṭṭatīti gāmagāmūpacāre antokatvā samānasaṃvāsakasīmāya sammatāya upari avippavāsasīmāsammutiyaṃ yujjati. Yattha pana kevalaṃ araññaṃyeva sammataṃ, tattha kathaṃ na vaṭṭatīti. Tattha ‘‘ṭhapetvā gāmañca gāmūpacārañcā’’ti vacanaṃ na sātthakanti ce? Vuccate – evametaṃ, kintu anussāvanahānippasaṅgato taṃ vacanaṃ vattabbamevāti imināva adhippāyena ‘‘purimakammavācā na vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ siyā. Ekasmiṃ vā atthe kammavācādvayaābhāvatoti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Na hi te aññamaññassa kamme gaṇapūrakā hontī’’ti vuttattā ubhinnaṃ nānāsaṃvāsakasaṅghānampi ayameva vidhi āpajjeyyāti ce? Nāpajjati paṭiggahasannidhīnaṃ anuññātattā, omasanādipaccayā avisesato, kammapaṭippassaddhimattāpekkhatāya ca. Tassāti bhikkhunisaṅghassa. Na kammavācaṃ vaggaṃ karontīti kammaṃ na kopentīti attho. Etthāti ṭhapetvā gāmanti ettha. ‘‘Yadi bhikkhūnaṃ avippavāsasīmā gāmañca gāmūpacārañca na otarati, atha kasmā gāme sīmābandhanakāle avippavāsaṃ sammannantīti ce? Āciṇṇakappena, na tato aññaṃ kañci atthaṃ apekkhitvā’’ti likhitaṃ. ‘‘Atthato hi sā bahiddhāpi abaddhā eva hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Antaragāme baddhā samānasaṃvāsasīmā yasmā gāmasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchati, tasmāti eke. Sopi sīmāsaṅkhyameva gacchatīti avippavāsasīmāsaṅkhyaṃ gacchatīti attho. Idaṃ panettha vicāretabbaṃ – gāmaṃ antokatvā baddhāya sīmāya puna avippavāsasammutiyaṃ araññapadese ṭhatvā avippavāsakammavācā kātabbā, udāhu gāme ṭhatvāti? Gāme ṭhatvā katāyapi kappiyabhūmiyā pharatīti. Bahisīme ṭhitasammatadosānulomattā akappiyabhūmiyaṃ ṭhatvā na kātabbāti no takko, esa nayo samūhananepīti ācariyo. Khaṇḍasīmāyaṃ ṭhatvā avippavāsasīmātiādīsu mahāsīmā kira ‘‘avippavāsasīmā’’ti vuttā.
146 “若尊者对此界之共住、同一布萨的舍置表示认可,请保持默然”——这一读法见于暗部本和某些锡兰本。有些写为“samugghāto etissā sīmāyā”在前,有些写为“etissā sīmāya samugghāto”。显示巴利原文
146. ‘‘Yassāyasmato khamati etissā sīmāya samānasaṃvāsāya ekūposathāya samugghāto, so tuṇhassā’’ti andhakapotthake, sīhaḷapotthakesu ca kesuci pāṭho atthi. Kesuci ‘‘samugghāto etissā sīmāyā’’ti paṭhamaṃ likhanti, kesuci ‘‘etissā sīmāya samugghāto’’ti ca.
村界等论注释显示巴利原文
Gāmasīmādikathāvaṇṇanā
147 所谓“Sā ca”,是指通过划分而赋予的村落界与另一种界。若问“是哪一种?”则说“自然村落”等。它们如同已结界,意思是:此界既是它,另一种也是它。正因如此,才以单数说“得三衣不离护”。有人认为这不合理,因为两者都是村落。另有人说:“它们是,得”应以复数表述。对于所说的“它及另一种”,有人解释:“中间划分而赋予的村落界与自然村落等是不分的。”“Bhikkhuvasatī”是读法,也写作“vasantī”。由于说“从其站立之处”,单数才合理。诸位比丘,一切河非界,这是在遮止哪种界?导师们说:遮止的是已结界,因为会落入十一种失坏界之一。若先已结界,后来才出现河等,则会有遮止的过失,因此只遮止未结界。正如一切村落是村落界,一切河非界。然而,导师又说:这是为了显示界的不同,即说各个比丘的水掷界为界,此非正理。而“从中等人周围水掷所及”一语,是为了显示在一条河中,四众等僧团各自别行四众应作等羯磨时的界限。导师们说:这也是为了显示三衣离与不离的界限,如同七肘间界界限的显示。因此,即使没有水掷界限,在河内行羯磨也是有效的,此义得以成立。显示巴利原文
147.Sācāti sā paricchinditvā dinnagāmasīmā ca itarā ca. Sā katamāti ce? ‘‘Pakatigāmā’’tiādimāha. Baddhasīmāsadisāyeva hontīti sā ca hoti itarā ca hotīti adhippāyo, tasmāyeva ‘‘ticīvaravippavāsaparihāraṃ labhatī’’ti ekavacanaṃ kataṃ, taṃ na yuttaṃ ubhinnampi gāmattāti eke. ‘‘Honti, na labhantī’’ti ca bahuvacanampi karontīti. ‘‘Sā ca itarā cā’’ti vuttā ‘‘majjhe bhinditvā dinnagāmasīmā pakatigāmādayo abhinnā’’ti ca vadanti. ‘‘Bhikkhuvasatī’’ti pāṭho, ‘‘vasantī’’ti ca likhitaṃ. ‘‘Athassa ṭhitokāsato’’ti vuttattā ekavacanameva yuttaṃ. Sabbā, bhikkhave, nadī asīmāti kataraṃ sīmaṃ paṭikkhipati? Baddhasīmaṃ, ekādasavipattisīmaññatarappasaṅgatoti ācariyā. Sace paṭhamaṃ sīmāya baddhāya pacchā nadiādayo honti, paṭikkhepoti pasaṅgo āpajjati, tasmā abaddhasīmameva paṭikkhipati. Yathā sabbo gāmo gāmasīmā, tathā sabbā nadī asīmā. Kintu tassa tassa bhikkhuno udakukkhepasīmāti sīmānānattaṃ dassetīti no takkoti ācariyo. Yaṃ majjhimassa purisassa samantā udakukkhepāti pana ekissā nadiyā catuvaggādīnaṃ saṅghānaṃ visuṃ catuvaggakaraṇīyādikammakaraṇakāle sīmāparicchedadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Ticīvarena vippavāsāvippavāsaparicchedadassanatthampi sattabbhantarasīmāya paricchedadassanaṃ viyāti ācariyā, tasmā udakukkhepaparicchedābhāvepi antonadiyaṃ kammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ.
然而,此处更有差别:若在船上来,则依船中所说之法;若在商队中来,则依商队中所说之法。若他安住超过四个月,则应依村落中所说之法了知三衣不离。其中亦有此差别:若商队全体位于水掷范围之内,有人说以水掷界为量;导师们则说以商队本身为量。再者,在此“若有众多比丘”等处,因欲表达有的行决意布萨、有的行众布萨、有的行僧布萨,故不说“众多僧团”而说“比丘们”。而在“不足则无效”处,伍巴提萨长老说是因为可能发生界混杂。因为在正在安置之时,不足者不应被安置。亦有说“不安置也是可以的”。至于“在行进中”处,则写为“在不超出水掷量而回转时,可以作”。至于“其他界的通知”等,是因害怕从界而来的羯磨失败而说,还是因害怕从众而来?因同一羯磨不可能在不同界中完成,故是从界而说。也有人认为,因同一羯磨不可能由位于不同界的僧团完成,故是从众而说。但此说非正理,因为会落入“漏失听闻”所说的过失。导师说:因为在一个界中,若不完成一个羯磨,即是漏失。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana viseso – tattha nāvāgato ce, nāvāyaṃ vuttanayena. Satthagato ce, satthe vuttanayena. So ce atirekacātumāsaniviṭṭho, gāme vuttanayena ticīvarāvippavāso veditabbo. Tatthāpi ayaṃ viseso – sace sattho udakukkhepassa anto hoti, udakukkhepasīmāpamāṇanti eke. Satthova pamāṇanti ācariyā. Sace panettha bahū bhikkhūtiādimhi keci adhiṭṭhānuposathaṃ, keci gaṇuposathaṃ, keci saṅghuposathanti vattukāmatāya ‘‘bahū saṅghā’’ti avatvā ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti vuttaṃ. Ūnakaṃ pana na vaṭṭatīti ettha sīmāsambhedasambhavatoti upatissatthero. Ṭhapente hi ūnakaṃ na ṭhapetabbaṃ. ‘‘Aṭhapetumpi vaṭṭati evā’’ti vuttaṃ. Gacchantiyā panāti ettha ‘‘udakukkhepamanatikkamitvā parivattamānāya kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti likhitaṃ. Aññissā sīmāya ñattītiādi kiṃ sīmato kammavipattibhayā vuttaṃ , udāhu parisatoti? Ekakammassa nānāsīmāya asambhavato sīmatoti. Ekakammassa nānāsīmaṭṭhasaṅghena asambhavato parisatotipi eke. ‘‘Savanaṃ hāpetī’’ti vuttadosappasaṅgatoti no takko. Ekissā hi sīmāya ekaṃ kammaṃ aniṭṭhapento hāpetīti ācariyo.
在“外岸所生之树,其枝伸入河中”以及“在河岸打桩”等语句中,又在“若桥或桥墩等立于外岸”等语句中,所谓“净界”,是指将村界内的伸手范围纳入。在片界中,可将树与片界分离而作。何以故?因系于岸上树的船,其依处为村。“触及两岸村界而立的桥,可与触及片界及大界而立的树相比拟”,亦有如此记载。其中,首先应如此审察:在如是处所行之作法,是算作在河中所作,还是算作在村界中所作,抑或算作两处?若算作在河中所作,则只应净水掷界,不应净另一界。若算作在村界中所作,则不应净水掷界。若算作两处所作,则会导致“于二界中可作同一业”这一非所欲之过。由此,是否亦会导致“于另一界作动议,于另一界作随说”以及“以片界大界处之身和合而作业”等非所欲之过?于此答言:如所说之业,可算作两处所作,但不会导致如前所述之非所欲过。何以故?诸师言:“因动议与随说各各于每一界中生起,或诸作务比丘各各立于每一界中故。”然而,仅凭能于两处皆站立故,此非正因。真正的因在于:此业是在处于合一状态之界处所作,此为不变之因。盖于合一状态之二河中村界,可以作业故。若于七家内界中有河、海……显示巴利原文
Bahinaditīre jātarukkhassa antonadiyaṃ paviṭṭhasākhāya vāti ettha ca naditīre khāṇukaṃ koṭṭetvāti ettha ca sace pana setu vā setupādā vā bahitīre patiṭṭhitāti ettha ca sīmāsodhanaṃ nāma gāmasīmaṭṭhe hatthapāsānayanaṃ. Khaṇḍasīmāya uṭṭhitarukkhato viyojetvā kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Kasmā? Tīraṭṭhe rukkhe baddhanāvāya gāmo ādhāroti. ‘‘Ubhatobhāgena gāmasīmaṃ phusitvā ṭhitasetu khaṇḍasīmāmahāsīmāyo phusitvā ṭhitarukkhena upametabbo’’ti ca likhitaṃ. Tattha purimanaye tāva idaṃ vicāretabbaṃ – tādise ṭhāne katakammaṃ kiṃ nadiyaṃ katasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati, udāhu gāmasīmāyaṃ, atha ubhayatthāti? Kiñcettha taṃ ce nadiyaṃ katasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati, udakukkhepasīmāva sodhetabbā, na itarā. Atha gāmasīmāyaṃ katasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati, udakukkhepasīmā na sodhetabbā. Yadi ubhayattha katasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati, dvīsu sīmāsu ekakammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti aniṭṭhappasaṅgo āpajjati. Tato ‘‘aññissā sīmāya ñatti, aññissā anussāvanā hotī’’ti idañca ‘‘khaṇḍasīmāmahāsīmaṭṭhānaṃ kāyasāmaggiyā kammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti idañcāniṭṭhaṃ āpajjatīti? Ettha vuccate – yathāvuttaṃ kammaṃ ubhayattha katasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati, na ca yathāvuttaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ āpajjati. Kasmā? ‘‘Ñattianussāvanānaṃ ekekasīmāyaṃ pavattattā, kārakabhikkhūnaṃ vā ekekasīmāyaṃ ṭhitattā’’ti vadanti. Ubhayatthāpi ṭhātuṃ sakkuṇeyyatāya pana taṃ akāraṇaṃ. Ekībhāvaṃ upagatasīmaṭṭhāne katattāti idaṃ acalakāraṇaṃ. Ekībhāvaṃ upagatāsu hi dvīsu nadīgāmasīmāsu kammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti ca. Sattabbhantarasīmāyaṃ ce nadī hoti, samuddo vā, jātassaro vā. Tesu ṭhitabhikkhu sattabbhantarasīmāyaṃ ṭhitasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchati. Tattha ce nadiādilakkhaṇaṃ appatto dīpako, pāsāṇo, rukkho vā hoti, sattabbhantarasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Manussehi vaḷañjanaṭṭhānaṃ ce taṃ hoti, gāmakhettasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Kataragāmakhettaṃ? Yato manussā sañcaranti, sabbe ce sañcaranti, visuṃ gāmakhettasaṅkhyaṃ gacchatīti ca ācariyā.
于后一种情况,若桥未触及河相而立,则计入村界。若该处仅有一村,便净化该村;若两岸各有二村,则应净化二村后作羯磨。如此行羯磨,即于两处皆已成办。依此道理,于二河及自然池沼中,一次羯磨的成就,应如此了知。此理于小界及大界亦适用。若桥触及河相而立,则水掷界也应净化。显示巴利原文
Pacchimanaye sace setu nadīlakkhaṇaṭṭhānaṃ aphusitvā ṭhito, gāmasīmāsaṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Tattha eko ce gāmo, taṃ sodhetvā, dvīsu tīresu sace dve, dvepi gāme sodhetvā kammaṃ kātabbaṃ. Evañhi kataṃ ubhayatra kataṃ hoti. Iminā nayena dvīsu nadīsu, jātassaresu ca ekakammapasiddhi veditabbā. Ayaṃ pana nayo khaṇḍasīmāmahāsīmānampi labbhateva. Sace setu nadīlakkhaṇaṭṭhānaṃ phusitvā ṭhito, udakukkhepasīmāpi sodhetabbā.
唯依界之同一性,虚空住者离去后;
了知一次羯磨已,依界而指示此。
一界、二界,乃至三界、四界;
若彼唯有单一羯磨,众中可生忿怒。
显示巴利原文 Sīmānameva cekattaṃ, vehāsaṭṭhaṃ vinā gato; Viditvā ekakammassa, sīmato idamādise. Ekasīmaṃ dvisīmaṃ vā, tisīmaṃ catusīmakaṃ; Ekakammaṃ siyā tassa, kopo parisato siyāti.
然而,此处有差别:若在河中作羯磨,水掷界外的树等关联者为无定量。若在村中作羯磨,河中的关联树,以及立于水掷界外的比丘为无定量,从此以内则为定量。在已结界中,关联树以及立于已结界内的比丘为定量,应知。因此说‘应清净界而作羯磨’。又‘若桥或桥墩等立于外岸则不可作羯磨’之说,如同对彼岸等,唯应作全界之净,此当审察。于‘于大雨时’等句中,此处所谓大雨,应知如四月雨。因此,若四月唯降大雨,则一切被洪流淹没之处即成河。若一次大雨之洪流持续四月,或不断流动,则立于外岸而被洪流淹没之处,一切皆为河。从淹没而流之处开始,无论彼河、他河,或先前无河之处,依自身流动而成河相,从淹没而流之处开始即可。所言‘淹没村邑界’,是就四月持续而说。有记载:‘于不可行之道,即当日不能往返者。’然于《暗部注》中所说者,不应采纳。何以故?于河亦有此过故。于‘葫芦等’句中,此处‘等’字亦包含莲花、青莲等。这一切为未生池,唯算入村界。其义为:若由他们所造,则算入村界;或若由周围岸上诸村所造,则算入一切村;或若是与他村田无关之处,则算入别别村界。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha viseso – nadiyaṃ karontānaṃ udakukkhepato bahi rukkhādisambandho appamāṇaṃ. Gāme karontānaṃ nadiyaṃ sambandharukkhassa udakukkhepato bahi ṭhitabhikkhu appamāṇaṃ, tato oraṃ pamāṇaṃ. Baddhasīmāya sambandharukkhassa baddhasīmāya ṭhitabhikkhu pamāṇanti veditabbaṃ, teneva vuttaṃ ‘‘sīmaṃ sodhetvā kammaṃ kātabba’’nti. ‘‘Sace pana setu vā setupādā vā bahitīre patiṭṭhitā kammaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti vacanampi pārohādīsu viya sakalasīmāsodhanameva kātabbanti sādheti, vīmaṃsitabbaṃ. Ativuṭṭhikāle panāti ettha ativuṭṭhi nāma yathā cātumāsikāyāti veditabbā, tasmā catumāsaṃ ativuṭṭhiyeva sace hoti, sabbopi oghena otthaṭokāso nadī eva. Atha ekissāpi ativuṭṭhiyā ogho catumāsaṃ tiṭṭhati, sandati vā, bahitīre patiṭṭhitaoghena otthaṭokāso sabbopi nadī eva. Nadiṃ ottharitvā sandanaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāyāti tameva vā nadiṃ aññaṃ vā apubbaṃ vā padesaṃ attano pavattavasena nadilakkhaṇappattaṃ ottharitvā sandanaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya vaṭṭati. Gāmanigamasīmaṃ ottharitvāti catumāsappavattiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Agamanapatheti tadahu gatapaccāgataṃ kātuṃ asakkuṇeyyake’’ti likhitaṃ. Yaṃ pana andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Kasmā? Nadiyampi taṃdosappasaṅgato. Tipusakādīti ettha ādi-saddena kamaluppalādīnipi saṅgahaṃ gacchanti . Sabbopi ajātassaro hoti, gāmasīmāsaṅkhyameva gacchatīti yehi kataṃ, tesaṃ gāmasīmāsaṅkhyaṃ vā, samantato tīraṭṭhagāmehi ce kataṃ, sabbagāmasaṅkhyaṃ vā, aññehi gāmakhettehi asambandhaṭṭhānaṃ ce, visuṃgāmasīmāsaṅkhyaṃ vā gacchatīti attho.
148 “枝蔓交错”(Saṃsaṭṭhaviṭapā)是表示相近,由此说明此处的界相重叠,故称“重叠(sambheda)”。然而,当此界扩展时,会造成界相混杂。由于将已结界的位置包含在内,所以应称为“部分重叠之界(ekadesabaddhasīmā)”,这就产生了混杂的过失。“诸比丘,不应以界重叠界”——有人赞同这样的用意:“对于先结的界,后结的界不应与之重叠。”由于在先结的如法界中并无重叠,这个用意才符合“覆盖(ajjhottharaṇa)”的意思,因此后结的界不能重叠先结的界。假如不在先结之界的中间先留出界中间区(sīmantarika),而将界相全部或部分包含在内来结界,这才称为“重叠”;将他人所结之界的全部或部分界相包含在内,这才称为“覆盖”。所以,世尊说“结界者应留出界中间空隙”等。意思是:以先结之界的中间空隙作为后结之界的界相,然后再结界。这两种失败情况在比丘界与比丘尼界之间不会互相发生。而所谓“它扩展时会造成界相混杂”,此处仅是造成界相混杂而已,有些人说“于此所作羯磨无效”,那并不合理。显示巴利原文
148.Saṃsaṭṭhaviṭapāti iminā āsannattaṃ dīpeti, tena padesasambhindanā idha sambhedoti dīpeti. So pana vaḍḍhanto sīmāsaṅkaraṃ karotīti baddhasīmaṭṭhānappavesanavasena ‘‘ekadesabaddhasīmā’’ti vattabbato saṅkaradoso hoti. Na, bhikkhave, sīmāya sīmā sambhinditabbāti ettha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ baddhasīmāya pacchā attanā bandhitabbasīmā na sambhinditabbā’’ti eke adhippāyaṃ saṃvaṇṇayanti. Paṭhamaṃ sammatasīmāyaṃ sambhedābhāvato svādhippāyo ajjhottharaṇena yujjati, tasmā pacchā bandhitabbasīmāya paṭhamaṃ baddhasīmā na sambhinditabbā. Sakalaṃ vā ekadesato vā nimittānaṃ antokaraṇena paṭhamaṃ baddhasīmāya sīmantarike akittetvā sammannanato hi sambhindati nāma, paresaṃ baddhasīmaṃ sakalaṃ vā ekadesato vā nimittānaṃ antokaraṇena ajjhottharati nāma, tenevāha ‘‘sīmaṃ sammannantena sīmantarikaṃ ṭhapetvā’’tiādi. Tassattho – paṭhamaṃ baddhasīmāya sīmantarikaṃ pacchā bandhitabbasīmāya nimittabhūtaṃ ṭhapetvā pacchā sīmaṃ sammannitunti. Imā dvepi vipattiyo bhikkhubhikkhunīsīmānaṃ aññamaññaṃ na sambhavanti. So pana vaḍḍhanto sīmāsaṅkaraṃ karotīti ettha kevalaṃ sīmāsaṅkarameva karoti. Tasmiṃ katakammāni na kuppantīti keci, taṃ nayuttaṃ sākhāpārohachedanasīmāsodhanānaṃ vuttattā. Idaṃ sabbaṃ suṭṭhu vicāretvā garukule payirupāsitvā gahetabbayuttakaṃ gahetabbaṃ, itaraṃ chaḍḍetabbaṃ.
布萨破散等事的注释显示巴利原文
Uposathabhedādikathāvaṇṇanā
149 “诸比丘,有此二种布萨”——这是因当时尚未开许和合布萨而说的。对于和合布萨的前行,应说“今日是和合布萨”,但世尊并未显示以甘马语来执行,诸论师依据巴利语所示的次第展示了应当念诵的次第。同样,五种巴帝摩卡念诵的次第也应知如此成立。三人或两人念诵巴帝摩卡,则名为“非法和合”——此处僧团虽有和合之名,但因有诤论,根据其行为则定为不和合。如此,以与不和合相对,故名为和合;以与和合相对,故名为不和合。或者,由别众羯磨等而发生,以及其和合与不和合状态的发生,故作此说,应知。“非法不和合”——此处令清净为如法,唯随僧团之意欲,非随别众,故名为不和合。他们说:“做一次便是善作,但犯恶作,不得再做。”他们说:“五人中取一人之欲后,四人可念诵巴帝摩卡”,此说合理,因为持欲比丘到达时,僧团即能运作,故言欲已达僧团而作此说。显示巴利原文
149. ‘‘Dveme , bhikkhave, uposathā’’ti tadā sāmaggīuposathassa ananuññātattā vuttaṃ. Sāmaggīuposathassa pubbakicce ‘‘ajjuposatho sāmaggī’’ti vattabbaṃ, na ca kammavācāya bhagavatā payogo dassito, pāḷinayato aṭṭhakathācariyehi uddisitabbakkamo dassito. Tathā pañcannaṃ pātimokkhuddesānaṃ uddesakkamo siddhoti veditabbaṃ. Tayo vā dve vā pātimokkhaṃ uddisanti, adhammena samaggaṃ nāma hotīti ettha kāmaṃ saṅghassa sāmaggī nāma hoti vaggakathāya yathākammaṃ sāmaggīvavatthānato. Tathāpi vaggapaṭipakkhabhāvena samaggaṃ, samaggapaṭipakkhabhāvena ca vaggaṃ nāma kataṃ. Āveṇikato vā gaṇakammādisambhavato, tassa ca samaggavaggabhāvasambhavato vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Dhammena vagganti ettha pārisuddhikaraṇaṃ dhammikaṃ, saṅghasseva chandāgamanaṃ, na gaṇassāti katvā vaggaṃ nāma hoti. ‘‘Ekavāraṃ kataṃ sukataṃ, āpattiṃ pana āpajjati, puna kātuṃ na labhantī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Pañcasu ekassa chandaṃ āharitvā catūhi pātimokkhaṃ uddisituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ yuttaṃ, chandahārake bhikkhūnaṃ santikaṃ patte tena saṅgho pahoti, tasmā chando saṅghappatto hotīti katvā vuttaṃ.
巴帝摩卡念诵事的注释显示巴利原文
Pātimokkhuddesakathāvaṇṇanā
150 在《母论注》(疑网注·因缘解释)中,由于说:「『诸尊者,请僧听我……乃至……若已发露则得安乐,诸尊者,我于此问……乃至……是故默然。我如是受持』,说了此话后,以『诸尊者,因缘已念诵』等其余已听已宣告之法而完成念诵」,因此在「『我如是受持』,然诸尊者已听」此处,说了「我受持」后,「诸尊者,因缘已念诵」之语应视为略说,以此略语之故而书写。同样,在《母论注》中「若已发露则得安乐,诸尊者,于此」此处,有些人也认为「诸尊者,因缘已念诵」之语应视为略说。有些人说:「说了『应于无诤中学习』时,因缘念诵即已完毕,因此不发露者即犯恶作」,此说不合理。为何?因为以「念诵因缘后」之结束语,即说明了因缘的完毕,并在因缘结束时说明了恶作。书写为:「所谓Sarabhañña,即以箭宣说」。决意诵习,即生起「我当诵习」之心。他们说:「仅说『我禀白』即可宣说」,这适用于默然之时。他们说:「若被利养等所压制而阻止,则不可作为标准」。说明此同一道理:若中断,应再次禀白。显示巴利原文
150.Mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā) ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho…pe… āvikatā hissa phāsu hoti, tatthāyasmante pucchāmi…pe… tasmā tuṇhī. Evametaṃ dhārayāmī’ti vatvā ‘uddiṭṭhaṃ kho āyasmanto nidāna’ntiādinā nayena avasese sutena sāvite uddiṭṭho hotī’’ti vuttattā ‘‘evametaṃ dhārayāmīti sutā kho panāyasmantehī’’ti ettha ‘‘dhārayāmī’’ti vatvā ‘‘uddiṭṭhaṃ kho āyasmanto nidāna’’nti vacanaṃ saṃkhittanti gahetabbaṃ, teneva khuddakapeyyālavasena likhitaṃ. Evaṃ mātikāṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘āvikatā hissa phāsu hoti, tatthāyasmante’’ti etthāpi ‘‘uddiṭṭhaṃ kho āyasmanto nidāna’’nti vacanaṃ saṃkhittanti gahetabbanti eke. Keci ‘‘avivadamānehi sikkhitabba’nti vutte nidānuddeso niṭṭhito nāma hoti, tasmā anāvikaronto āpattiṃ āpajjatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ na yuttaṃ. Kasmā? ‘‘Nidānaṃ uddisitvā’’ti niṭṭhānavacanena hi nidānassa niṭṭhitabhāvo vutto, nidānāvasāne ca āpatti vuttāti. ‘‘Sarabhaññaṃ nāma sarena bhaṇana’’nti likhitaṃ. Sajjhāyaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvāti ‘‘sajjhāyaṃ karomī’’ti cittaṃ uppādetvā. ‘‘Āpucchāmīti vuttamattena kathetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Taṃ tuṇhībhāve yujjati. ‘‘Athāpi lābhādinā abhibhūto vāreti, taṃ na pamāṇa’’nti vadanti. Eseva nayoti kathento yadi vicchindati, puna āpucchitabbanti.
非法羯磨收回等事的注释显示巴利原文
Adhammakammapaṭikkosanādikathāvaṇṇanā
154 “为了不给他们带来损害”——僧团不对僧团作羯磨,此外也会给许多人带来其他损害,因此这样说。显示巴利原文
154.‘‘Tesaṃanupaddavatthāyā’’ti saṅgho saṅghassa kammaṃ na karoti, aññopi upaddavo bahūnaṃ hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ.
巴帝摩卡念诵者邀请等事的注释显示巴利原文
Pātimokkhuddesakaajjhesanādikathāvaṇṇanā
155 先说“以长老为上首的巴帝摩卡”,后又无简别地说“其中若有聪明能干者,即应交付于他”,由此可知“尊者”之称亦适用于长老,此义得成。又因有“贤友,我们以略说或广说的方式去吧”这样的语句,故即使无有障碍,也以体力为衡量标准,此义得成。显示巴利原文
155. ‘‘Therādhikaṃ pātimokkha’’nti vatvāpi pacchā avisesena ‘‘yo tattha byatto paṭibalo, tassādheyya’’nti vuttattā ‘‘bhante’’ti vacanaṃ therassāpi atthīti siddhaṃ hoti. ‘‘Gacchāvuso saṃkhittena vā vitthārena vā’’ti vacanato asatipi antarāye thāmaṃ pamāṇanti siddhaṃ hoti.
远行等事缘的解说显示巴利原文
Disaṃgamikādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
163 “若他有共住比丘侍者”是经文。“雨季”即指一年中的冬季和夏季,这是注释所写。显示巴利原文
163. ‘‘Sacassa saddhiṃcarā bhikkhuupaṭṭhākā atthī’’ti pāṭho. ‘‘Utuvasseti utusaṃvacchare hemantagimhesū’’ti likhitaṃ.
清净布萨的解说显示巴利原文
Pārisuddhidānakathāvaṇṇanā
164 “我给予清净”——论师写道:“有罪比丘向长老们说‘我给予’,可能构成故意妄语的恶作。”这是什么原因呢?因为故意妄语的恶作罪唯是世尊所说,故属非作业生起。然而在“我给予清净”这句话中,明显是作业,因此其是否如同故意妄语中的波逸提,应当仔细审察。那些论师正是诸长老,他们解释说:其中,“我给予”是就自己布萨羯磨成就之因而言。“取”与“告知”是为了免除取者未告知的恶作而说。同样的道理也适用于同意布萨。其中,“我给予”是表明自己心意和合的话语,其余如前所述,优波帝沙长老如此解释。或者,第一句是就先前和合的状态而言,第二句是就后来应作的状态而言,第三句是为了免除持同意者的恶作而说。在两种情况下,由于有“到达僧团后离去”等说法,同意和清净的给予只有在僧团和合时才有效,不和合时则无效,这便得以成立。由于有“到达僧团后被举罪者承认,清净已送达”等说法,被举罪者等的同意和清净给予也是有效的,这得以成立,但那仅仅是在认为对方是清净比丘的想之下才成立,否则不然,这是推论。知道对方并非比丘而给予沙弥,则无效且有罪;不知道而给予,则有效且无罪。显示巴利原文
164.Pārisuddhiṃ dammīti ‘‘sāpattiko therānaṃ deti, sampajānamusāvāde dukkaṭaṃ sambhavatī’’ti ācariyena likhitaṃ. Kiṃ nu kho kāraṇaṃ? Sampajānamusāvādena dukkaṭāpatti nāma kevalaṃ bhagavatā vuttattā akiriyasamuṭṭhānā hotīti. ‘‘Pārisuddhiṃ dammī’’ti ettha pana kiriyā paññāyati, tasmā sampajānamusāvāde pācittiyaṃ viya dissati, suṭṭhu upaparikkhitabbaṃ. Mahantā hi te ācariyā nāma. Tattha ‘‘dammī’’ti attano uposathakammanibbattinimittaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Harā’’ti ca ‘‘ārocehī’’ti ca hārakassa anārocanapaccayā dukkaṭamocanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Eseva nayo chandadānepi. Tattha ‘‘dammī’’ti attano cittasāmaggidīpanavacanaṃ, sesaṃ vuttanayameva, evaṃ upatissatthero vaṇṇeti. Atha vā paṭhamaṃ samaggabhāvaṃ sandhāya, dutiyaṃ pacchā vidhātabbabhāvaṃ, tatiyaṃ chandahārakassa dukkaṭamocanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Ubhayatthāpi ‘‘saṅghappatto pakkamatī’’tiādivacanato saṅghe samagge eva chandapārisuddhidānaṃ ruhati, nāsamaggeti siddhaṃ. ‘‘Saṅghappatto ukkhittako paṭijānāti, āhaṭā hoti pārisuddhī’’tiādivacanato ukkhittakādīnampi chandapārisuddhidānaṃ ruhatīti siddhaṃ, tañca kho pakatattasaññāya, no aññathāti takko. Jānitvā sāmaṇerassa dinne na yāti, āpatti ca, ajānitvā dinne yāti ca, anāpattīti eke. Biḷālasaṅkhalikā nāma pārisuddhīti ettha saṅkhalikā nāma anantarena sambajjhati, aññena ca saṅkhalikenāti kevalaṃ saṅkhalikā pārisuddhi nāma hotīti upatissatthero. Evaṃ sante visesanaṃ niratthakaṃ hoti. Biḷālasaṅkhalikā baddhāva hoti antogehe eva sampayojanattā. Yathā sā na katthaci gacchati, tathā sāpi na katthaci gacchatīti kira adhippāyo.
同意布萨等论的解说显示巴利原文
Chandadānādikathāvaṇṇanā
165-7 他们说:“给予同意后,前往破界、界中间或界外又回来的比丘,不会破坏羯磨,因此,对于将行的比丘们,取了他们的同意后,结立破界,然后再结立住园界时,就不再取他们的同意。”由于有“请暂时到一边去”等文句,任何比丘的羯磨,若有居士等处于伸手可及的范围内,便不成立,由此得以确立。“在界外”即外界。对于他,没有授予职责的必要,意思是即使有他在场,也无妨碍。这是指座位连同水。“十五日也”中的“也”字包含了十四日,因此《大注》中说:“如果此不可行”。而“今日我布萨是十五日”这样的决意,常时并无作用,也不会改变什么,这是一些人的观点。显示巴利原文
165-7. ‘‘Chandaṃ datvā khaṇḍasīmaṃ vā sīmantarikaṃ vā bahisīmaṃ vā gantvā āgato bhikkhu kammaṃ na kopeti, tasmā gamikabhikkhūnaṃ chandaṃ gaṇhitvā khaṇḍasīmaṃ bandhitvā puna vihārasīmaṃ bandhituṃ tesaṃ chandaṃ na gaṇhantī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Muhuttaṃ ekamantaṃ hothā’’tiādivacanato yaṃ kiñci bhikkhukammaṃ gahaṭṭhādīsu hatthapāsagatesu na vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ. Nissīmanti bahisīmaṃ. Tassa sammutidānakiccaṃ natthīti tasmiṃ satipi vaṭṭatīti attho. Āsanena saha udakanti attho. Pannarasopīti api-saddo cātuddasiṃ sampiṇḍeti, tena vuttaṃ mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘yadi no eta’’nti. ‘‘Ajja me uposatho pannaraso’’ti adhiṭṭhānaṃ sadā na kiñci, na aññathāti eke.
出罪仪轨等论的解说显示巴利原文
Āpattipaṭikammavidhikathādivaṇṇanā
169-170 “我忏悔”——有些人说,用任何一种语言说出时,忏悔与接受都成立,因为这是以可见的行为而说清净。有疑比丘应说:“尊者,我对某一偷兰遮罪有疑,当我无疑时,我将忏悔该罪。”这样做了之后,在他无疑之前,不能接受同分罪,而对于其他羯磨,他名为清净。之后,当无疑时,应忏悔。虽然经与注疏中并无“不”字,但即使忏悔了也没有过失。同样,“我从这里起来后将忏悔该罪”一语,是在全体僧团犯了同分罪,以及有疑的情况下适用。因此写道:“全体僧团犯了同分罪后,当见到清净时,将在其面前忏悔该罪,这样说后,可以进行布萨。”显示巴利原文
169-170.Paṭidesemīti yāya kāyaci bhāsāya vutte desanā ca paṭiggaho ca hotiyeva diṭṭhāvikammena visuddhiyā vuttattāti keci. Vematikena ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, ekissā thullaccayāpattiyā vematiko, yadā nibbematiko bhavissāmi, tadā taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikarissāmī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Evaṃ kate yāva nibbematiko na hoti, tāva sabhāgāpattiṃ paṭiggahetuṃ na labhati, aññesañca kammānaṃ parisuddho nāma hoti. Puna nibbematiko hutvā desetabbaṃ. Na cāti neva pāḷiyaṃ na aṭṭhakathāyaṃ atthi, desite pana doso natthīti. Tathā itovuṭṭhahitvā taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikarissāmīti ettha ca sakalasaṅghe sabhāgāpattiṃ āpanne, vematike ca. Tathā ca ‘‘sabbo saṅgho sabhāgāpattiṃ āpajjitvā yadā suddhaṃ passissatī’’ti, ‘‘tadā tassa santike taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikarissatī’ti vatvā ‘uposathaṃ kātuṃ labhatī’’ti ca likhitaṃ.
无犯十五等论的解说显示巴利原文
Anāpattipannarasakādikathāvaṇṇanā
172-3 “Atthaññe”是前分句的读法,“Athaññe”是后分句的读法。他们看见那些进入或正在进入界内的人。然而,持法想者却是出于无知而如此。“Vematikapannarasakaṃ uttānameva”是读法。显示巴利原文
172-3. ‘‘Atthaññe’’ti pubbavāre, ‘‘athaññe’’ti pacchāvāre pāṭho. Sīmaṃ okkante vā okkamante vā passanti. Dhammasaññino pana aññāṇena honti. ‘‘Vematikapannarasakaṃ uttānamevā’’ti pāṭho.
入界者省略说之解释显示巴利原文
Sīmokkantikapeyyālakathāvaṇṇanā
178 从“不应非自愿地给予”这一语句,可成立:当有意愿时,应当给予。显示巴利原文
178. ‘‘Na akāmā dātabbā’’tivacanato icchāya sati dātabbāti siddhaṃ.
见相等事说之解释显示巴利原文
Liṅgādidassanakathāvaṇṇanā
180 “不超越”在此处:据说,他们是执不同见而别住者。因为对于执不同羯磨而别住者,应令其舍弃邪见后,为其作接纳羯磨。如此行已,与他一同行布萨方为适当。另一种说法是:仅凭舍弃邪见即可。知道因不见罪、不忏罪而被举者,以及因不舍邪见而被举者后,若与他共作,则犯波逸提。因此,应知这些人是随顺被举者——某些人如此说。显示巴利原文
180.Nābhivitarantīti ettha laddhinānāsaṃvāsakā kira te. Kammanānāsaṃvāsakañhi diṭṭhiṃ paṭinissajjāpetvā tassa osāraṇakammaṃ kātabbaṃ. Evañhi kate tena saddhiṃ uposathaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Itarena laddhinissajjanamattena kātunti vuttaṃ. Āpattiyā adassane appaṭikamme ukkhittakañca diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge ukkhittakañca jānitvā tena saddhiṃ karontassa pācittiyaṃ, tasmā ime ukkhittānuvattakāti veditabbāti eke.
不应去与应去之章说之解释显示巴利原文
Nagantabbagantabbavārakathāvaṇṇanā
181 “不应去”是就什么而言?由于“除了僧团”这一说法,在某一寺院中,若有众多比丘居住,他们全都因为某种事务,分成十人一组,各自分别站在不同的水界等界场内,可以行布萨。对于新造作堂等不同界场内的范围,为了布萨决意的目的,即使是界场,即使是河流,也不应前往。由于舍弃了重的巴帝摩卡诵后,不应作轻的,因此“除了僧团”这一说法得以成立。其中,由“在哪个住处有布萨执行者……乃至……不作不应去”这一说法,可成立:即使已舍弃布萨,也可以前往住处。有述及:“从那里,为了行清净布萨的目的,已舍弃布萨者可以去,或者进入缺界——其他派别如此说。”由此,这根本不是布萨的障碍,故书写为“自己的布萨障碍”。显示巴利原文
181.Na gantabboti kiṃ sandhāya? ‘‘Aññatra saṅghenā’’ti vacanato yasmiṃ vihāre sataṃ bhikkhū viharanti, te sabbe kenacideva karaṇīyena dasa dasa hutvā visuṃ visuṃ nānāudakukkhepasīmādīsu ṭhatvā uposathaṃ kātuṃ labhanti. Navakammasālādikā nānāsīmākoṭi uposathādhiṭṭhānatthaṃ sīmāpi nadīpi na gantabbā. Garukaṃ pātimokkhuddesaṃ vissajjitvā lahukassa akattabbattā ‘‘aññatra saṅghenā’’ti vacanaṃ sādheti. Tattha ‘‘yasmiṃ āvāse uposathakārakā …pe… akatvā na gantabbo’’ti vacanato vissaṭṭhauposathāpi āvāsā gantuṃ vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ. ‘‘Tato pārisuddhiuposathakaraṇatthaṃ vissaṭṭhauposathā gantuṃ vaṭṭati, khaṇḍasīmaṃ vā pavisitunti apare vadantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Iminā neva uposathantarāyoti ‘‘attano uposathantarāyo’’ti likhitaṃ.
应避之人示现说之解释显示巴利原文
Vajjanīyapuggalasandassanakathāvaṇṇanā
183 对于犯究竟事者,心生“由于在座众中有斗诤等怖畏,我将不行布萨”后,可以坐下。在其他羯磨中,对于他在座的大众,无罪——某些人如此说。由“诸比丘,不应在非布萨日行布萨,除了僧团和合时”这一说法,和合日即非布萨日,这似乎是从义理上说的。这是依“诸比丘,有此二布萨”所说的语句而说,否则会与《附随》巴利相违——诸师说。若在十四日或十五日僧团和合,为了显示不应说“今日布萨和合”,而应以通常方式行,因此作了如上述的教示——我们不这样推论。否则,若在所说的两种日子和合,在那里不行布萨,却在非布萨日行和合布萨,这就会产生过失。否则,由于先前已禁止,现在没有禁止的必要。因为先前已说“诸比丘,不应每天诵巴帝摩卡”。或者,由于先前已说“诸比丘,我允许在布萨日诵巴帝摩卡”,以及后来已说“每半月一次,十四日或十五日”和“诸比丘,有此二布萨”,因此在其他日子不应行布萨——这从义理上会导致不期望的结论。应知:为了显示当有僧团和合时,其他日子依通常方式虽非布萨日,却也名为布萨日,而作了如此教示以遮止。显示巴利原文
183. ‘‘Antimavatthuṃ ajjhāpannassa nisinnaparisāya kalahādibhayena nāhaṃ karissāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppādetvā nisīdituṃ vaṭṭati. Aññakamme tassa nisinnaparisāya āpatti natthīti eke. ‘‘Na ca, bhikkhave, anuposathe uposatho kātabbo aññatra saṅghasāmaggiyā’’ti (mahāva. 183) vacanato sāmaggīdivaso anuposathadivasoti atthato vuttaṃ viya dissati. ‘‘Dveme, bhikkhave, uposathā’’ti vuttavacanavasenetaṃ vuttaṃ, aññathā parivārapāḷiyā virujjhatīti ācariyā. Cātuddasiyaṃ, pannarasiyaṃ vā ce saṅgho samaggo hoti, ‘‘ajjuposatho sāmaggī’’ti avatvā pakatinīhāreneva kattabbanti dassanatthaṃ yathādesanā katāti no takko. Aññathā yathāvuttadvaye ce sāmaggī hoti, tattha uposathaṃ akatvā anuposathadivase eva sāmaggīuposatho kātabboti āpajjati. Aññathā pubbe paṭisiddhattā idāni paṭisedhanakiccaṃ natthi. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, devasikaṃ pātimokkhaṃ uddisitabba’’nti (mahāva. 136) pubbe hi vuttaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, uposathe pātimokkhaṃ uddisitu’’nti pubbe vuttattā ‘‘sakiṃ pakkhassa cātuddase vā pannarase vā’’ti ca ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, uposathā’’ti (mahāva. 149) ca pacchā vuttattā tato aññasmiṃ divase uposatho na kātabboti atthato āpannaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ, sati saṅghasāmaggiyā añño divaso pakativasena anuposathopi uposathadivaso nāma hotīti dassanavasena nivāretumpi evaṃdesanā katāti veditabbā.
3. 入雨安居犍度解释显示巴利原文
3. Vassūpanāyikakkhandhakavaṇṇanā
允许入雨安居说之解释显示巴利原文
Vassūpanāyikānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
184 在大注疏中也有“saṅkāsayissanti”的读法,据说洲住民读作“saṅkāpayissanti”。当思惟“究竟有多少种入雨安居”时,若问“以何为相”,则世尊所说“诸比丘,我允许入雨安居”的入雨安居,应说“我于此三个月中入雨安居”而入。雨季的月份有四个月。其中,前三个月和后三个月,有两种三个月。因此,那些比丘生起了这样的思惟。显示巴利原文
184.Mahāaṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘saṅkāsayissantī’’ti pāṭho, dīpavāsino ‘‘saṅkāpayissantī’’ti paṭhanti kira. ‘‘Kati nu kho vassūpanāyikā’’ti cintāyaṃ ‘‘kiṃ nimitta’’nti vutte ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vassaṃ upagantu’’nti yaṃ vassūpagamanaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ ‘‘imaṃ temāsaṃ vassaṃ upemī’’ti vatvā upagantabbaṃ. Vassānamāsā ca cattāro. Tattha paṭhamaṃ temāsaṃ, pacchimaṃ temāsanti duvidhaṃ temāsaṃ. Tenāyaṃ tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ cintā ahosi.
拒绝雨安居后出行等说之解释显示巴利原文
Vassānecārikāpaṭikkhepādikathāvaṇṇanā
185 应知:由于无所顾念地离去,或在别处令黎明升起,而有罪。在此,首先,他在自恣日尚未到来时,因有应作之事而离去。依“诸比丘,那位比丘或许回到那个住处,或许不回,诸比丘,那位比丘的前安居被了知,且于承诺无罪”之说,可知这是就不到七日而说。同样地,依“他于当天无应作之事而离去,或有应作之事而离去,诸比丘,那位比丘的前安居不被了知,且于承诺有恶作罪”之说。显示巴利原文
185.Anapekkhagamanena vā aññattha aruṇaṃ uṭṭhāpanena vā āpatti veditabbāti ettha paṭhamaṃ tāva so sattāhaṃ anāgatāya pavāraṇāya sakaraṇīyo pakkamati. ‘‘Āgaccheyya vā so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu taṃ āvāsaṃ na vā āgaccheyya, tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno purimikā ca paññāyati, paṭissave ca anāpattī’’ti vacanato oraṃ sandhāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘so tadaheva akaraṇīyo pakkamati, sakaraṇīyo pakkamati, tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno purimikā ca na paññāyati, paṭissave ca āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 207) vuttaṃ.
允许七日应作事说之解释显示巴利原文
Sattāhakaraṇīyānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
187-8 然而,第二种情况应知为超过七日,因为经中说:“他在那七日中于界外度过,诸比丘,该比丘的前安居不显现,且于承诺犯恶作罪。”同样地,经中说:“他在那七日中于界内返回,诸比丘,该比丘的前安居显现,且于承诺无罪。”(《大品》207)即使在有两种原因的情况下,若无破雨安居的原因,也应知有罪。因此,这三句话根据情形被连接起来,成为独立的句子。“三句缺失”是指它们并不存在。显示巴利原文
187-8. Dutiyaṃ pana ‘‘so taṃ sattāhaṃ bahiddhā vītināmeti, tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno purimikā ca na paññāyati, paṭissave ca āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vacanato sattāhato paraṃ veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘so taṃ sattāhaṃ anto sannivattaṃ karoti, tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno purimikā ca paññāyati, paṭissave ca anāpattī’’ti (mahāva. 207) vuttaṃ. Satipi kāraṇadvaye vassacchedakāraṇābhāve āpatti veditabbā, tasmā tīṇipi etāni vacanāni yathāsambhavaṃ yojitāni viggahāni honti. Tīṇi parihīnānīti tāsaṃ natthitāya.
关于派遣使者即允许的解说显示巴利原文
Pahiteyevaanujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
199 依“诸比丘,我允许因僧团事务而外出,但须于七日内返回”之语,在雨安居期间,因有可迁移的事务而外出,是允许的。在此,即使因法欲而来,也会损害僧团的利益。因此又说“建造了住所之后”。“Āgata”指到来。此处的“bhāvettha”是“tapaccaya”的变体。关于“因僧团事务而外出”,据说昙摩师利长老曾说:“这仅适用于与住所相关的僧团事务,不适用于其他事务。”义注亦提取该词,并以“诸如布萨堂等住所中的任何事务”等说明,仅以住所为例作了显示,因此应加以仔细审查。显示巴利原文
199. ‘‘Anujānāmi bhikkhave, saṅghakaraṇīyena gantuṃ, sattāhaṃ sannivatto kātabbo’’ti vacanato antovasse saṃhārikabhāvena gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Tattha dhammachandavasenapi āgate saṅghassa āyamukhaṃ vinassati. Tato ‘‘senāsanāni katvā’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Āgatanti āgamanaṃ. Bhāvettha tapaccayoyaṃ. Saṅghakaraṇīyena gantunti ettha ‘‘senāsanapaṭisaṃyuttesu eva saṅghakaraṇīyesu, na aññesū’’ti dhammasiritthero vadati kira. Aṭṭhakathāyampi taṃ padaṃ uddharitvā ‘‘yaṃ kiñci uposathāgārādīsu senāsanesū’’tiādinā senāsanameva dassitaṃ, tasmā upaparikkhitabbaṃ.
“未经邀请而前往是不被允许的”,若这样做,则会导致破间夜及犯恶作罪,这也称为“破雨安居”。“确实是受邀”在此处是指:即使优婆塞们约定说“我们在某日行供养等,请所有比丘集合”,亦可前往。从自恣日的初九日起,为求粪扫衣,如同在Kāvīra港那样,诸比丘皆可前去,因为优婆塞们每年定时备办并置放业处。这在《安达卡注》中也说过:“或者由比丘僧团约定‘祈请周边诸比丘都来’,或者由优婆塞们做了宣告,前往那里并无破间夜”,以及“即使是一次邀请说‘请每年都来’,也是允许的”,还有“从衣时开始,如同在Kāvīra港宣告后所做的安排那样,定时为从各处来的众人准备供养,此义明显,余人亦说。”然而,诸阿阇梨不这样说。显示巴利原文
Animantitena gantuṃ na vaṭṭatīti tassa ratticchedo ca dukkaṭāpatti ca hoti, taṃ ‘‘vassacchedo’’ti ca vadanti. Nimantitoyeva nāma hotīti ettha upāsakehi ‘‘imasmiṃ nāma divase dānādīni karoma, sabbe sannipatantū’’ti katāyapi katikāya gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Pavāraṇāya navamito paṭṭhāya paṃsukūlikacīvaraṃ pariyesituṃ kāvīrapaṭṭane viya sabbesaṃ gantuṃ vaṭṭati anusaṃvaccharaṃ niyamato upāsakehi sajjitvā ṭhapanato. Vuttampi cetaṃ andhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghena vā katikā katā ‘samantā bhikkhū gacchantū’ti, ghosanaṃ vā kataṃ upāsakehi, tattha gacchantassa ratticchedo natthīti tathā ‘anusaṃvaccharaṃ āgacchantū’ti sakiṃ nimantitepi vaṭṭatī’’ti ca ‘‘cīvarakālato paṭṭhāya niyamaṃ katvā samantato āgatānaṃ sajjetvā dānato kāvīrapaṭṭane ghosetvā karaṇākāro paññāyatīti apare’’ti ca. Ācariyā pana evaṃ na vadanti.
关于障碍、无罪、破雨安居的解说显示巴利原文
Antarāyeanāpattivassacchedakathāvaṇṇanā
201 根据“如果去了远处,应以七日往返的方式令明相生起”这句,有人说:“这所显示的是:在存在某种障碍时,若该障碍允许破雨安居,则可在不破雨安居的情形下,依七日事缘的方式度过。”然而,持律者们不认同,因此应知“应以七日往返的方式令明相生起”这句话,是针对如临时出现等因缘而说的。对此,上文说“然而诸阿阇梨不这样说”。“Gāvuṃ vā”指牛或公牛。“Bahisīmāya ṭhitānaṃ”指那些站在界外的人,优波提舍长老说也包括站在分界内的人。关于破雨安居:在允许破雨安居的情况下,那些将寺院移往他处的人,应集合于该处,并宣告:“由于如此这般的原因,我们将寺院迁往名为某处的地方,于彼处安居”,尔后方行。显示巴利原文
201. ‘‘Sace dūraṃ gato hoti, sattāhavārena aruṇo uṭṭhāpetabbo’’ti vacanato ‘yasmiṃ antarāye sati vassacchedaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati, tasmiṃ antarāyeva vassacchedamakatvā sattāhakaraṇīyena vītināmetuṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpitanti apare’’ti vuttaṃ. Vinayadharā pana na icchanti, tasmā ‘‘sattāhavārena aruṇo uṭṭhāpetabbo’’ti idaṃ tatruppādādinimittaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘ācariyā pana evaṃ na vadantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Gāvuṃvāti balibaddhaṃ vā. Bahisīmāya ṭhitānanti tehi khaṇḍasīmāya ṭhitehipīti upatissatthero. Vassacchede assa vassacchedassa. Vihārā aññattha vuṭṭhāpentehi tattheva sannipatitvā ‘‘iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇena imasmiṃ nāma padese imaṃ vihāraṃ netvā vuṭṭhāpemā’’ti anussāvetvāva kātabbanti.
关于在牛栏等处入雨安居的解说显示巴利原文
Vajādīsuvassūpagamanakathāvaṇṇanā
203 “与牛栏同行者,在破雨安居时无罪”,据说意指不会构成破雨安居。由于商队没有固定的住处,所以不说“在此寺院”,而仅需说“我在此入雨安居”。“然而,在商队中入雨安居是不允许的,因此不能说‘在此寺院,于此三个月’或‘我在此入雨安居’,其意思是仅以作依处的方式被允许”,有人这样写道。但这与注释书相违。因为注释书中说:“应说‘我在此入雨安居’三次。”若说注释书的文句前后矛盾?并非如此,这是未解其意所致。商队有两种:停留的与移动的。其中,在停留的商队中,可于小屋内说“我在此入雨安居”而住。正是针对这一点,说:“比丘们,我允许在商队中入雨安居。”但在移动的商队中,由于没有小屋,不能入雨安居。若有轿子或车屋,则是允许的,在牛栏中也是如此。在三种情况下,比丘不犯破雨安居罪。显示巴利原文
203.Vajena saddhiṃ gatassa vassacchede anāpattīti vassacchedo na hotīti kira adhippāyo. Satthassa avihārattā ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre’’ti avatvā ‘‘idha vassaṃ upemī’’ti ettakaṃ vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Satthe pana vassaṃ upagantuṃ na vaṭṭatīti ‘imasmiṃ vihāre imaṃ temāsa’nti vā ‘idha vassaṃ upemī’ti vā na vaṭṭati, ālayakaraṇamatteneva vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo’’ti likhitaṃ. Taṃ pana aṭṭhakathāya virujjhati. ‘‘Idha vassaṃ upemīti tikkhattuṃ vattabba’’nti hi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāvacanampi pubbāparaṃ virujjhatīti ce? Na, adhippāyājānanato. Sattho duvidho ṭhito, sañcāroti. Tattha ṭhite kuṭikāya ‘‘idha vassaṃ upemī’’ti vatvā vasitabbaṃ. Idañhi sandhāya ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, satthe vassaṃ upagantu’’nti vuttaṃ, sañcārimhi pana satthe kuṭikāya abhāvato vassaṃ upagantuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sati sivikāya vā sakaṭakuṭikāya vā vaṭṭati, tathā vajepi. Tīsu ṭhānesu bhikkhuno natthi vassacchede āpatti.
关于“他也能邀请”的考察如下:“诸比丘,我允许前往牛栏所在之处”这句话,是为了保护雨安居而说,还是为了保护破雨安居的罪而说?在此,如果是为了保护雨安居,则与“诸比丘,不应无住处而入雨安居”这句话相违。如果是为了保护破雨安居的罪而说,则可成立“他不能邀请”。那么,此中的道理是什么?因为只有在此三种情况下能邀请,其他情况则不能。被野兽等逼迫时,由于尚未舍弃所入之处,故能邀请;若已舍弃,则不能邀请,这便是此中的道理。“前往有村落之处也能邀请”,一位阿阇梨说“与其中一者相同”。因为先前并非以“我在此处入雨安居”而入,而是以“在此寺院”而入,并且该处已被舍弃。否则,若无寺院,仅针对村落而说“我在此处入雨安居”并进入,是允许的。若问:“会犯吗?”不,因为如同“诸比丘,我允许在牛栏、商队、船中入雨安居”的经文,并没有“在村落中入”的经文。由于“在三种情况下,比丘没有破雨安居的罪”这句话,显示了在这些情况下有入雨安居,因为若无入安居则无破安居,因此“然而在商队中不能入雨安居”是针对没有小屋的时候说的,这已成立。“在三种情况下,比丘不……”显示巴利原文
Pavāretuñca labhatīti etthāyaṃ vicāraṇā – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yena vajo, tena gantu’’nti idaṃ kiṃ vassarakkhaṇatthaṃ vuttaṃ, udāhu vassacchedāpattirakkhaṇatthanti? Kiñcettha yadi vassarakkhaṇatthaṃ, ‘‘na, bhikkhave, asenāsanikena vassaṃ upagantabba’’nti idaṃ virujjhati. Atha vassacchedāpattirakkhaṇatthaṃ vuttanti siddhaṃ na so pavāretuṃ labhatīti, kā panettha yutti? Yato ayameva tividho pavāretuṃ labhati, netaro. Vāḷehi ubbāḷhādiko hi upagataṭṭhānāpariccāgā labhati. Pariccāgā na labhatīti ayamettha yutti. Yena gāmo, tattha gatopi pavāretuṃ labhatīti ekenāti ācariyo. Yo hi pubbe ‘‘idha vassaṃ upemī’’ti na upagato, ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre’’ti upagato, so ca pariccatto. Aññathā vinā vihārena kevalaṃ gāmaṃ sandhāya ‘‘idha vassaṃ upemī’’ti upagantuṃ vaṭṭatīti. Āpajjatūti ce? Na, ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vaje satthe nāvāya vassaṃ upagantu’’nti vacanaṃ viya ‘‘gāme upagantu’’nti vacanābhāvato. Yasmā ‘‘tīsu ṭhānesu bhikkhuno natthi vassacchede āpattī’’ti vacanaṃ tattha vassūpagamanaṃ atthīti dīpeti tadabhāve chedābhāvā, tasmā ‘‘satthe pana vassaṃ upagantuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti kuṭiyā abhāvakālaṃ sandhāya vuttanti siddhaṃ. Tīsu ṭhānesu bhikkhuno natthi vassacchede āpattīti ‘‘tehi saddhiṃ gacchantasseva natthi, virujjhitvā gamane āpatti ca, pavāretuñca na labhatī’’ti likhitaṃ, tasmā yaṃ vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘atha sattho antovasseyeva bhikkhunā patthitaṭṭhānaṃ patvā atikkamati…pe… antarā ekasmiṃ gāme tiṭṭhati vā vippakirati vā’’tiādi, taṃ ettāvatā virujjhitvā gatānampi virujjhitvā gamanaṃ na hoti, tasmā pavāretabbanti dassanatthanti veditabbaṃ.
其中,由于“应搭建以枝叶覆盖的茅舍后进入”这句话,为了坐卧处而爬树是允许的,这已成定论,岂非与圣典相违?不,因为正是通过禁止它而得以成立,并且在此处再次予以禁止。“诸比丘,无坐卧处者不应入雨安居”,通过这一禁止而成立,如同“诸比丘,不应在露天入雨安居”的禁止一样,难道是这样吗?不,因为这会招致认可露天并非坐卧处的过失。实际上,由于“在露天的草堆中”这句话,露天被认定为坐卧处。住在四柱大厅露天处者,也被称为“住在四柱大厅中”,因此可推导出在那里是允许的。所以,此处所谓的“无坐卧处者”,应理解为:自己或他人未为自己安排固定居住处的坐卧处者。否则,会导致两种禁止中某一项成为多余,并且会得出在树下和敞棚中也可以入雨安居,以及未安排坐卧处者也可以在内室居住的结论。若问:如何得知此处所指的坐卧处就是带有门闩的住处呢?从制戒因缘可知。因为这条“无坐卧处者入雨安居”的犯行,是在“那时,诸比丘无坐卧处而入雨安居,因寒冷或炎热而受苦”这一因缘中制定的,因此,此处所指的坐卧处,应被理解为能够遮止寒冷等之处。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘padaracchadanaṃ kuṭiṃ katvā upagantabba’’nti vacanato senāsanatthāya rukkhaṃ āruhituṃ vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ hoti, na pāḷivirodhatoti ce? Na, tappaṭikkhepeneva siddhattā, imassa idha punapi paṭikkhepanato. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, asenāsanikena vassaṃ upagantabba’’nti iminā paṭikkhepena siddhe ‘‘na, bhikkhave, ajjhokāse vassaṃ upagantabba’’nti paṭikkhepo viya siyāti ce? Na, ajjhokāsassa asenāsanabhāvānumatippasaṅgato. Ajjhokāso hi ‘‘ajjhokāse palālapuñje’’ti vacanato senāsananti siddhaṃ. Catusālaajjhokāse vasantopi ‘‘catusālāya vasatī’’ti vuccati, tasmā tattha vaṭṭatīti āpajjati, tasmā idha asenāsaniko nāma attanā vā parena vā attano nibaddhavāsatthaṃ apāpitasenāsanikoti veditabbaṃ. Aññathā dvinnaṃ paṭikkhepānaṃ aññatarātirekatā ca rukkhamūlepi nibbakosepi vassaṃ upagantuṃ vaṭṭatīti ca, apāpitasenāsanikenāpi gabbhe vasituṃ vaṭṭatīti ca āpajjati, sadvārabandhameva senāsanaṃ idha adhippetanti kathaṃ paññāyatīti ce? Nidānato. Ayañhi asenāsanikavassūpagamanāpatti ‘‘tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū asenāsanikā vassaṃ upagacchanti, sītenapi uṇhenapi kilamantī’’ti imasmiṃ nidāne paññattā, tasmā sītādipaṭikkhepameva idha senāsananti adhippetabbanti siddhaṃ. Evaṃ sante siddhaṃ pubbapakkhanidassananti ce? Na, pubbe aparatthapavattisūcanato. Dutiyajjhānaniddese ‘‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā avitakkaṃ avicāra’’nti (dī. ni. 1.228; ma. ni. 1.271) vacanāni nidassanaṃ. Ajjhokāsapaṭikkhepanidānena bahiajjhokāsova paṭikkhitto, na catusālādimajjhagato ajjhokāsoti āpajjati, tasmā na nidānaṃ pamāṇanti ce? Na, niyamato. Kiñci hi sikkhāpadaṃ nidānāpekkhaṃ hotīti sādhitametaṃ. Idaṃ sāpekkhaṃ, idaṃ anapekkhanti kathaṃ paññāyati, na hi ettha ubhatovibhaṅge viya sikkhāpadānaṃ padabhājanaṃ, anāpattivāro vā atthīti? Idhāpi desanāvidhānato paññāyati. ‘‘Deve vassante rukkhamūlampi nibbakosampi upadhāvantī’’ti hi imehi dvīhi nidānavacanehi bahi vā anto vā sabbaṃ ovassakaṭṭhānaṃ idha ajjhokāso nāma. Anovassakaṭṭhānampi anibbakosameva idha icchitabbanti siddhaṃ hoti. Tena na upagantabbanti na ālayakaraṇapaṭikkhepo, ‘‘idha vassaṃ upemī’’ti vacanapaṭikkhepo. Chavasarīraṃ dahitvā chārikāya, aṭṭhikānañca atthāya kuṭikā karīyatīti andhakaṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ. ‘‘Ṭaṅkitamañcoti kasikuṭikāpāsāṇaghara’’nti likhitaṃ. ‘‘Akavāṭabaddhasenāsane attano pāpite sabhāgaṭṭhāne sakavāṭabaddhe vasati ce, vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Payogopi atthi, ‘‘asenāsanikena vassaṃ na upagantabba’’nti pāḷi ca aṭṭhakathā ca, tasmā upaparikkhitabbaṃ.
非法决议等论说的注释显示巴利原文
Adhammikakatikādikathāvaṇṇanā
205 205. 在《大分别》中所说:此处,这是《暗黑注疏》的说法:未满十五岁的沙弥不应住于此寺院,不应去捡拾粪扫衣,不应接受布片施食,不应在其他寺院进食,不应食用其他比丘或比丘尼的所有物,我们彼此既不交谈也不问候,不应诵读,用陶钵是允许的,资具不具足者不得居住。显示巴利原文
205.Mahāvibhaṅge vuttanti ettha ayaṃ andhakaṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ ūnapannarasavassena sāmaṇerena idha vihāre na vatthabbā, na paṃsukūlaṃ āhiṇḍitabbaṃ, na coḷabhikkhā gahetabbā, na aññavihāre bhuñjitabbaṃ, na aññassa bhikkhussa vā bhikkhuniyā vā santakaṃ bhuñjitabbaṃ, aññamaññaṃ neva ālapeyyāma na sallapeyyāma, na sajjhāyitabbaṃ, mattikāpattena vaṭṭati, na aparipuṇṇaparikkhārassa vāsoti.
206 206. “妄语”指违背事实的虚诳语。有些人说:“这是从违背承诺的角度,针对‘已答应’而说的”,以及“因与国王所说的话相符,而在家人将其理解为妄语,所以这样说”。显示巴利原文
206.Musāvādoti visaṃvādo adhippeto. Keci ‘‘visaṃvādanavasena paṭissuṇitvāti vutta’’nti ca, ‘‘rañño vuttavacanānurūpato musāvādoti gahaṭṭhā gaṇhantīti vutta’’nti ca vadanti.
207 207. “前安居也不被认许。为什么?当‘我住后安居’的心念生起时,最初的坐卧处执取便止息。当‘我就住前安居’的心念再生起时,后者的执取便止息。两种安居都没有相关的规约。”有这样的记载。然而,在《古代难点》中说:“若未在最初执取的地方居住,而于其他寺院执取坐卧处后住了两三日,最初的执取因此止息,所以前安居不被认许。最后的执取则不止息,这称为依日数而止息。如果后三个月于他处居住,前安居也不被认许,这称为依坐卧处执取而止息。”这两种义解在此处均非所指。在此人已承诺之处,前安居不被认许,并且违犯承诺有恶作罪。那么,在什么情况下前安居被认许呢?在途中的两个住处中,若当天有最后的执取,在那里,以七日事由前往最初执取之处者,不破雨安居;而此人若当日无事由而离开等,则记载为:“所谓事由,即指七日事由”。显示巴利原文
207.‘‘Purimikāca na paññāyati. Kasmā? ‘Dutiye vasāmī’ti citte uppanne paṭhamasenāsanaggāho paṭippassambhati. Puna ‘paṭhame eva vasāmī’ti citte uppanne dutiyo paṭippassambhati. Ubhayāvāse vidhānaṃ natthī’’ti likhitaṃ. Porāṇagaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘paṭhamaṃ gahitaṭṭhāne avasitvā aññasmiṃ vihāre senāsanaṃ gahetvā dvīhatīhaṃ vasati, tato paṭhamaggāho paṭippassambhatīti purimikā ca na paññāyati. Pacchimaggāho na paṭippassambhati. Idañhi divasavasena paṭippassambhanaṃ nāma hoti. Atha pacchimaṃ temāsaṃ aññasmiṃ vasati, purimikā ca na paññāyati, idaṃ senāsanaggāhānaṃ vasena paṭippassambhanaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ubhopete atthavikappā idha nādhippetā. Yatthāyaṃ paṭissuto, tattha purimikā ca na paññāyati, paṭissave ca āpatti dukkaṭassa. Kattha pana purimikā paññāyatīti? Antarāmagge dvīsu āvāsesu yattha tadaheva pacchimaggāho, tattha paṭhamaṃ gahitaṭṭhāne sattāhakaraṇīyena gacchato na vassacchedo, so tadaheva akaraṇīyo pakkamatītiādimhi ‘‘karaṇīyaṃ nāma sattāhakaraṇīya’’nti likhitaṃ.
在《圣典之外的破安居裁决》中说:“以听法等为事由”。在开头四种情况中,因意指无牵挂地离开,所以没有说“以七日事由”,这是因为若存有牵挂,便不存在无牵挂的离开。其中,前两种情况是依未入雨安居者而说,因此,已入安居者若于当日以七日事由离开,并在七日内返回,则不破雨安居,这已成定论。后两种情况是依已入安居者无牵挂地离开而说,“在自恣日将至之前的七日,有事者离开”,这是为了说明:若超过七日而不返回,便破雨安居。其中,因为没有“无事者离开”的说法,所以无破安居的因缘则不应离开,这已成定论。然而,自恣后则可以离开,因为自恣依赖于那一日。其中,“或者不回来”是指由于遭遇障碍。但是,导师说:“为了显示即使怀着‘我不再返回此处’的无牵挂之心,有事者也可以离开,所以没有说‘无事者’。”另据说:“在锡兰岛,有一种名为小自恣的仪式,行过那种自恣后,有事者便可随意离开,他们也显示了其中的方法。”又说:“其中,有六个黎明在雨安居内,一个在外,因此他算作住了满满三个月,其他人持此说法”,而“导师则不持此说”。在所有情况中,“入寺”的意思,是根据自己的雨安居来计算的。显示巴利原文
Pāḷimuttakaratticchedavinicchaye ‘‘dhammassavanādī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ādimhi catūsu vāresu nirapekkhapakkamanassādhippetattā ‘‘sattāhakaraṇīyenā’’ti na vuttaṃ tasmiṃ sati nirapekkhagamanābhāvato. Tattha purimā dve vārā vassaṃ anupagatassa vasena vuttā, tasmā upagatassa tadaheva sattāhakaraṇīyena gantvā antosattāhaṃ āgacchato na vassacchedoti siddhaṃ. Pacchimā dve vārā upagatassa nirapekkhagamanavasena vuttā, ‘‘sattāhaṃ anāgatāya pavāraṇāya sakaraṇīyo pakkamatī’’ti tato bahiddhā sattāhaṃ vītināmentassa vassacchedoti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘akaraṇīyo pakkamatī’’ti vacanābhāvā vinā ratticchedakāraṇena gantuṃ na vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ. Pavāretvā pana gantuṃ vaṭṭati pavāraṇāya taṃdivasasannissitattā. Tattha na vā āgaccheyyāti antarāyena. Ācariyo pana ‘‘na puna idhāgacchāmī’ti nirapekkhopi sakaraṇīyova gantuṃ labhatīti dassanatthaṃ akaraṇīyo’ti na vutta’’nti vadati. ‘‘Sīhaḷadīpe kira cūḷapavāraṇā nāma atthi, taṃ pavāraṇaṃ katvā yathāsukhaṃ sakaraṇīyā gacchanti, payogañca dassentī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tattha cha aruṇā antovasse honti , eko bahi, tasmā so temāsaṃ vuttho hotīti apare’’ti ca, ‘‘ācariyo evaṃ na vadatī’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Sabbattha vihāraṃ upetīti attano vassaggena pattagabbhaṃ upetīti porāṇā. Asatiyā pana vassaṃ na upetīti ettha ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre imaṃ temāsa’’nti avacanena. ‘‘Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaratticchedakāraṇaṃ vinā tirovihāre vasitvā āgacchissāmīti gacchatopi vassaccheda’’nti likhitaṃ.
208 “Paṭissuto hoti pacchimikāyā”的意思是说:承诺后安居者,是指由中途出家者,或由雨安居中断者所作出的承诺;然而,其他人若未先入前安居,则不应在后安居中作承诺。他们下定决心后断言:“在任何情况下,夜间中断即导致安居中断。”但也有一些人并不认同。他们为成立此说,展开种种无益之论。这又有何意义呢?显示巴利原文
208.Paṭissuto hoti pacchimikāyāti antarā pabbajitabhikkhunā, chinnavassena vā paṭissuto, aññena pana purimaṃ anupagantvā pacchimikāyaṃ paṭissavo na kātabbo. Ratticchede sabbattha vassacchedoti sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā vadanti. Keci pana na icchanti. Taṃ sādhetuṃ anekadhā papañcenti. Kiṃ tena.
4. 《自恣犍度注释》显示巴利原文
4. Pavāraṇākkhandhakavaṇṇanā
《不安乐住论注释》显示巴利原文
Aphāsukavihārakathāvaṇṇanā
210 因为先说了“贤友们,我向僧团自恣”,之后似乎也就应当接着说“愿僧团教导我”。然而,此处的意趣是这样的:正因为我向僧团自恣,所以其中所包含的上座、中座、新学比丘,一切尊者们都应无差别地教导我。显示巴利原文
210. ‘‘Saṅghaṃ āvuso pavāremī’’ti vuttattā pacchāpi ‘‘vadatu maṃ saṅgho’’ti vattabbaṃ viya dissati. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo – yasmā ahaṃ saṅghaṃ pavāremi, tasmā tattha pariyāpannā therā, majjhimā, navā vā avisesenāyasmanto sabbepi maṃ vadantūti.
《自恣破坏注释》显示巴利原文
Pavāraṇābhedavaṇṇanā
212 “诸比丘,有两种自恣”——在此,当有那样的事务时,于任何处自恣都是允许的。正因如此,大寺的比丘们在十四日自恣后,至今仍在十五日举行身和合。他们甚至为拜见大塔而在初八日便前往支提山,那也正是那些想在十四日自恣者所为。有记载说:“由于‘在自恣前七日,有事务者可离去,无犯’这句教示,此即惯例。”“若不作决意,则犯恶作”,这是对一个人所说的恶作,而所说的前行法也不应适用于僧团或团体。显示巴利原文
212.Dvemā, bhikkhave, pavāraṇāti ettha tādise kicce sati yattha katthaci pavāretuṃ vaṭṭati. Teneva mahāvihāre bhikkhū cātuddasiyaṃ pavāretvā pannarasiyaṃ kāyasāmaggiṃ idānipi denti. Cetiyagiri mahādassanatthampi aṭṭhamiyaṃ gacchanti, tampi cātuddasiyaṃ pavāretukāmānaṃyeva hoti. ‘‘Sattāhaṃ anāgatāya pavāraṇāya sakaraṇīyo pakkamati, anāpattīti vacanato idaṃ āciṇṇa’’nti likhitaṃ. ‘‘No ce adhiṭṭhaheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti ekassa vuttadukkaṭaṃ, tasseva vuttaṃ pubbakiccañca saṅghagaṇānampi netabbaṃ.
《允许自恣论注释》显示巴利原文
Pavāraṇādānānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
213 “那位比丘”指的是给予自恣的比丘。显示巴利原文
213.Tena ca bhikkhunāti pavāraṇādāyakena.
《无犯十五日等论注释》显示巴利原文
Anāpattipannarasakādikathāvaṇṇanā
他们解释为:由于“当自恣已宣布,且僧团已自恣时,一切人的自恣皆得善成”这句话,单凭自恣,给予自恣者本人也就成为已自恣者了。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tassā ca pavāraṇāya ārocitāya saṅghena ca pavārite sabbesaṃ suppavāritaṃ hotīti vacanato kevalaṃ pavāraṇāya pavāraṇādāyakopi pavāritova hotī’’ti vadantīti.
222 “大众未起座”是指自恣结束后,仍在相互交谈。“部分已起座”是指有些人仍如常而坐,有些人已回到各自的住处。“应再次自恣”是指所有人应再次聚集行自恣。“他们同时到来,应在他们面前自恣”,如疏中记载:“离去者不必召回,唯于在座者前自恣。此理于布萨犍度中亦同。”“所有大众都已起座,他们同时到来,应在他们面前自恣”,他们解释说:“若所有人起座离去,且无法集会,那么召集一部分人来自恣是可行的。”为何?据说因为没有设定动议的僧团行事,故不成别众。但在此,不论是一部分人离去,还是所有人离去,都应召集全体,而不设定动议,单纯行自恣。召集一部分人来自恣是不得许可的,因为已言“尊者,我向僧团自恣”。因为全体聚集后,后来者可成为所见、所闻、所疑的陈述者。纵知有未到者,亦如于部分人前说自恣语。如同召集四位现前者以舍弃所犯的舍堕衣等,自恣并非如此,因其取决于全体。“和合众的自恣已被制定”这句话是此处的依据。“除此之外,注释书中未予许可,故不合规”,优波提舍长老说。如果人数较少,应……显示巴利原文
222.Avuṭṭhitāya parisāyāti pavāretvā pacchā aññamaññaṃ kathentiyā. Ekaccāya vuṭṭhitāyāti ekaccesu yathānisinnesu ekaccesu sakasakaṭṭhānaṃ gatesu. Puna pavāretabbanti punapi sabbehi samāgantvā pavāretabbaṃ. Āgacchanti samasamā, tesaṃ santike pavāretabbanti ‘‘gate anānetvā nisinnānaṃyeva santike pavāretabbaṃ, uposathakkhandhakepi eseva nayo’’ti likhitaṃ. Sabbāya vuṭṭhitāya parisāya āgacchanti samasamā, tesaṃ santike pavāretabbanti ‘‘yadi sabbe vuṭṭhahitvā gatā, sannipātetuñca na sakkā, ekacce sannipātāpetvā pavāretuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Kasmā? Ñattiṃ ṭhapetvā kattabbasaṅghakammābhāvā vaggaṃ na hoti kira. Ettha pana ekaccesu gatesupi sabbesu gatesupi sabbe sannipātāpetvā ñattiṃ aṭṭhapetvā kevalaṃ pavāretabbaṃ. Ekacce sannipātāpetvā pavāretuṃ na vaṭṭati ‘‘saṅghaṃ, bhante, pavāremī’’ti vacanato. Sabbepi hi sannipatitā pacchā diṭṭhaṃ vā sutaṃ vā parisaṅkitaṃ vā vattāro honti. Anāgatānaṃ atthibhāvaṃ ñatvāpi ekaccānaṃ santike pavāraṇāvacanaṃ viya hoti. Sammukhībhūte cattāro sannipātāpetvā nissaggiyaṃ āpannacīvarādinissajjanaṃ viya pavāraṇā na hoti sabbāyattattā. ‘‘Samaggānaṃ pavāraṇā paññattā’’ti vacanañcettha sādhakaṃ. ‘‘Ito aññathā na vaṭṭati aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ananuññātattā’’ti upatissatthero vadati. ‘‘Thokatarehi tesaṃ santike pavāretabbaṃ ñattiṃ aṭṭhapetvāvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Āgantukā nāma navamito paṭṭhāyāgatā vā vajasatthanāvāsu vutthavassā vā honti.
237 记载中说:“十事邪见者,谓‘如来’等。”又说:“无布施等。”显示巴利原文
237. ‘‘Dasavatthukā micchādiṭṭhi hoti tathāgatotiādī’’ti likhitaṃ. ‘‘Natthi dinnantiādī’’ti vuttaṃ.
239 记载中说:“应与他一起自恣,并说:‘观察后我们将知晓。’”显示巴利原文
239. ‘‘Upaparikkhitvā jānissāmāti tena saha pavāretabba’’nti likhitaṃ.
五、皮革犍度注释显示巴利原文
5. Cammakkhandhakavaṇṇanā
「前者亦不显现。为何?因心中生起『我将住于第二处』时,第一住所之取得即止息。再者,心中生起『我将住于第一处』时,第二者即止息。两处住之规定不存在」,如是记载。然于古注疏典籍中则说:「于最初取得之处所未住,而于他寺取得住所后住二三日,由此第一取得止息,故前者亦不显现。后取得不止息。此名为依日数之止息。若于后三月住于他处,前者亦不显现,此名为依住所取得之止息」,如是所说。此二义理分别于此处非所意指。于彼受诺之处,前者亦不显现,于受诺有恶作之罪。然于何处前者显现耶?于中途二住所中,于当日即有后取得之处,于最初取得之处以七日事由而行者无瓦萨之断,彼当日无事由而出发等处,记载「事由者,名为七日事由」。于律文外夜断之决择中说「闻法等」。于开头四种情况中,因意指无顾虑之出发,故未说「以七日事由」,因若有彼则无无顾虑之行。其中前二种情况依未入瓦萨者之方式而说,故已入者当日以七日事由而行,七日内返回者无瓦萨之断,此为成立。后二种情况依已入者无顾虑之行而说,「于未到之巴瓦喇那前七日有事由而出发」,为显示超过彼外七日者有瓦萨之断而说。其中因无「无事由而出发」之语,故成立无夜断之事由不得行。然巴瓦喇那后得行,因巴瓦喇那依于当日。其中「或不返回」者,因障碍。然老师说:「为显示即使无顾虑『我不再来此』者亦得有事由而行,故未说『无事由』」。「据说在锡兰岛有名为小巴瓦喇那者,作彼巴瓦喇那后随意有事由而行,并显示应用」,如是所说。「其中六个黎明在瓦萨内,一个在外,故彼住三月」,有其他人如是说,又说「老师不如是说」。于一切处「入寺」者,古师说入以自己瓦萨所得之胎。然于无念中不入瓦萨者,此处以「于此寺此三月」之不说。「除注疏中所说夜断之事由外,住于界外寺后『我将返回』而行者亦有瓦萨之断」,如是记载。显示巴利原文
Soṇakoḷivisavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
242 242.「八十……聚集而作」者,是「聚集八万村长」之原因语。其中,应说「于八万村落」却说「于八十村落千」。以村为首者为村长,他们之千数。「业所染者」是依近用而说。实因业、缘、时节所生,故他们有眼药之色。应说「以某种所作之事」却说「以某种」。此处「如是」一词用于譬喻。如是,譬喻、教示、询问、决定、承诺、譬喻中。向前看者,是不敬义中的主格。然而,世尊见香室之门善缚后,因神通善巧如愿而行,入室后告知。于精舍之影,即精舍增长之影中。「啊!确实」者,记载为「啊!伟大」。世尊与众多人一起游行之显示,是为了策励未精进者而示现具寿索那之精进努力,以及为了显示为保护如此柔软之足而允许穿鞋。显示巴利原文
242.Asītiyā…pe… kāretīti ‘‘asīti gāmikasahassāni sannipātāpetvā’’ti imassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. Tattha ‘‘gāmānaṃ asītiyā sahassesū’’ti vattabbe ‘‘asītiyā gāmasahassesū’’ti vuttaṃ. Gāmappamukhā gāmikā, tesaṃ sahassāni. ‘‘Kammacittīkatānī’’ti upacārena vuttaṃ. Kammapaccayautusamuṭṭhāne hi tesaṃ añjanavaṇṇabhāvo. ‘‘Kenacideva karaṇīyenā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘kenacidevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha evaṃ-saddo opamme pavattati. Evamupamānopadesapucchāvadhāraṇapaṭiññātaopamme. Purato pekkhamānānanti anādaratthe sāmivacanaṃ. Tato pana bhagavato gandhakuṭiyā kavāṭaṃ subaddhaṃ passitvā icchitākārakusalatāya iddhiyā gantvā kuṭiṃ pavisitvā ārocesi. Vihārapacchāyāyanti vihārassa vaḍḍhamānacchāyāyaṃ. ‘‘Aho nūnāti aho mahanto’’ti likhitaṃ. Bhagavato sambahulehi saddhiṃ āhiṇḍanaṃ āyasmato soṇassa vīriyārambhanidassanena anāraddhavīriyānaṃ uttejanatthaṃ, evaṃ sukhumālānaṃ pādarakkhaṇatthaṃ upāhanā anuññātāti dassanatthañca.
索那出家事注释显示巴利原文
Soṇassapabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā
243 「于彼处取相」者,意为观察他们诸根的行相。显示巴利原文
243.Tattha ca nimittaṃ gaṇhāhīti tesaṃ indriyānaṃ ākāraṃ upalakkhehi.
244 「已决意」者,谓已通达、现证而安住。「决意于出离」等词,既指涅槃,也指阿罗汉果。因为「彼由出离一切烦恼故,称为『出离』;由远离居家故,称为『远离』;由无瞋故,称为『无瞋』;由取灭尽时生起故,称为『取灭尽』;由渴爱灭尽时生起故,称为『渴爱灭尽』;由无痴故,称为『无痴』。」有论师认为,这一切皆指阿罗汉果。或有此可能:有时如此,或那位尊者如此。返回时方知,应作之事即己事,或即如是读法。有论师于「出离决意」中说阿罗汉果,于其余中说涅槃。另有论师于「无痴决意」中说涅槃,于其余中说阿罗汉果。又有说:「于此一切中,两者皆有。」在「心远离」、「已决意者」、「取灭尽」中,是目的义中的主格。见诸处之生灭后。显示巴利原文
244.Adhimutto hotīti paṭivijjhitvā paccakkhaṃ katvā ṭhito hoti. Nekkhammādhimuttotiādīhi nibbānaṃ, arahattañca vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tañhi sabbakilesehi nikkhantattā ‘nekkhamma’nti ca gehato pavivittattā ‘paviveko’ti ca byāpajjābhāvato ‘abyāpajja’nti ca arahattaṃ upādānassa khayante uppannattā ‘upādānakkhayo’ti ca taṇhāya khayante uppannattā ‘taṇhakkhayo’ti ca sammohābhāvato ‘asammoho’ti ca vuccatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sabbehi arahattaṃ vuttanti keci. Siyā kho evamassāti kadāci evamassa, assa vā āyasmato evaṃ siyā. Paccāgacchanto jānanto. Karaṇīyamattānanti attano. So eva vā pāṭho. Nekkhammādhimuttoti imasmiṃyeva arahattaṃ kathitaṃ. Sesesu nibbānanti keci. Asammohādhimuttoti ettheva nibbānaṃ. Sesesu arahattanti keci. ‘‘Sabbesvevetesu ubhayampī’’ti vadanti. Pavivekañca cetaso, adhimuttassa, upādānakkhayassa cāti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Āyatanānaṃ uppādañca vayañca disvā.
禁止一切染色等之解说显示巴利原文
Sabbanīlikādipaṭikkhepakathāvaṇṇanā
246 「以染色布擦拭后」是读法。因已说「除去垢物等」,故主张「打两三个孔而使用是允许的」者,其说不可采纳。显示巴利原文
246. ‘‘Rañjanacoḷakena puñchitvā’’ti pāṭho. ‘‘Khallakādīni apanetvā’ti vuttattā dve tīṇi chiddāni katvā vaḷañjetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadantānaṃ vādo na gahetabbo.
禁止乘舆等之解说显示巴利原文
Yānādipaṭikkhepakathāvaṇṇanā
254 254. 因说到“四指以上者”,有人便认为四指以下是允许的。关于“两端红枕”,注中记载:“然而,袈裟色是允许的,唯红花等染色则不允许。”显示巴利原文
254. ‘‘Caturaṅgulādhikānī’’ti vuttattā caturaṅgulato heṭṭhā vaṭṭatīti eke. Ubhatolohitakūpadhānanti ettha ‘‘kāsāvaṃ pana vaṭṭati, kusumbhādirattameva na vaṭṭatī’’ti likhitaṃ.
禁止一切皮革等之解说显示巴利原文
Sabbacammapaṭikkhepādikathāvaṇṇanā
255 255. “此为何用”者,意为这对你做什么用呢。显示巴利原文
255.Kissa tyāyanti kissa te ayaṃ.
256 256. “在家所作”者,即为在家众所作。注中记载:“允许于任何处坐,这是它的义理。”虽然长部注疏中说:“除棉垫外,一切以宝饰边的毛毯等皆是允许的”,然而依律的方式,应尊重此处所说之义来把握。又说:“然而,在契经教说中,因为亦为在家众等而说,为摄受他们,才说除棉垫……是允许的,似乎是如此显示。这是其他师长的说法。”显示巴利原文
256.Gihivikatanti gihīnaṃ atthāya kataṃ. ‘‘Yattha katthaci nisīdituṃ anujānāmīti attho’’ti likhitaṃ. Kiñcāpi dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘ṭhapetvā tūlikaṃ sabbāneva gonakādīni ratanaparisibbitāni vaṭṭantī’’ti vuttaṃ, atha kho vinayapariyāyaṃ patvā garuke ṭhātabbato idha vuttanayenevettha attho gahetabbo. ‘‘Tattha pana suttantikadesanāya gahaṭṭhādīnampi vasena vuttattā tesaṃ saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘tūlikaṃ…pe… vaṭṭantī’ti vuttaṃ viya khāyatīti apare’’ti vuttaṃ.
259 259.「鹿母」是其名,「风鹿」亦是其名。有记载作「黑狮、黑面猴」。皮革为何不被允许,其得以开许的缘由,将于后文说明。所谓「依个人之例外已被禁止」。「诸比丘,任何皮革皆不应持用」,此义已由此成立;而此处说「诸比丘,牛皮」者,应知是恐人于后文「诸比丘,于一切边地,允许皮革敷具」处,生起开许之想而作此言。显示巴利原文
259.Migamātukoti tassa nāmaṃ. Vātamigoti ca tassa nāmaṃ. ‘‘Kāḷasīho kāḷamukho kapī’’ti likhitaṃ. Cammaṃ na vaṭṭatīti yena pariyāyena cammaṃ vaṭṭissati, so parato āvi bhavissati. ‘‘Attano puggalikavasena parihāro paṭikkhitto’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, kiñci cammaṃ dhāretabba’’nti ettāvatā siddhe ‘‘na, bhikkhave, gocamma’’nti idaṃ parato ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sabbapaccantimesu janapadesu cammāni attharaṇānī’’ti ettha anumatippasaṅgabhayā vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
6. 药篇集注释显示巴利原文
6. Bhesajjakkhandhakavaṇṇanā
五种药等之解说显示巴利原文
Pañcabhesajjādikathāvaṇṇanā
260 260.「若既是药又是油膏」等语,与后文「此二者反令其更形瘦弱」等说似有矛盾,故知此是搁置因缘、随所得而说。为何不随因缘而说?因意在顾及其他。即在一切佛陀时代,酥等皆为七日药,世尊此言正观待于此,故说「应涂以作食,而粗食不显」。因为「时受时食」在此并未作时分上的限定。世尊意在顾及其他,如何能得?受取根本药等乃尽形寿,已有时分限定。而「诸比丘,我听许此五种药,时受时食」之言,应知其意为「作储存后,于次日之时方听许食用」。否则,便不会生起「若既是药又是油膏」等寻思。若说因听许了美食,故为随顺疾病而说可意之物?不然,因为可见会导致更形瘦弱等状态。如说「依甘蔗汁而有糖蜜」,是否也应说「依新酥而有酥」,而不能别许新酥?不然,因为意在显示差别。如取糖蜜,虽已成就,但为将甘蔗汁之名义置于糖浆之位,故别许甘蔗汁。同样,新酥是为显示差别之法,故别许新酥,应知此理。其差别之法,应依药戒广解而知。因彼处说「欲煮酥而食者,亦可煮所洗者」,彼处酥是已煮者,非未煮者。糖蜜亦然。而新酥则是未煮的。显示巴利原文
260.‘‘Yaṃbhesajjañceva assā’’ti parato ‘‘tadubhayena bhiyyoso mattāya kissā hontī’’tiādinā virodhadassanato nidānānapekkhaṃ yathālābhavasena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Yathānidānaṃ kasmā na vuttanti ce? Tadaññāpekkhādhippāyato. Sabbabuddhakālepi hi sappiādīnaṃ sattāhakālikabhāvāpekkhāti tathā vacanena bhagavato adhippāyo, teneva ‘‘āhāratthañca phareyya, na ca oḷāriko āhāro paññāyeyyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi kāle paṭiggahetvā kāle paribhuñjitunti ettha ca kālaparicchedo na kato. Kutoyeva pana labbhā tadaññāpekkhādhippāyo bhagavato mūlabhesajjādīni tāni paṭiggahetvā yāvajīvanti kālaparicchedo. Yaṃ pana ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tāni pañca bhesajjāni kāle paṭiggahetvā kāle paribhuñjitu’’nti vacanaṃ, taṃ ‘‘sannidhiṃ katvā aparāparasmiṃ divase kāle eva paribhuñjituṃ anujānāmī’’ti adhippāyato vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Aññathā atisayattābhāvato ‘‘yaṃ bhesajjañceva assā’’tiādi vitakkuppādo na sambhavati. Paṇītabhojanānumatiyā pasiddhattā ābādhānurūpasappāyāpekkhāya vuttānīti ce? Tañca na, bhiyyoso mattāya kisādibhāvāpattidassanato. Yathā ‘‘ucchurasaṃ upādāya phāṇita’’nti vuttaṃ, tathā ‘‘navanītaṃ upādāya sappi’’nti vattabbato navanītaṃ visuṃ na vattabbanti ce? Na, visesadassanādhippāyato. Yathā phāṇitaggahaṇena siddhepi parato ucchuraso visuṃ anuññāto ucchusāmaññato guḷodakaṭṭhāne ṭhapanādhippāyato. Tathā navanīte visesavidhidassanādhippāyato navanītaṃ visuṃ anuññātanti veditabbaṃ. Visesavidhi panassa bhesajjasikkhāpadaṭṭhakathāvasena veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhi tattha ‘‘pacitvā sappiṃ katvā paribhuñjitukāmena adhotampi pacituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.622). Tattha sappi pakkāva hoti, nāpakkā. Tathā phāṇitampi. Navanītaṃ apakkameva.
此处问言:如新酥一样,甘蔗汁是否也应归入七日药之文?不应说。为什么呢?若于七日药文中说,则甘蔗汁如糖之例,如无病者之糖蜜被禁止,甘蔗汁亦同样被禁;若不说,则它如糖一样,不入糖蜜之列。此处不说,后由其言被置于糖浆之位。正为此故,于午后允许作饮料之事项中说了它。那么,它便是夜分药吗?不然,因为与注释相违。若说「不取『依』之『所依』义」?此言何意——「应知依甘蔗汁而熬煮之糖蜜」(《度疑》2.623),此舍堕注释之语,乃将「依」作缘而说?不然,因为不见另有其他作用。如「缘眼及色」等中,「缘」这一勤勉语可见有「生起」之另一作用,而「依甘蔗汁」此处不见有另一作用。此说不当,因为即使没有另一作用,此语亦得成立。如「四大及四大所造色」中,虽无另一作用,勤勉语亦成立,此处亦应如是?不然,因为彼处观待异读。如说四大所造,此语观待「或转起之色」这一异读,而此注释语不观待任何异读。因为注释师是圆满说者。或者,彼色仅为施设。如「有所造色」等中仅为施设,应知此处亦然。然而此处「依甘蔗汁」,乃以甘蔗汁为始、从彼而起之义,故说「无病比丘索求混有显示巴利原文
Etthāha – navanītaṃ viya ucchurasopi sattāhakālikapāḷiyaṃ eva vattabboti? Na vattabbo. Kasmā? Sattāhakālikapāḷiyaṃ vutte ucchuraso guḷāpadesena yathā agilānassa phāṇitaṃ paṭisiddhaṃ, tathā ucchurasopīti āpajjati, avutte pana guḷaṃ viya so phāṇitasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchati. Idha avatvā pacchā vacanena guḷodakaṭṭhāneva ṭhapito hoti. Tadatthameva pacchābhattaṃ vaṭṭanakapānakādhikāre vutto, tasmā eva yāmakālikoti ce? Na, aṭṭhakathāvirodhato. Na upādāyatthassa nissayatthattāti ce? Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘ucchurasaṃ upādāya ucchuvikati phāṇitanti veditabbā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623) yadetaṃ nissaggiyaṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ, tattha ‘‘upādāyā’’ti imassa nissāya paccayaṃ katvāti atthoti. Na, parato aparakiriyāya adassanato. Yathā ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe cā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.204, 400; 3.421, 425; saṃ. ni. 2.43) ‘‘paṭiccā’’ti imassa ussukkavacanassa ‘‘uppajjatī’’ti aparakiriyā dissati, na tathā ‘‘ucchurasaṃ upādāyā’’ti ettha aparakiriyā dissatīti. Ayuttametaṃ tattha tadabhāvepi siddhattā. Yathā ‘‘cattāro ca mahābhūtā catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya rūpa’’nti (dha. sa. 584) ettha aparakiriyāya abhāvepi ussukkavacanaṃ siddhaṃ, tathā etthāpi siyāti? Na, tattha pāṭhasesāpekkhattā. Yathā cattāro mahābhūtā upādāya vuttaṃ, pavattakaṃ vā rūpanti imaṃ pāṭhasesaṃ sā pāḷi apekkhati, na tathā idaṃ aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ kañci pāṭhaṃ apekkhati. Paripuṇṇavādino hi aṭṭhakathācariyā. Saññākaraṇamattaṃ vā tassa rūpassa. ‘‘Atthi rūpaṃ upādāyā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 584) hi saññākaraṇamattaṃ, evamidhāpīti veditabbaṃ. Idha pana ‘‘ucchurasaṃ upādāyā’’ti ucchurasaṃ ādiṃ katvā, tato paṭṭhāyāti attho, tasmā ‘‘ucchurasena saṃsaṭṭhaṃ bhattaṃ agilāno bhikkhu viññāpetvā bhuñjanto paṇītabhojanasikkhāpadena kāretabbo, bhikkhunī pāṭidesaniyenā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ ayuttanti eke. Te visesahetuno abhāvaṃ dassetvā paññāpetabbā.
至此,若有人将“依甘蔗汁即以甘蔗汁为初”等语句的含义错误地理解为:“依甘蔗汁”一语便指甘蔗汁就是糖蜜,那么“或未煮”一句即成无义,因为“未煮”一语已经取了甘蔗汁。若认为“或已煮”才是糖蜜,则“依甘蔗汁”一语又成无义——这属于后者的反驳。他们认为“或未煮”是指比丘自身或未煮,“无事之已煮”是指比丘自身无因缘而已煮,由此便须特别说明“有事之已煮”。但这番显示实为不善的显示。何以故?因为大注释中说“焦甘蔗糖蜜或捣甘蔗糖蜜唯午前适用”,并未提及“有事之已煮”一语,这与所得结论相违;又因为《大波咤厘》中说:“问:此有事之已煮适用否?答:甘蔗糖蜜午后非时,无有适用”,此说恰当,因此“有事之已煮”之义已被说及,是故将这一显示视为难见。“为食之义”即令食生起功用,也就是食的作用是存养之义。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā ‘‘ucchurasaṃ upādāyāti ucchurasaṃ ādiṃ katvā’’tiādīnaṃ padānaṃ atthaṃ micchā gahetvā yadi ‘‘ucchurasaṃ upādāyā’’ti vacanena ucchuraso phāṇitaṃ siyā, ‘‘apakkā vā’’ti vacanaṃ niratthakaṃ apakkavacanena ucchurasassa gahitattā. Atha ‘‘pakkā vā’’ti vacanena ucchuraso phāṇitanti siddhaṃ, ‘‘ucchurasaṃ upādāyā’’ti vacanaṃ niratthakanti uttaraṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ anuttaranti sādhitaṃ hoti. So cetehi apakkā vāti sāmaṃ bhikkhunā apakkā vā. Avatthukapakkā vāti bhikkhunāva sāmaṃ vinā vatthunā pakkā vāti attho. Tasmā aññathā ‘‘savatthukapakkā vā’’ti ca vattabbanti attho dassito, so duṭṭhu dassito. Kasmā? Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘jhāmaucchuphāṇitaṃ vā koṭṭitaucchuphāṇitaṃ vā purebhattameva vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttattā, ‘‘savatthukapakkā vā’’ti vacanassa ca laddhivirodhato avuttattā. ‘‘Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana ‘etaṃ savatthukapakkaṃ vaṭṭati no vaṭṭatī’ti pucchaṃ katvā ‘ucchuphāṇitaṃ pacchābhattaṃ no vaṭṭanakaṃ nāma natthī’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ yutta’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623) vuttattā ca savatthukapakkā vāti attho ca vuttoyeva hoti, tasmā duddassitoti siddhaṃ. Āhāratthanti āhārapayojanaṃ. Āhārakiccaṃ yāpananti atthoti ca.
262 “以酥受用”者,即以七日药而受用。显示巴利原文
262.Telaparibhogenāti sattāhakālikaparibhogena.
263 “有因缘”者,此处有因缘应依病者与无病者而了知有二类。因为于非时食学处的无犯章节中,对一夜药等三种皆无差别地说有因缘。在此犍度中说:“诸比丘,我允许病者用糖,无病者用糖水;我允许病者用盐醋,无病者用水和之。”因此了知有因缘依病与无病分为二种。否则,若无因缘,于糖水等便成违犯。由此则与经文相违。显示巴利原文
263.Sati paccayeti ettha satipaccayatā gilānāgilānavasena dvidhā veditabbā. Vikālabhojanasikkhāpadassa hi anāpattivāre yāmakālikādīnaṃ tiṇṇampi avisesena satipaccayatā vuttā. Imasmiṃ khandhake ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gilānassa guḷaṃ, agilānassa guḷodakaṃ, anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gilānassa loṇasovīrakaṃ, agilānassa udakasambhinna’’nti vuttaṃ. Tasmā siddhaṃ satipaccayatā gilānāgilānavasena duvidhāti. Aññathā asati paccaye guḷodakādīsu āpajjati. Tato ca pāḷivirodho.
“Piṭṭhehi”指用炒过的油。“Koṭṭhaphala”即Koṭṭha树之果,也有记载作“或Madana果”。“Hiṅgujatu”是阿魏树的茎、嫩叶与芽经熬煮所成的树脂。“Hiṅgusipāṭikā”是其根与枝条熬煮所成的树脂。“Taka”是该树皮熬煮而成的汁水。“Takapattī”是其叶熬煮而成的汁水。“Takapaṇṇī”是其果实熬煮而成的汁水。也有人解释:“Taka”即虫胶,“Takapattī”即Kitti虫胶与Moma虫胶,“Takapaṇṇī”即熟虫胶。“Ubbhida”指由蚁冢土所制成的。显示巴利原文
Piṭṭhehīti pisitatelehi. Koṭṭhaphalanti koṭṭharukkhassa phalaṃ. ‘‘Madanaphalaṃ vā’’ti ca likhitaṃ. Hiṅgujatu nāma hiṅgurukkhassa daṇḍapallavapavāḷapākanipphannā. Hiṅgusipāṭikā nāma tassa mūlasākhapākanipphannā. Takaṃ nāma tassa rukkhassa tacapākodakaṃ. Takapattīti tassa pattapākodakaṃ. Takapaṇṇīti tassa phalapākodakaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘takaṃ nāma lākhā. Takapattīti kittimalomalākhā. Takapaṇṇīti pakkalākhā’’ti likhitaṃ. Ubbhidaṃ nāma ūsapaṃsumayaṃ.
264 264.“Chakaṇaṃ”即牛粪。“Pākatikacuṇṇaṃ”是指未熬煮的植物粉末,因此他们说:“除了香粉,一切(这样的粉末)皆可使用。”“Cālitehi”指经过过滤的。显示巴利原文
264.Chakaṇaṃ gomayaṃ. Pākatikacuṇṇaṃ nāma apakkakasāvacuṇṇaṃ, tena ‘‘ṭhapetvā gandhacuṇṇaṃ sabbaṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Cālitehīti parissāvitehi.
265 265.“由种种材料制成”,即由种种药物所制成。显示巴利原文
265.Nānāsambhārehi katanti nānosadhehi.
糖等开许论注释显示巴利原文
Guḷādianujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
274 “自己煮的”与“一起煮的”似显示为两种,因此,在牛奶等中仅加热便算作煮。由此,它们等同于生米等。显示巴利原文
274. Sāmaṃ pakkaṃ samapakkanti duvidhaṃ viya dīpeti, tasmā khīrādīsu uṇhamattameva pāko. Tena uttaṇḍulādisamānā honti.
276-8 他们说:“在出现‘以佛为首’之处,不称‘比丘僧团’而称‘僧团’,是为了将世尊也涵盖在内。”“Nāga”指象。显示巴利原文
276-8. ‘‘Buddhappamukha’nti āgataṭṭhāne ‘bhikkhusaṅgho’ti avatvā ‘saṅgho’ti vuccati bhagavantampi saṅgahetu’’nti vadanti. Nāgoti hatthī.
279 “在狭窄处”指比丘的粪道及比丘尼的尿道,依此类推。由于未被禁止,烧灼是允许的。那么,依此类推,外科手术是否不允许呢?不,因为这是对已禁止之事的再禁止,为的是显示所应禁止之事的极致。这是什么意思呢?先前已禁止的外科手术,后来被汇集起来,通过“诸比丘,……偷兰遮”两处对外科手术作了禁止。由此显示,在狭窄处附近两指宽处应被禁止,而外科手术本身则无(更重的罪)。再者,先前只在狭窄处禁止了外科手术,后来连狭窄处附近两指宽处也禁止了。因此,这只是对狭窄处附近的禁止,并非对其他外科手术的禁止,此义已成立。这里,“刀”如同在“应为他寻找持刀者”等句中那样,指任何用来切割的东西。因此说“或用刺”等。然而,在此处,当知在比丘尼分别中,已通过枝条、涂药口的方式开许了涂药。另有一些人,将“或外科手术”的读法作了分别后,施行灌肠手术。据说“Vatthī”是指火罐。他们将其解释为“用那个切割称为灌肠手术”,应向他们展示“应为他寻找持刀者”这一句的分别,予以驳斥。“Aṇḍavuḍḍhī”是疝气。“Ādānav”……显示巴利原文
279.Sambādheti vaccamagge bhikkhussa bhikkhuniyā ca passāvamaggepi anulomato. Dahanaṃ paṭikkhepābhāvā vaṭṭati. Satthavattikammānulomato na vaṭṭatīti ce? Na, paṭikkhittapaṭikkhepā, paṭikkhipitabbassa tapparamatādīpanato, kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Pubbe paṭikkhittampi satthakammaṃ sampiṇḍetvā pacchā ‘‘na, bhikkhave…pe… thullaccayassā’’ti dvikkhattuṃ satthakammassa paṭikkhepo kato. Tena sambādhassa sāmantā dvaṅgulaṃ paṭikkhipitabbaṃ nāma. Satthavattikammato uddhaṃ natthīti dīpeti. Kiñca bhiyyo pubbe sambādheyeva satthakammaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ, pacchā sambādhassa sāmantā dvaṅgulampi paṭikkhittaṃ, tasmā tasseva paṭikkhepo, netarassāti siddhaṃ. Ettha ‘‘satthaṃ nāma satthahārakaṃ vāssa pariyeseyyā’’tiādīsu viya yena chindati, taṃ sabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kaṇṭakena vā’’tiādi. Khāradānaṃ panettha bhikkhunivibhaṅge pasākhe lepamukhena anuññātanti veditabbaṃ. Eke pana ‘‘satthakammaṃ vā’’ti pāṭhaṃ vikappetvā vatthikammaṃ karonti. ‘‘Vatthī’’ti kira agghikā vuccati. Tāya chindanaṃ vatthikammaṃ nāmāti ca atthaṃ vaṇṇayanti, te ‘‘satthahārakaṃ vāssa pariyeseyyā’’ti imassa padabhājanīyaṃ dassetvā paṭikkhipitabbā. Aṇḍavuḍḍhīti vātaṇḍako. Ādānavattīti ānahavatti.
人肉禁止论注释显示巴利原文
Manussamaṃsapaṭikkhepakathāvaṇṇanā
280 因为经文说了“诸比丘,人肉……为偷兰遮”,又说“诸比丘,不应不观察……为恶作”,所以未加观察的恶作与偷兰遮这两种犯行都会发生。因此,即便是可食用的肉,若缘于未加观察而食,也有恶作。有一些人说:“只有知道那是肉的时候才犯。对于糕饼等食物,不知是肉的人,哪有什么观察可言?”另一些人则说:“即使不知,也犯,因为这是普遍的通则。”显示巴利原文
280. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, manussamaṃsaṃ…pe… thullaccayassā’’ti vuttattā, ‘‘na ca, bhikkhave, appaṭi…pe… dukkaṭassā’’ti ca vuttattā appaṭivekkhaṇadukkaṭañca thullaccayañcāti dve āpajjati, tasmā kappiyamaṃsepi appaṭivekkhaṇapaccayā dukkaṭameva. Keci ‘‘maṃsabhāvaṃ jānantova āpajjati. Pūvādīsu ajānantassa kā paccavekkhaṇā’’ti vadanti. Ajānantopi āpajjati sāmaññena vuttattāti keci.
象肉等禁止论注释显示巴利原文
Hatthimaṃsādipaṭikkhepakathāvaṇṇanā
281 “这些……一切都不允许”这句话,仅仅是说明这十种人肉等属于不净物,并不是显示犯行差别的语句。“无论知道或不知道而食用的,都有犯”这也是未加限定的说法,因为它没有说明“这是某种犯”。这两处表述,是依据前面在人等之肉等中,已有偷兰遮和恶作犯的确定理则,因此得以了知其意趣,才如此宣说。在这里,其意趣是:因为这些是人等之肉等,是不净的,所以对于人肉等,是偷兰遮犯;对于其他一切,处处都是恶作犯。因为在经文中,确实将血等摄入肉类之列,而说“诸比丘,人肉……为偷兰遮”。就在那里,对于象等之肉等,也制定了恶作犯。由此,在锡兰的注释中说:“对于人肉、或发、或爪、或骨、或血,都是偷兰遮。”由此——显示巴利原文
281.Imesaṃ…pe… sabbaṃ na vaṭṭatīti idaṃ dasannampi manussamaṃsādīnaṃ akappiyabhāvamattaparidīpanavacanaṃ, nāpattivibhāgadassanavacanaṃ. Yaṃ kiñci ñatvā vā añatvā vā khādantassa āpattiyevāti idampi aniyamitavacanameva ‘‘ayaṃ nāma āpattī’’ti avuttattā . Tadubhayampi heṭṭhā manussādīnaṃ maṃsādīsu thullaccayadukkaṭāpattiyo hontīti gahitanayehi adhippāyo jānituṃ sakkāti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ adhippāyo – yasmā etesaṃ manussādīnaṃ maṃsādīni akappiyāni, tasmā manussānaṃ maṃsādīsu thullaccayāpatti. Sesānaṃ sabbattha dukkaṭāpattīti. Pāṭheyeva hi lohitādiṃ maṃsagatikaṃ katvā ‘‘na, bhikkhave, manussamaṃsaṃ…pe… thullaccayassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattheva hatthādīnaṃ maṃsādīsupi dukkaṭāpatti paññattā. Tena vuttaṃ sīhaḷaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘manussamaṃse vā kese vā nakhe vā aṭṭhimhi vā lohite vā thullaccayamevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Iminā eva –
“骨、血、皮、毛,凡此皆不许可。”——显示巴利原文
‘‘Aṭṭhipi lohitaṃ cammaṃ, lomamesaṃ na kappatī’’ti. –
《小戒》偈颂句的含义与意旨不难了知。“于受持”一处,说明了因不恭敬而犯的恶作。他们表示:“水、人肉等也是不可的。”纵使有龙王所说过患,也只取“嫌责”一节而说“由厌恶”。显示巴利原文
Khuddasikkhāgāthāpadassa attho ca adhippāyo ca suviññeyyoti. Paṭiggahaṇeti ettha anādariyadukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Udakamanussādimaṃsampi na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Nāgarājena vuttādīnave satipi ujjhāyanādhikārameva gahetvā ‘‘paṭikūlatāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
粥、蜜丸等论注释显示巴利原文
Yāgumadhugoḷakādikathāvaṇṇanā
283 “应依法处置”这句是结集者的话。因为世尊并不曾把同一条学则制定两次,所以有些长老说:“在这些情况中便是如此。”这是针对最初制定而言的,即便如此,那些比丘也并未犯戒。为何?因为数数食学则的缘起中说:“而且我们已在适当的时候托钵进食了。”在《母经分别》中又说:“所谓数数食,即已受请五种食物中的某一种,却搁置该食而食用其他五种食物中的某一种,这称为数数食。”因此,所谓其他食物,即从请中所得的任何食物,这已经成立。由于从粥请中所得的并非食物,所以那些比丘思惟“于此无犯”而食用了。在此,由于说了“应依法处置”,所以食用从其他请中所得之食者犯戒,而非食用其他者,这已获得许可。从那以后,在该戒的无犯条款中便提到了“常施食、筹施食、半月食、斋日食、月初日食”。但在先前毘舍离制戒之时,这些并不存在;若存在,则与缘起和《母经分别》相违。因此,由于缘起中说“而且我们已在适当的时候托钵进食了”,且在句分别中也同样无差别说“食用其他五种食物中的某一种”,所以无论是先受请还是后受请的食物,搁置受请之食而只食用未受请者。显示巴利原文
283.Yathādhammo kāretabboti idaṃ saṅgītikārakavacanaṃ. Na hi bhagavā tameva sikkhāpadaṃ dvikkhattuṃ paññapesi, evaṃ evarūpesūti eke. Paṭhamapaññattameva sandhāya vuttaṃ, tathāpi na ca te bhikkhū sāpattikā jātā. Kathaṃ? Paramparabhojanasikkhāpadassa aṭṭhuppattiyā. ‘‘Apica mayaṃ kālasseva piṇḍāya caritvā bhuñjimhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Mātikāvibhaṅge (pāci. 227) ca ‘‘paramparabhojanaṃ nāma pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññatarena bhojanena nimantito, taṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataraṃ bhojanaṃ bhuñjati, etaṃ paramparabhojanaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā aññaṃ bhojanaṃ nāma nimantanato laddhaṃ yaṃ kiñcīti siddhaṃ. Yasmā na bhojjayāgunimantanato laddhabhojanaṃ, tasmā ‘‘ettha anāpattī’’ti te bhikkhū paribhuñjiṃsūti. Ettha ‘‘yathādhammo kāretabbo’’ti vuttattā pana aññanimantanato laddhabhojanameva bhuñjantassa āpatti, netaranti anuññātaṃ. Tato paṭṭhāya tassa anāpattivāre ‘‘niccabhatte salākabhatte pakkhike uposathike pāṭipadike’’ti vuttaṃ. Pubbe vesāliyā paññattakāle natthi, yadi atthi, aṭṭhuppattimātikāvibhaṅgavirodho, tasmā ‘‘apica mayaṃ kālasseva piṇḍāya caritvā bhuñjimhā’’ti aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ vuttattā, padabhājanepi ‘‘aññaṃ pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataraṃ bhojanaṃ bhuñjatī’’ti avisesena vuttattā ca paṭhamaṃ vā pacchā vā nimantitaṃ bhojanaṃ ṭhapetvā animantitameva bhuñjantassa āpatti, netaranti kiñcāpi āpannaṃ, ‘‘na, bhikkhave, aññatra nimantitena aññassa bhojjayāgu paribhuñjitabbā’’ti vuttattā pana paṭhamanimantitabhojanato aññaṃ pacchā laddhaṃ nimantitabhojanaṃ, niccabhattādīni ca bhuñjantassa āpattīti āpajjamānaṃ viya jātanti anupaññattippasaṅganivāraṇaṃ, animantanabhojane āpattippasaṅganivāraṇañca karonto, paṭhamapaññattisikkhāpadameva iminā atthena pariṇāmento ca ‘‘yathādhammo kāretabbo’’ti bhagavā āha, tasmā tato paṭṭhāya pacchā nimantanabhojanaṃ bhuñjantasseva āpatti. Tesu na niccabhattādīnīti āpannaṃ. Tenevāyasmā upālitthero tassa anāpattivāre ‘‘niccabhatte’’tiādīni pañca padāni pakkhipitvā saṅgāyi. Adhippāyaññū hi te mahānāgā, tasmā paṭhamameva yaṃ bhagavatā vuttaṃ ‘‘pañca bhojanāni ṭhapetvā sabbattha anāpattī’’ti vacanaṃ, pacchāpi taṃ anurakkhantena abhojanaṃ madhugoḷakaṃ aparāmasitvā bhojjayāgu eva vuttāti evaṃ ācariyo.
于此有问:如同优波离长老以后来所得之理据将常施食等编入,同样地,在《衣犍度》中编入数数食后,为何不说“诸比丘,已出衣期的比丘有六种开许”?答:为了显示前述之理据。否则,这条学处便会在毘舍离与安陀迦频陀两地各制一半。若非如此,那些比丘便成了犯戒者,但他们并非犯戒者,因为即使在未禁止的情况下,也见到他们心生疑惑。经中说:“那么,婆罗门,你就给比丘们吧。比丘们心存疑惑,不愿接受。”正是为了消除他们“这会不会是特别指定给我们的”这样的疑惑,世尊在令他们“食用”而他们食用之后,才说:“诸比丘,我允许粥和蜜丸。”同样地,在此,他们为已制定的数数食学则所抑止,心想如何能食用数数食呢?对此,有些老师说:那些比丘虽依数数食学则知晓“其他食物不可”,但因世尊另行开许说“诸比丘,我允许粥……”,他们便以“如同初供、大粗食等一样乃属许可”这样的思惟而食用了。因此缘起中说:“而且我们已在适当的时候以粥充饥了”等。此说并不合理,因为它会导致与缘起和《母经分别》相违,导致无犯条款中常施食等不可能存在,以及导致比丘们无犯。显示巴利原文
Etthāha – yathā pacchāladdhalesena therena niccabhattādipakkhepo kato, evaṃ kathinakkhandhake paramparabhojanaṃ pakkhipitvā ‘‘atthatakathinānaṃ vo, bhikkhave, cha kappissantī’’ti kimatthaṃ na vuccanti? Vuccate – yathāvuttalesanidassanatthaṃ. Aññathā idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ vesāliyaṃ, andhakavinde cāti ubhayattha upaḍḍhupaḍḍhena paññattaṃ siyā. No ce, sāpattikā bhikkhū siyuṃ, na ca te sāpattikā appaṭikkhittepi tesaṃ kukkuccadassanato. ‘‘Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhūnaṃ dehīti. Bhikkhū kukkuccāyantā na paṭiggaṇhantī’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Tesañhi ‘‘paribhuñjathā’’ti bhagavato āṇattiyā paribhuttānampi ‘‘odissakaṃ nu kho idaṃ amhāka’’nti vimatippattānaṃ vimativinodanatthaṃ ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yāguñca madhugoḷakañcā’’ti vuttaṃ. Evamidhāpete paññattaṃ paramparabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ omadditvā paramparabhojanaṃ kathaṃ bhuñjissantīti. Etthāhu keci ācariyā paramparabhojanasikkhāpadeneva ‘‘aññassa bhojanaṃ na kappatī’’ti jānantāpi ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yāguñcā’’ti visuṃ anuññātattā ‘‘paṭaggidānamahāvikaṭādi viya kappatī’’ti saññāya bhuñjiṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘apica mayaṃ kālasseva bhojjayāguyā dhātā’’tiādi, taṃ ayuttaṃ tattha aṭṭhuppattimātikāvibhaṅgavirodhena anāpattivāre niccabhattādīnaṃ asambhavappasaṅgato, bhikkhūnaṃ sāpattikabhāvānatikkamanato, micchāgāhahetuppasaṅgena bhagavatā anuññātappasaṅgato ca. Te hi bhikkhū yasmā bhagavā katthaci vinayavasena kappiyampi ‘‘gāthābhigītaṃ me abhojaneyya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.194; su. ni. 81; mi. pa. 4.5.9) paṭikkhipati, tasmā bhagavato adhippāyaṃ pati ‘‘kukkuccāyantā na paṭiggaṇhantī’’ti vuttaṃ, sikkhāpadaṃ pati bhagavāpi attano adhippāyappakāsanatthameva ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yāguñcā’’ti āha. Duravaggāho hi bhagavato adhippāyo. Tathā hi bhāradvājassa pāyāsaṃ abhojaneyyanti akataviññattippasaṅgato paṭikkhipi. Ānandattherena viññāpetvā sajjitaṃ tekaṭulayāguṃ pana ‘‘yadapi, ānanda, viññattaṃ, tadapi akappiya’’nti avatvā ‘‘yadapi, ānanda, antovuttha’’ntiādimevāha. Tena no ce taṃ antovutthaṃ kappatīti adhippāyadassanena paṇītabhojanasūpodanaviññattisikkhāpadāni upatthambheti bhagavatopi kappati, pageva amhākanti.
284 “世尊允许病者用糖”这一说法,是依据“诸比丘,凡那些病比丘的受用物”之语而说,因此他们对此处的受持生起疑惑。然而在这里,本当说“诸比丘,我允许病者用糖水”,但因糖更被强调,所以先述说先前已开许的,再开许非病者的糖水。由此,当有病者且有因缘时,应受用糖;而糖水即使无因缘也可受用,这显示了此中差别。其中,有说:“糖水在诸时限药中属于七日药,因是世尊特别开许,若超过七日则犯恶作。”此说不合理,因为与水混合后,它便失去了七日药的性质。有说:“如同芒果等与水混合后成为一日药,同样,它失去了七日药的性质,之后被安立于尽形寿药中。”此为合理,且因是世尊特别开许,即使未作省察也无过失。有说:“因为说‘糖水’,所以它是水性的。”若与水混合即成水性,那么蜂蜜也应如此,因为它也是如此被开许的。不应这样认为,如果它是水性的,便应不须受持而受用,但并非如此——正如某部《甘提帕达》中所说:“于一切时皆应审察后受持。”显示巴利原文
284.Gilānasseva bhagavatā guḷo anuññātoti ‘‘yāni kho pana tāni gilānānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ paṭisāyanīyānī’’ti (pārā. 622) vacanavasena vuttaṃ, teneva te idha paṭiggahaṇe kukkuccāyiṃsu. Idha pana ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gilānassa guḷodaka’’nti vattabbe guḷādhikārattā pubbe anuññātañca vatvā agilānassa guḷodakaṃ anuññātaṃ, tena gilānena sati paccaye guḷo paribhuñjitabbo, guḷodakaṃ asati paccayepi vaṭṭatīti imaṃ visesaṃ dīpeti. Tattha ‘‘guḷodakaṃ kālikesu sattāhakālikaṃ, bhagavatā odissānuññātattā sattāhātikkamena dukkaṭa’’nti vadanti, taṃ na yuttaṃ, udakasambhinnattā sattāhakālikabhāvaṃ jahati. ‘‘Yathā ambādi udakasambhinnaṃ yāmakālikaṃ jātaṃ, tathā sattāhakālikaṃ jahitvā tadanantare yāvajīvike ṭhita’’nti vadanti, taṃ yuttaṃ, tañca bhagavatā odissānuññātattā paccavekkhaṇābhāve doso natthi. ‘‘Guḷodaka’nti vuttattā udakagatika’’nti vadanti. Yadi udakamissaṃ udakagatikaṃ hoti, madhupi siyā taṃ tathā anuññātattā. Mā hotu, appaṭiggahetvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ siyā udakagatikattā, tañca na hoti, ‘‘sabbatthāpi upaparikkhitvā gahetabba’’nti aññatarasmiṃ gaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ.
285 “空屋”指第四禅。显示巴利原文
285.Suññāgāranti catutthajjhānaṃ.
适宜地许可的解说。显示巴利原文
Kappiyabhūmianujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
295 “Oravasadda”意为大声音。“由众多人围绕”:此处即使只有一人也是允许的。有说:“在众多人中,即使一人的语声也可与之俱起。”“因为说‘接触后’”,所以未接触时则不可。以“没有过失”一语,其余情况也被允许。有说:“若墙壁先已修整,之后再填满它,在那里做是不可的,唯在自然地面上方可。”此说似与后文注释中“以砖等所作的积聚”的说法相违。“或泥团”:此处说:“若未作意、未决意,从所忆念之处开始;若上方已决意,则下方放置的物品为不净,唯有上方放置的才是净的,这是此处的差别。”在此,取得净屋是允许的,意思是应再作如是的净屋。“我们给作净屋”,在此意指用作净屋。然而,食堂本身即是住所,因此有说在那里作也是可以的。也有人言:“即使未作也是可以的。”显示巴利原文
295.Oravasaddanti mahāsaddaṃ. Bahūhi samparivāretvāti ettha ekenāpi vaṭṭati. ‘‘Bahūsu ekassapi vacanena saha siyāti vutta’’nti vadanti. ‘‘Āmasitvā’’ti vuttattā anāmasite na vaṭṭati. ‘‘Doso natthī’’ti vacanena sesāpi anuññātā. ‘‘Bhittiñce upasante pacchā taṃ pūrenti, tattha kātuṃ na vaṭṭati, pakatibhūmiyaṃyeva kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Taṃ upari aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘iṭṭhakādīhi katācayassā’’tiādinā virujjhati viya. Mattikāpiṇḍaṃ vāti ettha ‘‘asatiyā anadhiṭṭhitāya saritaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya ce upari adhiṭṭhitā, heṭṭhā ṭhitaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ akappiyaṃ, upariṭṭhitameva kappiyaṃ, ayamettha viseso’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha kappiyakuṭi laddhuṃ vaṭṭatīti evaṃvidhe puna kātabbāti attho. Kappiyakuṭiṃ kātuṃ demāti ettha kappiyakuṭikiccaṃ kātunti adhippāyo. Bhojanasālā pana senāsanameva, tasmā tattha kātabbanti apare. ‘‘Akatepi vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
所谓“口内藏”,即注中说“进食时之储藏”。“口内藏”是其名称。有说:“若是储藏,则犯波逸提;然口内藏唯犯恶作,故此处之‘储藏’非所意指。”由于说到“使其成为他所有”,故无留恋的舍弃并非此意。正如于衣的净施,应知此仅为形式上的作净。显示巴利原文
‘‘Mukhasannidhi nāma bhojanakāle sannidhī’’ti likhitaṃ. Mukhasannidhīti tassa nāmaṃ. ‘‘Yadi sannidhi hoti, pācittiyaṃ bhaveyya, mukhasannidhi pana dukkaṭaṃ, tasmā sannidhi anadhippetā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tassa santakaṃ katvā’’ti vuttattā anapekkhavissajjanaṃ nādhippetaṃ. Cīvaravikappane viya kappiyamattaṃ ñātabbanti keci.
给尼亚结发外道事的解说。显示巴利原文
Keṇiyajaṭilavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
300 有说:“自己所受持的食物,若于午前舍出,由沙弥等作成饮料后再行给予,唯午前可用,午后则不得用,因其为依食而受持之物。”然而,再次受持时并无过失,且午前所受者已经舍出,又非自己持取,故不见有何过患,应当审察后再行受持。“Sālūka”指块茎,人称“些许之物”。“Phārusaka”,注释说是一种生于果腊地区的树。由“熟果之汁”这一特别说明,可知未熟的亦可。依《库伦迪》之说亦得成立。洗米水亦属谷物之汁。又记载说“无渣之甘蔗汁为七日药”。“Sāvittī”即伽耶特利。“Chandaso”指吠陀韵律。有说:“由世尊言‘诸比丘,出家者不应教行不净法’,故不仅于十学处对未受具足戒者如此,凡比丘所不应行者,对彼亦皆不应行,此为意旨所在。”显示巴利原文
300. ‘‘Attanā paṭiggahitaṃ purebhattameva pariccajitvā sāmaṇerādīhi pānakaṃ katvā dinne purebhattameva vaṭṭati, na pacchābhattaṃ savatthukapaṭiggahitattā’’ti vadanti, tattha puna paṭiggahaṇe niddosattā, purebhattameva paṭiggahaṇassa nissaṭṭhattā, attanā ca aggahitattā doso na dissati, upaparikkhitvā gahetabbaṃ. Sālūkā nāma kandā, ‘‘ito kiñcitaka’’nti voharanti. ‘‘Phārusakanti goḷavisaye eko rukkho’’ti ca likhitaṃ. ‘‘Pakkaḍākarasa’’nti visesitattā ‘‘apakkaṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kurundivacanenapi siddhameva. Taṇḍuladhovanodakampi dhaññaraso eva. ‘‘Nikkasaṭo ucchuraso sattāhakāliko’’ti likhitaṃ. Sāvittīti gāyatti. Chandasoti vedassa. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, pabbajitena akappiye samādapetabba’nti vuttattā anupasampannassāpi na kevalaṃ dasasu eva sikkhāpadesu, atha kho yaṃ bhikkhussa na kappati, tasmimpīti adhippāyo’’ti vuttaṃ.
305 “两种布料”唯依名称而说,即绢布与索摩罗布。“三种”谓加上丝布则为三种。神通所成衣,是诸善来比丘所生起者。提婆达多衣,则为阿那律长老所得。又记载说:“于夜逾时,依储藏之义;过七日,依药剂学处之义。”显示巴利原文
305.Dve paṭā desanāmenevāti cīnapaṭṭasomārapaṭṭāni. Tīṇīti pattuṇṇena saha tīṇi. Iddhimayikaṃ ehibhikkhūnaṃ nibbattaṃ. Devadattiyaṃ anuruddhattherena laddhaṃ. ‘‘Yāmātikkame sannidhivasena sattāhātikkame bhesajjasikkhāpadavasenā’’ti likhitaṃ.
7. 咖提那犍度注释显示巴利原文
7. Kathinakkhandhakavaṇṇanā
咖提那许可的解说。显示巴利原文
Kathinānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
306 “咖提那”意为:因能成就五种利益,故为坚固。不说“他们作五种”,而说“他们将作”——此未来式语词在“vo”的属格意义上才相合,因为他们在那一刻尚未成就咖提那。在这两种义释中,后一种才是恰当的,因为他们皆是波婆耶人,且持守一切头陀支。对于受请者,方制定不告而行的学处,别众食亦是如此。对于未持受、未决意三衣者,不存在不持而行;对于有余衣者,则可受取随宜衣、第四衣等。对于另一者,亦可通过未决意的方式获得。粪扫衣者才有衣的产生。“在咖提那成就的界内”是就近行界而说。应知,由于位于近行界者可分得亡者衣等,而结界内并无此种产生,故此处意指近行界。谁得咖提那敷展?即谁成就?有五人成就。因为咖提那布施主,最少有四人,一人为受者。在《瞻波犍度》中说:“诸比丘,若此四众比丘僧,除三种僧羯磨——授具足戒、自恣、出罪。”故应理解为“非五众所应作”。有人说:“僧团将咖提那布给予某人时,即便不置于伸手范围内,或立于界外者,亦可给予。”然必须置于伸手范围内方可给予。何以故?因为“他已达到堪显示巴利原文
306.‘‘Kathinanti pañcānisaṃse antokaraṇasamatthatāya thiranti attho’’ti likhitaṃ. ‘‘Pañca kappantī’’ti avatvā ‘‘kappissantī’’ti anāgatavacanaṃ ‘‘vo’’ti imassa sāmivacanapakkhe yujjati tesaṃ tasmiṃ khaṇe anatthatakathinattā. Dvīsu panetesu atthavikappesu pacchimo yutto sabbesampi tesaṃ pāveyyakānaṃ sabbadhutaṅgadharattā. Nimantanaṃ sādiyantasseva hi anāmantacāro paññatto, tathā gaṇabhojanaṃ. Asamādānacāro anadhiṭṭhitaticīvarassa natthi atecīvarikassa yāvadatthacīvaracatutthādicīvaraggahaṇasambhavato. Itarassāpi anadhiṭṭhānamukhena labbhati. Cīvaruppādo apaṃsukūlikasseva. ‘‘Kathinatthatasīmāya’’nti upacārasīmaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Upacārasīmaṭṭhassa matakacīvarādibhāgiyatāya baddhasīmāya tatruppādābhāvato viññeyyametaṃ upacārasīmāvettha adhippetāti. Kathinatthāraṃ ke labhantīti ke sādhentīti attho. Pañca janā sādhenti. Kathinadussassa hi dāyakā pacchimakoṭiyā cattāro honti. Eko paṭiggāhakoti. ‘‘Tatra ce, bhikkhave, yvāyaṃ catuvaggo bhikkhusaṅgho ṭhapetvā tīṇi kammāni upasampadaṃ pavāraṇaṃ abbhāna’’nti (mahāva. 388) campeyyakkhandhake vuttattā ‘‘na pañcavaggakaraṇīya’’nti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Yassa saṅgho kathinadussaṃ deti, taṃ hatthapāse akatvāpi bahisīmāya ṭhitassapi dātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ hatthapāse katvā eva dātabbaṃ. Kasmā? ‘‘Tassa kammappattattā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tatruppādena taṇḍulādinā vatthesu cetāpitesu atthatakathinānameva tāni vatthāni pāpuṇanti. Vatthehi pana taṇḍulādīsu cetāpitesu sabbesaṃ tāni pāpuṇantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Paṭhamapavāraṇāya pavāritā labhantīti idaṃ ukkaṭṭhakoṭiyā vuttaṃ. Antarāyena appavāritānampi vutthavassānaṃ kathinatthārasambhavato itare gaṇapūrake katvā kathinaṃ attharitabbanti kathaṃ paññāyatīti ce? ‘‘Dvinnaṃ puggalānaṃ atthataṃ hoti kathinaṃ atthārakassa ca anumodakassa cā’’ti (pari. 403) parivāre ekavacanakaraṇato, tattheva ‘‘saṅghassa atthataṃ hoti kathinaṃ, gaṇassa puggalassa atthataṃ hoti kathina’’nti (pari. 414) vacanato ca.
“住于其他寺院者,纵已安居,亦不得。”这是指同一界内,还是不同界内?此处有何义理?若在同一界内,则与后文注疏所言相违:“若同一界内有众多寺院,应集合所有比丘于一处敷展咖提那,不得各别敷展。”因为此语表明所有人共一次咖提那敷展。若在不同界内,则与乌巴难达的“同一意乐”之许可相违,因为世尊曾说:“诸比丘,予彼愚人同一意乐。”此语显示他在两个住处皆能成就咖提那敷展。应求彼此无违,因为未被遮止。是故,应知其意趣为:无论同一界或不同界,若近行界有别,住于其他寺院者,纵已安居,亦不得。有人说:“于后自恣日受具足戒者,亦得于初自恣日自恣,且成为安居者并获得利益,故允许沙弥入安居,沙弥亦得咖提那利益。”显示巴利原文
Aññasmiṃvihāre vutthavassāpi na labhantīti idaṃ kiṃ ekasīmasmiṃ, udāhu nānāsīmasminti? Kiñcettha – yadi tāva ekasīmasmiṃ, parato ‘‘sace pana ekasīmāya bahū vihārā honti, sabbe bhikkhū sannipātetvā ekattha kathinaṃ attharitabbaṃ, visuṃ visuṃ attharituṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti iminā aṭṭhakathāvacanena virujjhati. Idañhi vacanaṃ sabbesaṃyeva eko kathinatthāroti dīpeti. Atha nānāsīmasmiṃ, upanandassa ekādhippāyadānānumatiyā virujjhati. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘detha, bhikkhave, moghapurisassa ekādhippāya’’nti (mahāva. 364). Idañhi vacanaṃ dvīsupi āvāsesu tassa kathinatthārasiddhiṃ dīpetīti. Avirodhova icchitabbo appaṭisiddhattā, tasmā ekasīmasmiṃ vā nānāsīmasmiṃ vā nānūpacāre aññasmiṃ vihāre vutthavassāpi na labhantīti adhippāyo veditabbo. ‘‘Pacchimikāya upasampanno paṭhamapavāraṇāya pavāretumpi labhati, vassiko ca hoti ānisaṃsañca labhatīti sāmaṇerānaṃ vassūpagamanaṃ anuññātaṃ hoti, sāmaṇerā kathinānisaṃsaṃ labhantī’’ti vadanti.
“足以成就三衣中任何一种”——此语看似与圣典“咖提那非仅由僧伽帝、郁多罗僧、安陀会而敷展”相违。因为这段圣典显示:若缺三衣中任何一种,咖提那即未敷展。是否如此?并非如此,因了知其目的故。世尊宣说此圣典,并非意在表明“若缺三衣中任何一种,咖提那即未敷展”。若非如此,则不应说“非仅由僧伽帝、郁多罗僧、安陀会”。是否如此?并非如此,因了知其意趣故。其意趣为:若有人欲以僧伽帝敷展,则离僧伽帝即未敷展,其余二者亦同此理。正因如此,在白分中,以“以僧伽帝敷展”等方式,唯说了一种衣。如是,应知“以二十四种相,咖提那未敷展;以十七种相,咖提那已敷展”是随宜以最高标准而说。因此,应知黑分中之意趣为:所列……界外随喜等二十四种相,若全部具足,固然未敷展;即使仅具其中一种,如以相所作等,若彼不成就,咖提那亦未敷展。白分中亦应知意趣为:未割截衣、已割截衣……界内随喜等十七种相,若全部具足,固然已敷展;即使仅具其中一种,其余全不具足,咖提那亦已敷展。若不如此,彼此便有矛盾,应随其所宜配合而解。显示巴利原文
Tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññatarappahonakanti idaṃ ‘‘na aññatra saṅghāṭiyā uttarāsaṅgena antaravāsakena atthataṃ hoti kathina’’nti imāya pāḷiyā virujjhanaṃ viya dissati. Ayañhi pāḷi tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataravirahenāpi na atthataṃ hoti kathinanti dīpetīti ce? Na, tadatthajānanato, na tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataravirahena na atthataṃ hoti kathinanti hi dīpetukāmo bhagavā taṃ pāḷimāha. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘aññatra saṅghāṭiyā uttarāsaṅgena antaravāsakenā’’ti na vattabbā siyāti ce? Na, adhippāyajānanatova. Yo saṅghāṭiyā attharitukāmo, tassa aññatra saṅghāṭiyā na atthataṃ hoti. Esa nayo itaratthāpīti ayamettha adhippāyo. Teneva sukkapakkhe ‘‘saṅghāṭiyā atthataṃ hotī’’tiādinā nayena ekameva cīvaraṃ vuttaṃ, evaṃ sante ‘‘catuvīsatiyā ākārehi anatthataṃ hoti kathinaṃ, sattarasahi ākārehi atthataṃ hoti kathina’’nti yathārahaṃ ukkaṭṭhakoṭiyā vuttanti veditabbaṃ, tasmā kaṇhapakkhe ullikhita…pe… nissīmaṭṭhānumodanānaṃ catuvīsatiyā ākārānaṃ sambhavantānaṃ sabbena sabbaṃ abhāvenapi nimittakatādīnaṃ asambhavantānaṃ aññatarabhāvenapi na atthataṃ hoti kathinanti evamadhippāyo veditabbo. Sukkapakkhepi ahatāhatakappa…pe… sīmaṭṭhānumodanānaṃ sattarasannaṃ ākārānaṃ sambhavantānaṃ aññatarabhāvenapi itaresaṃ sabbena sabbaṃ abhāvenapi atthataṃ hoti kathinanti evamadhippāyo veditabbo. Aññathā aññamaññavirodho, yathāsambhavaṃ yojetvā veditabbo.
此处略示纲要:在黑分中,依“以郁多罗僧敷展咖提那衣时,并非单由僧伽梨、亦非单由安陀会而敷展”的语量,彼咖提那衣应视为未敷展。在白分中,依“以无相所作而敷展咖提那衣”的语量,若由无相所作敷展咖提那衣,纵使广作陈述,咖提那衣仍算已敷展。此二种看似相违,若依前文之理通达其意趣,则此矛盾可消,应如此了知。显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ mukhamattanidassanaṃ – kaṇhapakkhe ‘‘uttarāsaṅgena atthate kathine na aññatra saṅghāṭiyā na aññatra antaravāsakena atthataṃ hoti kathina’’nti vacanappamāṇato taṃ kathinaṃ anatthataṃ siyā. Sukkapakkhe ca ‘‘animittakatena atthataṃ hoti kathina’’nti vacanappamāṇato animittakatena kathine atthate tañce parikathā kataṃ, tathāpi atthatameva kathinaṃ hotīti ayaṃ duvidhopi virodho. Yathāvuttanayena adhippāye gahite parihāro hotīti veditabbaṃ.
“他给予众多利益”这句话,看似显露出对利养的贪求,然而世尊却通过“随其所需寻求衣”的制定开了一条方便之门,实为扶持僧团。有记载说:“‘不能不做’──对于因轻慢而不做者,犯恶作。”在“我们随喜”这一句中,是依总摄的方式而说的。据说《大注》中说:“应单独说‘我随喜’,否则便不合宜。”在决意咖提那衣之后,仅说“我以此僧伽梨衣敷展咖提那衣”一语,即成为该比丘已敷展。有记载说:“然而,甘马语只要一种便有效,这是指仅对咖提那布料作甘马语,对其余衣物的布施只是告知,这便是它的含义。”“在同一界内”的意思是同一近行界内,此义合理。然而有些人说:“所指的是结界界。在同一界内、同一处所敷展时,即于一切处皆成已敷展,因为说‘一切比丘聚集后’,即使由他们随喜,也已算敷展。在按近行界划分的范围内,于各处所得之物,应由各处的比丘获得。即使进入该处者也应获得,因为一切比丘都已敷展,这便是差别之处。据说《大注》中也是如此说的。”对此应当审察。显示巴利原文
Yo ānisaṃsaṃ bahuṃ detīti iminā paccayalolabhāvaṃ viya dīpeti, tathāpi bhagavatā yāvadatthacīvarapariyesanapaññāpanamukhena dvāraṃ dinnanti katvā saṅghānuggahatthaṃ hoti. ‘‘Akātuṃ na hotīti anādariyena akarontassa dukkaṭa’’nti likhitaṃ. Anumodāmāti ettha sabbasaṅgāhikavasena evaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Anumodāmī’’ti ekakena vattabbaṃ, itarathā ‘‘na vaṭṭatī’’ti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ kira vuttaṃ. Kathinacīvaraṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā ‘‘imāya saṅghāṭiyā kathinaṃ attharāmī’’ti vācāya bhinnamattāya puggalassa atthataṃ hoti. ‘‘Kammavācā pana ekāyeva vaṭṭatīti kathinadussassa eva kammavācā, sesacīvaradāne apalokanamevāti attho’’ti likhitaṃ. Ekasīmāyāti ekaupacārasīmāyāti attho yujjati. Keci pana ‘‘baddhasīmā adhippetā ekasīmāya ekaṭṭhāne attharite sabbattha attharitaṃ hoti ‘sabbe bhikkhū sannipatitvā’ti vuttattā, tehipi anumodantehi attharitameva hoti, upacāraparicchinne tattha tattha laddhaṃ tehi tehi laddhabbaṃ hoti. Tattha paviṭṭhehipi labhitabbaṃ sabbehipi attharitattā, ayaṃ viseso. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyampi evameva vutta’’nti vadanti, vīmaṃsitabbaṃ.
308 308. 由于具备二十四种行相,故为大所缘地。有记载说:“‘长缝’是指后来所作的缝纫,或指折叠后缝纫。”所谓“痒处”,是指先前的绑缚。其意是:见到咖提那布料薄弱,欲将其与自身坚固的常衣缝合,做成双层后缝纫者,由于常衣比咖提那布料大,故先将其按尺寸比例在绑缚痒处缝合,用线绑好后作成,这称为“第一衬布已缝合放置”。应知这是为了显示:在咖提那衣未得时,先绑缚的布是内衬布,此说见于《大筏》和《小筏》,仅在文句上有差异,义理上并无不同,故作此说。有记载说:“若问‘以此显示什么?’——或许有人会想:‘如此作成的双层衣,由于常衣较大,只算作常衣之数,不算作咖提那衣之数。’不应如此看待。即使处于内衬布状态,它仍是咖提那衣。即使那常衣较大,它仍是自己的咖提那衣。由于最低限度需具备五条,欲将咖提那布料切成许多碎片后缝纫者,从咖提那衣取一条布,缝到另一件非咖提那衣上。”或者,许多咖提那布料是粪扫衣,细小的为作一件衣之用,大块的为补不足之用而施与。比丘从咖提那衣中,取一部分布条,缝到另一件衣上。在此有问:那些粪扫衣的咖提那布料,是应施与可作为决意对象的最后者,还是细小的也应施与?在此,由于细小的不算作衣,故不应施与。有些人说:“甘马语在那里不生效。”由于在圣典中有“以粪扫衣而敷展”的理趣开许,以及在注释中,通过认可处于内衬布状态的咖提那布料,以其自性虽不可决意,但以旧衣的状态,即使是可决意者,也认可其为咖提那衣,故细小的也可以施与。有些人说:“因为敷展咖提那者将把它们缝合起来作成咖提那衣,所以允许。”应采纳更为合理之说。显示巴利原文
308. Catuvīsati ākāravantatāya mahābhūmikaṃ. ‘‘Dīghasibbitanti pacchākatasibbanaṃ, ovaṭṭitvā sibbanaṃ vā’’ti likhitaṃ. Kaṇḍusaṃ nāma pubbabandhanaṃ. Paṭhamacimilikā ghaṭetvā ṭhapitā hotīti kathinadussaṃ dubbalaṃ disvā taṃ balavatā attano pakatidussena saddhiṃ ghaṭetvā dupaṭṭaṃ katvā sibbitukāmehi kathinadussato pakatidussassa mahantatāya paṭhamaṃ tappamāṇānurūpaṃ bandhakaṇḍuse ghaṭetvā rajjukehi bandhitvā kataṃ hotīti adhippāyo. Kathinacīvarassa appatāya paṭhamaṃ baddhadussaṃ kucchicimilikā hoti, mahāpaccariyaṃ, kurundiyañca vuttavacananidassanaṃ, byañjane eva bhedo, atthe natthīti dassanatthaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Iminā kiṃ dīpetīti ce? Tathākataṃ dupaṭṭacīvaraṃ pakaticīvarassa mahantatāya pakaticīvarasaṅkhyameva gacchati, na kathinacīvarasaṅkhyanti kassaci siyā, nevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ kucchicimilikabhāvena ṭhitampi kathinacīvaraṃ. Mahantampi taṃ pakaticīvaraṃ attano kathinacīvaramevāti. Heṭṭhimakoṭiyā pañcakassa icchitabbattā kathinadussaṃ khaṇḍākhaṇḍaṃ bahudhā chinditvā sibbitukāmo kathinacīvarato paṭṭaṃ gahetvā aññasmiṃ akathinacīvare paṭṭamāropetī’’ti likhitaṃ. Atha vā bahūni kathinadussāni paṃsukūlāni khuddakakhuddakāni ekacīvaratthāya, mahantāni ca ūnatthāya dinnāni honti. Kathinacīvaratoti bhikkhu ekaccato kathinacīvarato paṭṭaṃ gahetvā aññasmiṃ āropeti. Etthāha – kiṃ paṃsukūlāni kathinadussāni vikappanupagapacchimāni dātabbāni, udāhu khuddakānipīti? Ettha acīvarasaṅkhyattā khuddakāni dātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Kammavācā tattha na ruhatīti eke. ‘‘Paṃsukūlena atthataṃ hotī’’ti pāḷiyaṃ nayadānato kucchicimilikabhāvena ṭhitassa kathinadussassa attano sabhāvena anadhiṭṭhānupagassa purāṇacīvarabhāveneva adhiṭṭhānārahassapi kathinacīvarabhāvānumatimukhena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ padānato ca khuddakānipi dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Tañhi kathinatthārako ghaṭetvā kathinacīvaraṃ karissatīti katvā kappatīti eke, yuttataraṃ gahetabbaṃ.
蓄藏与储存,因归属僧团,由僧团所作。由于过夜必须舍出,故称为“应舍”。以五片布条为其量者,称为“五条”;或以此量或更多,是其义。“即日裁剪”指僧团为敷展咖提那者诵出甘马语后所给予的,必须即日裁剪、作成圆整。因为如此给予者,在《附随》中说“前行以七法所摄”,并非施主所施,因此若施主将已完成前行的布施与僧团,接受后应以甘马语给予。并且应在同一界场内决意、敷展后,令僧团随喜,因为已完成前行者无需再作。正是针对敷展者手中的布,才说“非仅以划线”等。若已完成前行,是否仍需再次洗涤、拆线重作,以言教为准?不,因为已裁剪者不可能再次裁剪。若说“必须在其他地方裁剪”?不,因为在出家篇中,依“令剃除须发”的言教为准,若对已剃发的秃头者寻得头发置于头上,再令剃除后出家,则有过失。若说“此处以‘非’字遮止”?不,因为以“非僧伽帝衣”的“非”字遮止,若以郁多罗僧衣敷展,则成为未敷展,有非所愿的过失。因此不应固执。即便说“立于界外近行处”,亦应采纳前文所述的判断。显示巴利原文
Nicayasannidhi saṅghāyattā saṅghena katattā. Rattātikkantaṃ nissajjitabbattā ‘‘nissaggiya’’nti vuccati. Pañca khaṇḍāni paṭṭāni pamāṇaṃ assāti pañcakaṃ. Tena vā atirittena vāti attho. Tadaheva sañchinnenāti saṅghena kathinatthārakassa kammavācaṃ vatvā dinneneva tadaheva sañchinnena samaṇḍalikatena bhavitabbaṃ. Evaṃ dinnaṃyeva hi parivāre ‘‘pubbakaraṇaṃ sattahi dhammehi saṅgahita’’nti vuttaṃ, na dāyakena diyyamānaṃ, tasmā pariniṭṭhitapubbakaraṇameva ce dāyako saṅghassa deti, sampaṭicchitvā kammavācāya dātabbaṃ. Tena ca tasmiṃyeva sīmāmaṇḍale adhiṭṭhahitvā attharitvā saṅgho anumodāpetabbo katapubbakaraṇassa puna kattabbābhāvato. Atthārakassa hatthagatameva hi sandhāya ‘‘na ullikhitamattenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pariniṭṭhitapubbakaraṇampi puna dhovitvā visibbitvā kātabbameva vacanapamāṇatoti ce? Na, chinnassa puna chedāsambhavato. Aññasmiṃ ṭhāne chinditabbamevāti ce? Na, pabbajjādhikāre ‘‘kesamassuṃ ohārāpetvā’’ti vacanappamāṇato muṇḍikassa chinnepi kese pariyesitvā sirasmiṃ ṭhapetvā puna ohārāpetvā pabbājetabbappasaṅgato, na idha na-kārena paṭisiddhattāti ce? Na, ‘‘na aññatra saṅghāṭiyā’’ti na-kārena paṭisiddhattā uttarāsaṅgena atthate anatthataṃ hotīti aniṭṭhappasaṅgato, tasmā abhiniveso na kātabbo. ‘‘Bahiupacārasīmāya ṭhito’’ti vuttattāpi pubbe vuttavinicchayova gahetabbo.
309 关于“以非积蓄方式,敷展咖提那衣已完成”这句话,应当审察:两种积蓄是否仅指咖提那敷展月内?还是亦包括此前?施主何时可以布施?仅于咖提那敷展月内,抑或亦包括此前?即使在敷展月内,能否说“我为了在某日敷展而布施”?两种积蓄仅指敷展月内。施主亦不可如布施雨安居衣那般,指定布施咖提那衣。何以故?注释书以“咖提那布施者有义务”等方式说过。若以为这只是最高标准呢?并非如此,因为说过“名为咖提那者,唯最高标准方许”。若以为这并非针对到来而说呢?并非如此,这也是针对到来而说,之前布施者不许。显示巴利原文
309.Asannidhikatena atthataṃ hoti kathinanti ettha kiṃ kathinatthāramāseyeva duvidhopi sannidhi adhippeto, udāhu tato pubbepi, dāyakena vā kadā dātabbaṃ, kiṃ kathinatthāramāseyeva, udāhu tato pubbepi, kathinatthāramāsepi asukasmiṃ divaseyeva atthāratthāya dammīti dātuṃ vaṭṭati na vaṭṭatīti idaṃ vicāretabbaṃ. Kathinatthāramāse eva duvidhopi sannidhi. Dāyakenāpi vassāvāsikaṃ viya kathinacīvaraṃ uddissa dinnaṃ na vaṭṭati. Kasmā? ‘‘Kathinadāyakassa vattaṃ atthī’’tiādinā (mahāva. aṭṭha. 306) nayena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttattā. Ukkaṭṭhamattametanti ce? Na, ‘‘kathinaṃ nāma atiukkaṭṭhaṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 308) vuttattā. Na āgamanaṃ sandhāya vuttanti ce? Na, idampi āgamanameva sandhāya vuttaṃ, pubbe dinnaṃ na vaṭṭatīti.
310 “咖提那的”即咖提那敷展。“为出起”意为平息、不转起。若问:显示这些出起有何目的?为了通过显示五种无犯的时间界限,令比丘们于此界限内生起防护。否则,因于分别中说“所谓衣时,未敷展咖提那时为雨安居最后一月,已敷展咖提那时为五月”,恐会生起邪执,认为即使无有中间离去等出起,于五月中亦皆无犯。由此当知,他会将犯戒领域执为无犯领域,从而犯下诸罪,并对其他比丘造成利养障碍。显示巴利原文
310.Kathinassāti kathinatthārassa. Ubbhārāyāti vūpasamāya, appavattiyāti attho. Kimatthiyaṃ ubbhāranidassananti ce? Pañcahi anāpattikālapariyantadassanena tesu saṃvaruppādanatthaṃ. Aññathā ‘‘cīvarakālasamayo nāma anatthate kathine vassānassa pacchimo māso, atthate kathine pañca māsā’’ti (pārā. 649) vibhaṅge vuttattā antarāpakkamanantikādiubbhārābhāvepi pañcahi pañcasu māsesu anāpattiyevāti micchāgāho siyā . Tato āpattikhette anāpattikhettasaññāya taṃ taṃ āpattiṃ āpajjati, itaresañca bhikkhūnaṃ lābhantarāyaṃ karotīti veditabbaṃ.
取七事论注释显示巴利原文
Ādāyasattakakathāvaṇṇanā
311 在决了边际中,两种障碍一并断除,这是依此处与《附随》注释书所说,契合此《犍度》正文,因为二者皆已放下了责任。此乃是就“这在界外所说的决了边际”而言。然而《附随》中说:“有四种咖提那出起:于界内出起、于界外出起,即决了边际、决了边际、无有边际、期望断绝。”其中,“于界外出起的决了边际”,即如此处所示之法。何谓“于界内出起的决了边际”?若比丘持未成之衣,心想“我不再回来”而离去,所到之处不得安适,还归原寺,其衣障仍存。当其“我不再作此衣”之念生起时,障碍即断,故于界内出起。因此,有两种决了边际。此义载于《古代结文》,是合理的。若非如此,则于界内以“我不再作此衣”而转起的出起,便无从归入其余出起,而成多余。“越界者”指越过衣时界限者。在有出起的情况下,衣障似先断除,然实际上因对作衣尚存期待,犹在精进,故依《附随》的意趣,说为“两种障碍非前非后,同时断除”。由“已作衣者”之说,此处不适用。显示巴利原文
311.Sanniṭṭhānantike dvepi palibodhā ekato chijjantīti idha, parivāraṭṭhakathāyañca vuttaṃ imissā khandhakapāḷiyā sameti ekato ubhinnampi dhuranikkhepassa katattā. ‘‘Idaṃ bahisīmāyameva vuttaṃ sanniṭṭhānantikaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ parivāre ‘cattāro kathinuddhārā siyā antosīmāya uddhariyyanti, siyā bahisīmāya uddhariyyanti, niṭṭhānantiko sanniṭṭhānantiko nāsanantiko āsāvacchediko’ti (pari. 416). Tattha bahisīmāya sanniṭṭhānantiko uddhariyyatīti idha dassitanayova. Kathaṃ antosīmāya sanniṭṭhānantiko? Akatacīvaramādāya ‘na paccessa’nti gato, gatagataṭṭhāne phāsuvihāraṃ alabhanto tameva vihāraṃ āgacchati, tassa cīvarapalibodho ṭhito. So ca ‘nevimaṃ cīvaraṃ kāressa’nti citte uppannamatte chijjati, tasmā antosīmāya uddhariyyati, tasmā duvidho sanniṭṭhānantiko’’ti porāṇagaṇṭhipade likhitaṃ, taṃ yuttaṃ, aññathā antosīmāya ‘‘nevimaṃ cīvaraṃ kāressa’’nti pavattaubbhāro itaresu samodhānaṃ na gacchatīti atiritto siyā. Sīmātikkantikoti cīvarakālasīmātikkantiko. Saubbhāre cīvarapalibodho paṭhamaṃ chijjanto viya khāyati, atha kho sāpekkhatāya cīvarakaraṇe saussāhova hotīti lesaṃ sandhāya parivāravasena ‘‘dve palibodhā apubbaṃ acarimaṃ chijjantī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 311) vuttaṃ. ‘‘Katacīvaro’’ti vuttattā idha na sambhavati.
316 若比丘不留下任何自用资具而离去,即称“取持而去”。诸《结文》皆载:“于咖提那出起中,并无差别。仅为因人开遮之不同而显示,故说取持等项。”然在此处,则应审察因人而异的用意所在。因无离去边际,故而说“随其所能”。若问:即使在衣未成时,以放下责任的方式,离去边际亦可发生,是否因此也应说离去边际项?并非如此,因为这会与决了边际的特征相混淆。而且,衣未成者亦无闻边际。显示巴利原文
316. Sabbaṃ attano parikkhāraṃ anavasesetvā pakkamanto ‘‘samādāya pakkamatī’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Kathinuddhāre viseso natthi. Puggalādhippāyavisesena kevalaṃ vāradassanatthaṃ samādāyavārā vuttā’’ti sabbesu gaṇṭhipadesu likhitaṃ. Idha pana puggalādhippāyena payojanaṃ vīmaṃsitabbaṃ. Pakkamanantikassa abhāvā ‘‘yathāsambhava’’nti vuttaṃ. Vippakatepi dhuranikkhepavasena pakkamanantikatā sambhavati, tasmā pakkamanantikavāropi vattabboti ce? Na, sanniṭṭhānantikalakkhaṇappasaṅgato. Akatacīvarassa na savanantikatā ca.
此处从最初开始,即分句的分别:未受持分有七,已受持分亦七,如是即成两种七段。其次,除去离去边际,衣未成者的未受持分与已受持分,即成两种六段。此后,依已定、决了、灭尽分而显示三种三分。其中,第一三分于内界生起“他将不至”时,未触及此规定,唯于外界生起“他将不至”,故离去边际与越界分于此并不相应。“断望分虽可生起,然依所述之理而未说”。第二三分于内界生起“他将不至”,此处虽可有离去边际,然因断衣障者正是其所指,故未说——此为古师注疏所说。于一切十五分中,皆唯指衣未成者,此是理则。若可受持者未受持,则无决了分。若余法已决了,则无灭尽分——古师作此说。第三三分以“未受持”一词为简别而转起,其义与第一三分一致。此即其显义之用。由于此三种义理差别能以此三种咖提那衣之收摄而显示,故依一关联将其结合。否则,第一三分将成六段,如同十五分末之六段。第三三分之后生起的第四三分,依“内界‘他将至’”此说之差别而生起。如此结合时,为与其余听闻分等不相违之次第,故应知第四三分不生,而成六段。如是,三分与一六分。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya vāravibhāvanā – ādāyavārā satta, tathā samādāyavārāti dve sattakavārā. Tato pakkamanantikaṃ vajjetvā vippakatacīvarassa ādāyavārā, samādāyavārā cāti dve chakkavārā. Tato paraṃ niṭṭhānasanniṭṭhānanāsanantikānaṃ vasena tīṇi tikāni dassitāni, tattha paṭhamattikaṃ antosīmāya ‘‘na paccessa’’nti imaṃ vidhiṃ anāmasitvā bahisīmāyaṃ eva ‘‘na paccessa’’nti pavattaṃ, tasmā pakkamanantikasīmātikkantikasaubbhārā tattha na yujjanti. ‘‘Āsāvacchediko sambhavantopi yathāvuttakāraṇena na vutto. Dutiyattikaṃ antosīmāya ‘na paccessa’nti pavattaṃ, ettha kiñcāpi pakkamanantiko sambhavati, tathāpi yehi cīvarapalibodho chijjati, tesaṃyevādhippetattā na vutto’’ti porāṇagaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Sabbasmimpi pannarasake vippakatacīvarassevādhippetattāti takko. Adhiṭṭhānupage ca vippakate sati na niṭṭhānantiko. Niṭṭhānāvasese sati na nāsanantikoti porāṇā. Tatiyattikaṃ anadhiṭṭhita-padena visesetvā pavattaṃ, atthato paṭhamattikena sameti. Tassa atthadassanapayojanaṃ kira taṃ. Yasmā ime tayo atthavikappā imehi eva tīhi kathinuddhārehi sakkā dassetuṃ, tasmā imeva yojitā ekasambandhavasena, aññathā paṭhamattikaṃ chakkaṃ bhaveyya imassa pannarasakassa ante chakkaṃ viya. Tatiyattikānantaraṃ catutthattikaṃ sambhavantaṃ ‘‘antosīmāyaṃ ‘paccessa’’nti vacanavisesena sambhavati. Tathā ca yojiyamānaṃ itarehi savanantikādīhi aviruddhakkamaṃ hoti, tasmā catutthattikaṃ ahutvā chakkaṃ jātanti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ tīṇi tikāni ekaṃ chakkañcāti paṭhamaṃ pannarasakaṃ veditabbaṃ. Idāni idameva pannarasakaṃ upasaggavisesena dutiyaṃ samādāyapannarasakaṃ nāma kataṃ. Puna vippakatacīvaraṃ ādāyāti tatiyaṃ pannarasakaṃ, samādāyāti catutthaṃ pannarasakaṃ dassitaṃ. Evaṃ cattāri pannarasakāni veditabbāni . Tattha paṭhamadutiyesu pannarasakesu sabbena sabbaṃ akatacīvaraṃ adhippetaṃ, itaresu dvīsu vippakatanti yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Pubbe nibaddhaṭṭhāne cīvarāsāya gahetabbaṃ, aññattha na vaṭṭati. Upacchinnāya ce cīvarāsāya cīvaraṃ uppannaṃ, na taṃ cīvarapalibodhaṃ karotī’’ti porāṇagaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Nissaggiyesu tatiyakathine āgatacīvarapaccāsā idha cīvarāsāti takko. Yattha cīvarāsā, taṃ ṭhānaṃ adhikaraṇūpacārena ‘‘cīvarāsā’’tveva vuccatīti katvā ‘‘taṃ cīvarāsaṃ payirupāsatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tasmā anāsāya labhatīti anāsāyitaṭṭhāne labhatītiādinā attho gahetabbo. Ettha niṭṭhānasanniṭṭhānanāsanaāsāvacchedikavasena eko vāroti idamekaṃ catukkaṃ jātaṃ, tasmā pubbe vuttāni tīṇi tikāni āsāvacchedikādhikāni tīṇi catukkānīti ekaṃ anāsāyadvādasakanti veditabbaṃ. Tadanantare āsāyadvādasake kiñcāpi paṭhamadvādasakkamo labbhati, tathāpi taṃ nibbisesanti tamekaṃ dvādasakaṃ avuttasiddhaṃ katvā visesato dassetuṃ ādito paṭṭhāya ‘‘antosīmāya paccessa’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ dutiyacatukke ‘‘so bahisīmagato suṇātī’’tiādivacanassa tatiyacatukke savanantikādīnañca okāsakaraṇatthanti veditabbaṃ. Idaṃ pana dvādasakaṃ anāsāya vasena labbhamānampi iminā avuttasiddhaṃ katvā na dassitanti veditabbaṃ. Evamettha dve dvādasakāni uddharitāni. Karaṇīyadvādasakepi yathādassitaanāsāyadvādasakaṃ, avuttasiddhaṃ āsāyadvādasakañcāti dve dvādasakāni uddharitabbāni. Idāni disaṃgamikanavakaṃ hoti. Tattha yasmā ‘‘disaṃgamiko pakkamatī’’ti vacaneneva ‘‘na paccessa’’nti idaṃ avuttasiddhameva, tasmā taṃ na vuttaṃ. Ettāvatā āvāsapalibodhābhāvo dassito.
321 “不放弃衣之分”这句话,是表明他具足衣障。“分”,指自己应得的衣份;“不放弃”,即心中希望。若他得衣,在雨安居的住处,依“决定”、“已决定”、“灭尽”这三项,构成一组三分;同样依这三项,于中途构成另一组三分;于前往的住处,又构成一组三分——由此三组三分,应知共为九分。此后,依“决定”、“已决定”、“灭尽”的越界分施设,说为“安乐住”五分。在两种住处,剩下的咖提那衣明显不会生起。而这五分的差别在于:已受持的那一分不生,因为“他将至”是指他还会返回。显示巴利原文
321. ‘‘Cīvarapaṭivīsaṃ apavilāyamāno’’ti iminā cīvarapalibodhasamaṅgitamassa dasseti. Paṭivīsoti attano pattabbo cīvarabhāgo. Apavilāyamānoti ākaṅkhamāno. Tassa cīvaralābhe sati vassaṃvutthāvāse niṭṭhānasanniṭṭhānanāsanantikānaṃ vasena ekaṃ tikaṃ, tesaṃyeva vasena antarāmagge ekaṃ, gataṭṭhāne ekanti tiṇṇaṃ tikānaṃ vasena ekaṃ navakaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tato paraṃ niṭṭhānasanniṭṭhānanāsananti kasīmātikkantikasaubbhārānaṃ vasena phāsuvihārapañcakaṃ vuttaṃ. Ubhayattha sesakathinuddhārāsambhavo pākaṭova. Ayaṃ panettha pañcake viseso – samādāyavāro na sambhavati ‘‘paccessa’’nti paccāgamanādhippāyato.
325 “诸比丘,这些是咖提那衣的障碍”,即是咖提那衣展布的随系缘。显示巴利原文
325.Dveme bhikkhave kathinassa palibodhāti kathinatthārassa anupabandhanapaccayāti.
八、衣篇注释显示巴利原文
8. Cīvarakkhandhakavaṇṇanā
耆婆事注释显示巴利原文
Jīvakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
326 “王舍城者”,指住在王舍城的人。显示巴利原文
326.Rājagahakoti rājagahavāsī.
328 因为不愚钝,他不久便通达了才智。‘我是你的父亲’,这是什么意义呢?因为你是我抚养长大的。显示巴利原文
328. Amohajātikattā na cirasseva viññutaṃ pāpuṇi. Ahaṃ te pitā, kenaṭṭhena? Yasmā tvaṃ mayā posāpito.
329 ‘Sakke vissaṭṭhamatte’是原文,而在第八学处中,正是‘vissaṭṭhamattova’。显示巴利原文
329. ‘‘Sakke vissaṭṭhamatte’’ti pāṭho, aṭṭhamasikkhāpade vissaṭṭhamattova.
《帕焦达王事》的解说。显示巴利原文
Pajjotarājavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
334 对于‘坐下进食者’一词,此处他们说:“《法句》中说‘于城外见到后’,因此,他在两天所得的食物中各取其一,两部注疏都如此说,所以是合理的。”显示巴利原文
334.Bhuñjituṃ nisinnassāti ettha ‘‘dhammapade ‘bahinagare disvā’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā dvīsu divasesu dinnaṃ tena tesu ekekaṃ gahetvā dvīsu aṭṭhakathāsu vuttanti yujjatī’’ti vadanti.
《三十种泻药事》的解说。显示巴利原文
Samattiṃsavirecanakathāvaṇṇanā
336 “一口一口地”:在此,尽管(食物)被投入了糖等之中,但那是世尊自己受用的,所以没有过失。显示巴利原文
336.Kabaḷe kabaḷeti ettha kiñcāpi guḷādīsu pakkhittaṃ, taṃ pana bhagavāva paribhuñji, tasmā natthi doso.
《乞求选择事》的解说。显示巴利原文
Varayācanakathāvaṇṇanā
337 名为“大背毯”者,据说是一种花朵超过四指长的毯子。显示巴利原文
337.Mahāpiṭṭhiyakojavaṃ nāma atirekacaturaṅgulapupphaṃ kira.
《允许毯子等事》的解说。显示巴利原文
Kambalānujānanādikathāvaṇṇanā
340 “在附近”:指在墓地的附近。有些人说,在(墓地)外面也是可以的。他们展示了制定规约的方式后,说:“若有人先表示‘我的所有物,既是你的,也是我的’,而另一人也作了同样的表示,这样便是合适的。”这是关于同等资具的做法。显示巴利原文
340.Upacāreti susānassa upacāre. Bahipi vaṭṭatīti eke. Katikakaraṇaṃ dassetvā ‘‘mayhaṃ santakaṃ tava ca mama ca hotūti vatvā itarena ca tathāvutte vaṭṭatī’’ti samānaparikkhāravidhiṃ vadanti.
342 据说:“由于曾有‘即使在界片内亦可作羯磨’的说法,因此其余的僧事也可以坐在那里进行。”据说洲民们说:“若是这样,便如同偷盗所作一般,所以是不可以的。”他们说:“因为被偷盗所执取,所以不能获得,《卧坐具犍度》中所出的经文就是证据。”因此,应知依他们的见解,这是不共的特征。显示巴利原文
342. ‘‘Khaṇḍasīmāyapi sammannituṃ vaṭṭatīti vuttattā sesakammānipi tattha nisīditvā kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ sante corikāya katasadisaṃ hoti , tasmā na vaṭṭatī’’ti dīpavāsino vadanti kira. ‘‘Corikāya gahitattā na pāpuṇātīti senāsanakkhandhake āgatasuttañca sādhaka’’nti vadanti, tasmā tesaṃ matena idaṃ āveṇikalakkhaṇanti veditabbaṃ.
《库房羯磨等事》的解说。显示巴利原文
Bhaṇḍāgārasammutiādikathāvaṇṇanā
343 然而,据说:“这个‘库房’是不共的特征。”显示巴利原文
343.‘‘Idaṃ pana bhaṇḍāgāranti āveṇikalakkhaṇa’’nti vuttaṃ.
《染衣事》的解说。显示巴利原文
Cīvararajanakathāvaṇṇanā
344 在牛粪中无罪,但因丑陋相而被遮止。他们说:“红花是不允许的。”也有读作“Allikāya”的异读。显示巴利原文
344. Gomaye āpatti natthi, virūpattāvāritaṃ. ‘‘Kuṅkumapupphaṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Allikāyā’’tipi pāṭho atthi.
《允许坐具等事》的解说。显示巴利原文
Nisīdanādianujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
353 “不可能处”在此:由于在色蕴品中说“四生起”,故应审察:因无贪心,业生起并非不转起,或是当有贪缘时,业生起才存在,并应结合《论事》来把握。显示巴利原文
353.Aṭṭhānametanti ettha rūpakaṇḍe ‘‘catusamuṭṭhānika’’nti vuttattā kammasamuṭṭhānaṃ rāgacittābhāvā na muccatīti vā rāgapaccaye sati kammasamuṭṭhānaṃ hotīti vā vicāretvā gahetabbaṃ kathāvatthunā ca.
362 “仅以门闩防护为量”:以此四种安排的理由而做安排者,他的用意是:只可安排在设有门闩防护的住处。显示巴利原文
362.Aggaḷaguttiyeva pamāṇanti imehi catūhi nikkhepakāraṇehi ṭhapentena aggaḷaguttivihāreyeva ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo.
僧伽衣产生事解释显示巴利原文
Saṅghikacīvaruppādakathāvaṇṇanā
363 “若未敷展”:不应说“一衣月”。为何呢?因为没有“诸比丘,我允他们之衣乃至衣月”这样的话语。那么,未敷展咖提那者便未得允许吗?并非如此,因为前面已经允许过了,而这里是为了阐明其中隐晦之义,才这样说的。前文已说:“非时衣者,谓未敷展咖提那时,于十一个月中所生起者;已敷展咖提那时,于七个月中所生起者;虽是时中,亦特别指定而施者——此名为非时衣。”由此语可知,未敷展咖提那者于“一衣月”期间所生之衣,唯属他们,此义已然成立。所以这里不再说它,而说“乃至咖提那舍出”,正是为了阐明这一隐晦之义:即一人得三满众者,也能敷展咖提那。否则,此义便不能显现。有说:“应知,由持律者如此说,故他师才这么说。”已敷展者,于五月间一切唯属彼比丘,这是其中的关联。以绝对相属之义而使用业格。由于“此处雨安居僧团”已作限定,且在“我等施雨安居衣”这一句中,“此处”已被包含,故于他们所言之时即得。某一《本母》中说:“因于非时生起,又因临近衣时,且未敷展咖提那者与雨安居者也在开许之处,故而作如是说。”但也有人这样认为:对“此处雨安居僧团”乃至“未来之雨”这一句进行审察之后,应将“何以故?因于非时生起”这一句,写在后面“于彼,现前者一切皆得”的末尾。为什么呢?因为后文所说“从衣月开始,直至冬季……”显示巴利原文
363. No ce atthataṃ hoti ‘‘ekaṃ cīvaramāsa’’nti na vattabbaṃ. Kasmā? ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tasseva tāni cīvarāni yāva cīvaramāsā’’ti vacanassa abhāvato, tasmā anatthatakathinassa ananuññātanti ce? Na, heṭṭhā anuññātattā, tato līnatthadīpanatthamidha tathā vuttattā ca. Heṭṭhā hi ‘‘akālacīvaraṃ nāma anatthate kathine ekādasamāse uppannaṃ, atthate kathine sattamāse uppannaṃ, kālepi ādissa dinnaṃ, etaṃ akālacīvaraṃ nāmā’’ti (pārā. 500) vacanato anatthatakathinānaṃ ekacīvaramāse uppannaṃ, tesaṃyeva hotīti siddhaṃ, tasmā idha taṃ avatvā ekopi tayo gaṇapūrake labhitvā kathinaṃ attharituṃ labhatīti imaṃ līnatthaṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘‘yāva kathinassa ubbhārāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Itarathā ayamattho na ñāyati. ‘‘Jānitabboca vinayadharehīti tathā vuttoti apare’’ti vuttaṃ. Atthataṃ hoti, pañca māse sabbaṃ tasseva bhikkhuno hotīti sambandho. Accantasaṃyogavasena upayogavacanaṃ. ‘‘Idha vassaṃvutthasaṅghassā’’ti niyamitattā ‘‘vassāvāsikaṃ demā’’ti ettha ca ‘‘idhā’’ti adhikārattā tasmiṃ vutte labhati. ‘‘Piṭṭhisamaye uppannattāti cīvarakālassāsannattā ca anatthatakathinānampi vutthavassānañca anuññātaṭṭhānattā eva vutta’’nti aññatarasmiṃ gaṇṭhipade likhitaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘yaṃ pana idaṃ ‘idha vassaṃvutthasaṅghassā’tiādiṃ katvā yāva ‘anāgatavasse’ti padaṃ, tāva pucchitvā ‘kasmā? Piṭṭhisamaye uppannattā’ti idaṃ parato ‘tatra sammukhībhūtānaṃ sabbesaṃ pāpuṇātī’ti imassa pariyosāne ‘kasmā? Piṭṭhisamaye uppannattā’ti likhitabbaṃ. Kasmāti ce? Parato ‘cīvaramāsato paṭṭhāya yāva hemantassā’ti vuttena nibbisesattā, tasmā eva ekaccesu paṇḍitanti vadantī’’ti vadanti. Idha pana idha-saddena visesitaṃ, tattha natthi, tasmā aññamaññavirodho natthīti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Mayhimāni cīvarāni pāpuṇantī’’ti vacanamevādhiṭṭhānaṃ, idamettha ukkaṭṭhavasena vuttaṃ. ‘‘Mayhimāni cīvarānī’ti vuttepi adhiṭṭhitameva hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Mayhimānī’ti vutte tassa cīvarāni nāma natthi, tasmā ‘cīvarāni pāpuṇantī’ti vattabbamevā’’ti vadanti. Duggahitānīti saṅghikāneva honti. ‘‘Gahitameva nāmā’ti imassa idaṃ pattanti kiñcāpi na viditaṃ, te pana bhāgā tesaṃ atthato pattāyevāti adhippāyo’’ti likhitaṃ. ‘‘Ekasmiṃ apatite puna āgatā labhantī’’ti vuttaṃ.
乌巴难达释迦子事故事解释显示巴利原文
Upanandasakyaputtavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
364 “诸比丘,除已安居者外”——这是就衣时而作的遮止。若在一住处,言“如王家寺院,在各别院或此处安居者皆应获得”而作布施。又有记载说:“以七日事由,唯令明相出现”,这仅是口头说说,因为在一住处并无七日事。显示巴利原文
364. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, aññatra vassaṃvutthenā’’ti cīvarasamayaṃ upādāya paṭikkhepo kato .Ekasmiṃ vihāre ‘‘rājavihāre viya nānāpariveṇesu vā idha vā vutthā labhatū’’ti vatvā dinnaṃ. ‘‘Sattāhavārena aruṇameva uṭṭhāpetīti etaṃ vacanamattameva ekavihāre sattāhakiccābhāvā’’ti ca likhitaṃ.
亡者物事解释显示巴利原文
Matasantakakathāvaṇṇanā
369 “比丘的”:指比丘命终之时。其中,“钵与衣”是通过显示主要资具而表示一切资具,应当了知。有人说:这也是非法所得,因为命终之故,唯僧团方为适合。并非如此,这种想法与“钵四事中一切不适意钵”的原则相违。若比丘住在非法所得的坐卧处,则无犯。若某住处有二比丘同住,一人命终,另一人不令其资具离去,以盗心取之,则是盗取僧团之物,应按物值处罚。若在非住处取,则不应处罚,因为所取是无主物。若命终时不能言语,仅以心意作施,便能生福,僧团为其主人。或者,不可信赖者自行取用,其取得不成就,若以盗心取,则按物值处罚。那位住在住处者,谁是主人?有人说:“依‘僧团为主’之语,僧团应以强力遮止他。”有人说:“因为在生时已取,所以僧团不是主人。”若是主人亲自看见而能夺回,僧团亦能夺回,因为立于主人之位,其他师长说,应当审察而把握。显示巴利原文
369.Bhikkhussāti bhikkhusmiṃ kālaṃkate. Tattha ‘‘pattacīvare’’ti padhānaparikkhāradassanamukhena sabbaparikkhāranidassananti veditabbaṃ. Adhammena uppannañcetaṃ hoti, saṅghassa kappiyameva matattāti eke. Noti takko pattacatukke sabbathā akappiyapattanayavirodhato. Adhammena uppannasenāsane ca vasato anāpatti. Aññatarasmiṃ āvāse dve bhikkhū vasanti, tattha ceko kālaṃkato, itaro tassa parikkhāraṃ apāpetvā taṃ theyyacittena gaṇhāti, saṅghasantakaṃ gahitaṃ hoti, bhaṇḍagghena kāretabbo. Anāvāse gaṇhāti, na kāretabbo assāmikassa gahitattā. Maraṇasamaye vattuṃ asahanto ce citteneva deti, puññaṃ pasavati, saṅghova tassa sāmī. Paro vā avissāsiko sayameva gaṇhāti, gahaṇaṃ na ruhati, theyyacittena ce, bhaṇḍagghena kāretabbo. Tassa ca āvāsagatassa ko sāmī. ‘‘Saṅgho sāmī’’ti vacanato saṅghena balakkārena so vāretabboti eke. Jīvamānakāle gahitattā na saṅgho sāmīti eke. Sāmiko ce sayaṃ passitvā acchindituṃ labhati, saṅghopi labhati sāmiṭhāne ṭhitattāti itare, vicāretvā gahetabbaṃ.
亡者有金银等不适意物品,这也是被摄受的,于摄受时应依所说的方法处理。若是如法所得,则应告知净人。若被执为奴仆,僧团不是主人;若是园民,僧团是主人。若有牛、水牛等,属住处者僧团为主,不属住处者僧团不为主。若僧团将住处之物带至近处界外,作为己物而安置,则执事僧团为主,园民也是如此。亡者的资具若以寄存方式放置,则受托者为主。若价值高昂,则其余僧团为主。“由某瞻病者”这是显示应说的次第。再者,瞻病者众多时,为了显示一切应施之业,世尊在甘马语中说“诸瞻病者”。在沙弥章中读作“衣”。说“我以此施汝、与、授、奉献、舍离、放弃”,或说“施与某甲……乃至……放弃”,或在面前说、在背后说“已施”,施相即已表明;而当说“你取”时回应“我取”,取相也已表明,所谓“善施、善取”。因此,以“我物成为你与我共有”等语,可作成共资具,诸师说。显示巴利原文
Matakassa hiraññādiakappiyabhaṇḍaṃ hoti. Uggahitañcetaṃ hoti, uggahite vuttanayena paṭipajjitabbaṃ. Dhammena uppannaṃ ce, kappiyakārako ācikkhitabbo. Dāso ce gahito hoti, na saṅgho sāmī, ārāmiko ce, saṅgho sāmī. Gāvīmahiṃsīādayo honti, āvāsagatānaṃ saṅgho sāmī, anāvāsagatānaṃ na saṅgho sāmī. Saṅgho ce āvāsaṃ ānetvā attano santakaṃ katvā pacchā samīpe bahisīmāya ṭhapeti, kārakasaṅgho sāmī, tathā ārāmike. Matakassa parikkhāro nikkhepavasena ṭhapito hoti, esova sāmī. Mahaggho ce hoti, sesassa saṅgho sāmī. ‘‘Kenaci gilānupaṭṭhākenā’’ti vattabbakkamo etena dassito. Puna upaṭṭhākānaṃ bahubhāve sati sabbesaṃ dātabbakammaṃ dassentena bhagavatā kammavācāyaṃ ‘‘gilānupaṭṭhākāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Sāmaṇeravāre ‘‘cīvara’’nti pāṭho. ‘‘Imaṃ tuyhaṃ demi dadāmi dajjāmi oṇojemi pariccajāmi vissajjāmi nissajjāmī’ti vā ‘itthannāmassa demi…pe… nissajjāmī’ti vā vadati, ‘sammukhā vā parammukhā vā vutte dinnaṃyeva hotī’ti dānalakkhaṇassa ca ‘tuyhaṃ gaṇhāhī’ti vutte ‘mayhaṃ gaṇhāmī’ti vadati, ‘sudinnaṃ suggahitañcā’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469) gahaṇalakkhaṇassa ca vuttattā ‘mama santakaṃ tava ca mama ca hotū’ti evamādivacanena samānaparikkhāraṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti ācariyā’’ti likhitaṃ.
然而,在《附结》中,作了极为繁复的阐述后又这样说道:“关于此事,诸师长决定:如果众多或两位比丘愿作共用资具,他们将各自现有之物及未来所得,悉皆舍给一位可意者,他再舍还给他们。至此,他们便成为共用资具者。此共用资具之相,因含摄于圣典等所述之相中,故为决定不动;但因其掩蔽古规而说,应予遮止。若欲随顺师长之意而行,亦可行之,这是其他师长的说法。”又有说:“雨安居沙弥于五学处中犯一之后,复被摄受,不得利养,此名为犯根本事。”显示巴利原文
Anugaṇṭhipade pana atīva papañcaṃ katvā puna ‘‘idamettha ācariyānaṃ sanniṭṭhānaṃ – sacesambahulā, dve vā samānaparikkhāraṃ kattukāmā honti, te sabbe attano santakaṃ vattamānaṃ uppajjanakena saddhiṃ pesalassa ekassa pariccajanti, so puna tesameva pariccajati, ettāvatā te samānaparikkhārikā hontīti. Idaṃ samānaparikkhāralakkhaṇaṃ pāḷiādīsu vuttalakkhaṇeyeva patanato acalappattaṃ hoti, tathāpi porāṇavidhiṃ ajjhottharitvā vattanato paṭisedhetabbo, ācariyānaṃ matānusārena kātabbaṃ kātukāmenāti apare’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘vassaṃvutthasāmaṇero pañcasu sikkhāpadesu ekaṃ atikkamitvā puna gahito lābhaṃ na labhati, antimavatthuṃ ajjhāpanno nāma hotī’’ti vadanti.
雨安居者未生衣事解释显示巴利原文
Vassaṃvutthānaṃanuppannacīvarakathāvaṇṇanā
375 若衣已产生而尚未分配时离去——在此,即使已宣布“僧团同意从此处所得中给予每位比丘若干雨安居衣”,若他舍戒,则从此不得。纵使再出家、受具足戒后,期盼得到衣的分与,也因从原先的状态退失,终不可得。然而,若在衣已分配后舍戒,则可得衣。显示巴利原文
375.Uppanne cīvare abhājite pakkamatīti ettha ‘‘saṅghena tatruppādato ekekassa bhikkhuno ettakaṃ vassāvāsikaṃ dātuṃ saṅghassa ruccatī’’ti sāvitepi vibbhamati, tato na labhati, puna pabbajitvā upasampajjitvā cīvarabhājanaṃ sambhāventopi na labhatiyeva pubbapakatito bhaṭṭhattā. Atha pāpite vibbhamati, labhatī’’ti ca vuttaṃ.
僧团分裂时衣产生之语的注释显示巴利原文
Saṅghebhinnecīvaruppādakathāvaṇṇanā
376 “于他洲”,即指赡部洲洲。显示巴利原文
376.Parasamuddeti jambudīpe.
八衣总论之语的注释显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhacīvaramātikākathāvaṇṇanā
379 由于未经围隔、应当围隔之处难以了知,故说“又复”等语。其中,常集会之处也应视为属于边界之内。然据《大护持》所载:“若在比丘们中……乃至……得及,这是指‘我们在近行界内给与’这样给与的情形。”若说“于共住界”,则站在别住界等处者不得,因为那些是别别的共住界。共住界与不分离界有如此差别:若说“我于不分离界给与”,则不得及村界之处。何以故?因为说“除村及村近处外”。但若说“于共住界给与”,则于有不分离界之处站立者,以及于他处站立者,皆得及。有说:“于别住界站立而说‘我给与界内僧团’时,应唯以近行界为限而给与。”又有人说:“于别住界站立而说‘我于不分离界给与’时,即于彼处得及。”此处“乃至满百由旬而坐”,有说:寺院近处以手肘之距,村外等处则以十二手肘为近行。有说:“若说‘于此寺院给与僧团’,即使处于同一围隔之内,超越围隔及应围隔之处而站立者不得及。”有说:“从比丘尼寺院外任何处站立而说‘给与僧团’时,比丘僧团为所有者。”关于“一人去”,此处应使所有人得及而后去,或者取来而使得及,否则去者不得及。若有根本住处显示巴利原文
379. Yasmā aparikkhittassa parikkhepārahaṭṭhānaṃ dubbijānaṃ, tasmā ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha dhuvasannipātaṭṭhānampi pariyantagatameva gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana bhikkhūsupi…pe… pāpuṇātīti ‘upacārasīmāya demā’ti evaṃ dinnameva sandhāyā’’ti likhitaṃ . ‘‘Samānasaṃvāsakasīmāyā’’ti vutte khaṇḍasīmādīsu ṭhitānaṃ na pāpuṇāti tāsaṃ visuṃ samānasaṃvāsakasīmattā. Samānasaṃvāsakaavippavāsasīmānaṃ idaṃ nānattaṃ – ‘‘avippavāsasīmāya dammī’’ti dinnaṃ gāmaṭṭhānaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Kasmā? ‘‘Ṭhapetvā gāmañca gāmūpacārañcā’’ti vuttattā. ‘‘Samānasaṃvāsakasīmāyā’’ti dinnaṃ pana yasmiṃ ṭhāne avippavāsasīmā atthi, tattha ṭhitānaṃ, itaratra ṭhitānañca pāpuṇāti. ‘‘Khaṇḍasīmāyaṃ ṭhatvā ‘sīmaṭṭhakasaṅghassa dammī’ti vutte upacārasīmāya eva paricchinditvā dātabba’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Avippavāsasīmāya demā’’ti khaṇḍasīmāyaṃ ṭhatvā dinne tattheva pāpuṇātīti keci. Yojanasatampi pūretvā nisīdantīti ettha vihārūpacāre hatthapāsena, bahigāmādīsu dvādasahatthena upacāroti eke. ‘‘Imasmiṃ vihāre saṅghassā’’ti vutte ekābaddhā hutvāpi parikkhepaparikkhepārahaṭṭhānaṃ atikkamitvā ṭhitānaṃ na pāpuṇātīti eke. ‘‘Bhikkhunivihārato bahi yattha katthaci ṭhatvā ‘saṅghassā’ti vutte bhikkhusaṅghova sāmī’’ti vadanti. Ekopi gantvāti ettha sabbesaṃ vā pāpetvā gantabbaṃ, ānetvā vā pāpetabbaṃ, itarathā gatassa na pāpuṇāti. Samānalābhakatikā mūlāvāse sati siyā, mūlāvāsavināsena katikāpi vinassati. Samānalābhavacanaṃ sati dvīsu, bahūsu vā yujjati. Teneva ekasmiṃ avasiṭṭhe yujjatīti no mati.
或以暂时因缘,或以断根因缘;
他人之业属于他人,或非住处之结合。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tāvakālikakālena, mūlacchedavasena vā; Aññesaṃ kammaṃ aññassa, siyā nāvāsasaṅgamo’’ti. –
于一切处皆已施与,故说“成为同分”。有人说:“若说‘我们每人各得一份’,则是可以的”,因为已作分配。有人说:“衣已施与比丘僧团时,粪扫衣者不可得。”若说“给与二部僧团”,因未说“给与比丘僧团”,且与比丘尼僧团相混,又因个人未包含于其中,故个人别得。若如此,是否与“若说‘我给与比丘僧团及比丘尼僧团’,即是给与二部僧团”相违?不相违,那只是表明给与两个僧团的事实,并非二部僧团的施设,因此没有“给与比丘僧团、比丘尼僧团及你”的选项。或有人说:“应以注释书之言为准,不应推论。”因为一位比丘不像半途等处那样有两种情形,故“二部僧团”一词不包含一位比丘。有人说:“若说‘给与一切住处、塔及法’,则于一切寺院,应施与塔与法各一位比丘的份额。”若说“给与比丘僧团及塔”,是否相违?不,因为那里说了“比丘僧团”,而此处因与住处结合,故于各个住处应各得一份,他们如此回避。关于“使归于自己”:若因非时不得受用,即使全部也不可行吗?因说“送往比丘僧团”,且以“我送”而执取,故不可。关于“后安居者亦”:此处“亦”字是决定义,意为“唯”。显示巴利原文
Sabbattha dinnamevāti ‘‘samānabhāgova hotī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Ekamekaṃ amhākaṃ pāpuṇātīti ce vadati, vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti vibhāgassa katattā. ‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghassa cīvare dinne paṃsukūlikānaṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Ubhatosaṅghassā’’ti vutte ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghassā’’ti avuttattā bhikkhunisaṅghena missitattā, tattha apariyāpannattā ca puggalo visuṃ labhati. Evaṃ sante ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghassa ca bhikkhunisaṅghassa ca dammī’’ti vuttepi ‘‘ubhatosaṅghassa dinnameva hotī’’ti iminā virujjhatīti ce? Na virujjhati, taṃ dvinnaṃ saṅghānaṃ dinnabhāvameva dīpeti, na ubhatosaṅghapaññattiṃ, tasmā eva ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghassa ca bhikkhunisaṅghassa ca tuyhañcā’’ti vāro na vutto. Atha vā aṭṭhakathāvacanameva pamāṇaṃ, na vicāraṇāti eke. Yasmā eko addhānādiyako viya duvidho na hoti, tasmā ubhatosaṅghaggahaṇena eko bhikkhu na gahitoti . ‘‘Sabbāvāsassa ca cetiyassa ca dhammassa cā’ti vutte sabbavihāresu cetiyadhammānaṃ ekekassa bhikkhuno bhāgo dātabbo’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghassa ca cetiyassa cā’’ti vutte na virujjhatīti ce? Na, tattha ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghassā’’ti vuttattā, idha vihārena ghaṭitattā ca tamhi tamhi vihāre ekabhāgaṃ labhitabbamevāti pariharanti. Attano pāpetvāti vikāle aparibhogattā sakalopi vaṭṭeyyāti ce? ‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghassa harā’’ti vuttattā, tena ‘‘harāmī’’ti gahitattā ca na vaṭṭati. Pacchimavassaṃvutthānampīti ettha api-saddo avadhāraṇattho, pacchimavassaṃvutthānamevāti attho, itarathā samuccayatthe gahite ‘‘lakkhaṇaññū vadantī’’ti vacanaṃ niratthakaṃ siyā. Kasmāti ārabhitvā papañcaṃ karonti. Kiṃ tena, parato ‘‘cīvaramāsato paṭṭhāya…pe… atītavassaṃvutthānameva pāpuṇātī’’ti iminā siddhattā na vicāritaṃ, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘lakkhaṇaññū’’ti acalavasena. Sace pana bahiupacārasīmāya ṭhito…pe… sampattānaṃ sabbesaṃ pāpuṇātīti yattha katthaci vutthavassānanti adhippāyo ‘‘yattha katthaci vutthavassānaṃ sabbesaṃ sampattānaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. akālacīvarasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) kaṅkhāvitaraṇiyaṃ vuttattā. Gimhānaṃ paṭhamadivasato paṭṭhāya vutte pana yasmā anantarātītaṃ hemantaṃ eva vutthā nāma honti, na vassaṃ, tasmā ‘‘mātikā āropetabbā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ye vā therehi pesitā, tesaṃ pāpuṇātīti kira attho.
九、瞻波犍度注释显示巴利原文
9. Campeyyakkhandhakavaṇṇanā
二驱出等之语的注释显示巴利原文
Dvenissāraṇādikathāvaṇṇanā
395 “未达驱出”:此处,驱出唯独允许对污家者施行,而此人并非污家者,故说“未达”。若如此,如何才是善驱出者?因《小品》中说:“若僧团愿意,可作驱出羯磨。”由“对应行恶见恶行者而行恶见恶行羯磨”之语,应知这两者结成循环。显示巴利原文
395.Appattonissāraṇanti ettha nissāraṇaṃ nāma kuladūsakānaṃyeva anuññātaṃ, ayaṃ pana kuladūsako na hoti, tasmā ‘‘appatto’’ti vutto. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ sunissārito hotīti? Cūḷavagge ‘‘ākaṅkhamāno saṅgho pabbājanīyakammaṃ kareyyā’’ti (cūḷava. 27) vuttattā. ‘‘Tassapāpiyasikakammārahassa tassapāpiyasikakammaṃ karontī’’ti vacanato cakkaṃ bandhanti ñātabbaṃ.
优波离问之语的注释显示巴利原文
Upālipucchākathāvaṇṇanā
400 “Parato ti upālipucchato para”已有记载。在《罪起》巴利中说:“未满二十岁者不来,因事坏故。”应知在此瞻波犍度中,是将非法羯磨分作二种而成五种来者。因此,在《附随》中对此犍度说“五种非法者”。由“盲、哑、聋者被驱摈”此句,成立即使未出家者,其达上亦得成就。显示巴利原文
400.‘‘Paratoti upālipucchato para’’nti likhitaṃ. Dosāritapāḷiyaṃ ‘‘ūnavīsativasso na āgato vippannavatthukattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Imasmiṃ campeyyakkhandhake adhammakammāniyeva dvidhā katvā pañcāgatānīti veditabbaṃ. Teneva parivāre imasmiṃ khandhake ‘‘pañca adhammikānī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Andhamūgabadhiro sosārito’’ti iminā apabbajitassapi upasampadā ruhatīti siddhaṃ.
10. 憍赏弥犍度注释显示巴利原文
10. Kosambakakkhandhakavaṇṇanā
憍赏弥争论说注释显示巴利原文
Kosambakavivādakathāvaṇṇanā
451 “经师”:此处虽说到“持律者、持本母者”,然是就两部分别而言,并非持犍度者。贤友,此处依“有罪”之语,而说“他对该罪持有罪见”。后来持律者忆念“有事实时以事实为量,非以制戒为量”,对该罪持有罪见,故最后说“其他比丘对该罪持有罪见”。显示巴利原文
451.Suttantikoti ettha kiñcāpi ‘‘vinayadharo mātikādharo’’ti vuttaṃ, ubhatovibhaṅgaṃ pana sandhāya vuttaṃ, na khandhakabhāṇako hoti. Āvuso ettha āpattīti vacanaṃ upādāya ‘‘so tassā āpattiyā āpattidiṭṭhi hotī’’ti vuccati. Pacchā vinayadharo ‘‘vatthumhi sati pamāṇaṃ, na paññattiya’’nti satiṃ paṭilabhitvā tassā āpattiyā āpattidiṭṭhi ahosi, tena vuttaṃ ante ‘‘aññe bhikkhū tassā āpattiyā āpattidiṭṭhino hontī’’ti.
455 “如我所白”:因是单数,故写作“已制”。显示巴利原文
455. ‘‘Yathā mayā ñattī’’ti likhanti ‘‘paññattā’’ti ekavacanattā.
长寿命本生事说注释显示巴利原文
Dīghāvuvatthukathāvaṇṇanā
458 “诸比丘,过去在波罗奈有位梵授王”——这是注疏中所写的。然而古本中并无“波罗奈”一词,他们说“无此词更好”。显示巴利原文
458. ‘‘Bhūtapubbaṃ, bhikkhave, bārāṇasiyaṃ brahmadatto’’ti likhanti. Purāṇapotthakesu ‘‘bārāṇasiya’’nti natthi, ‘‘natthibhāvova sundaro’’ti vadanti.
波利离耶行去事说注释显示巴利原文
Pālileyyakagamanakathāvaṇṇanā
467 “守护林”:这是结集长老为使易解而作此说。也有人说“波利离耶是村名,依此村而说”,这与《法句注》的说法并不相违。显示巴利原文
467.Rakkhitavanasaṇḍeti saṅgītittherehi suviññeyyaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pālileyyoti gāmo, tassa vasenā’’tipi vadanti, taṃ dhammapadaṭṭhakathāya na virujjhati.
十八事说注释显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhārasavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
473 “然而……我说不应遮止”:此处,若有人遮止应得坐卧处者之坐卧处,他便犯恶作。若对好争吵者等说“此处没有空闲”这类僧团规约后,并未告知对方,便自称“我是佛”,仗势自行分配取用;或者说“你们如法取用”而进行遮止,则无过失。这里对于为了平息争吵而来的憍赏弥比丘,也不说“依戒腊次第”,而说“如果没有空闲处,应设法腾出空闲处再给予”。若据此腾出空闲处后给予,却又加以遮止,据说则有罪。此中义理,当以允许别住者等获得寺院周边而成立——注疏中如此记载。显示巴利原文
473.Natveva…pe… paṭibāhitabbanti vadāmīti ettha senāsanārahassa yo senāsanaṃ paṭibāhati, tasseva āpatti dukkaṭassa. ‘‘Kalahakārakādīnamettha okāso natthītiādikaṃ saṅghassa katikaṃ vatvā taṃ na paññāpentassa vā ‘ahaṃ buddho’ti pasayha attanā attano paññāpetvā gaṇhantaṃ ‘yuttiyā gaṇhathā’ti vatvā vārentassa vā doso natthi. Idha kalahavūpasamanatthaṃ āgatānaṃ kosambikānampi ‘yathāvuḍḍha’nti avatvā ‘vivitte asati vivittaṃ katvāpi dātabba’nti vuttattā vivittaṃ katvā dentaṃ paṭibāhentasseva āpattīti kira ayamattho pārivāsikādīnaṃ vihārapariyantadāpanena sādhitabbo’’ti likhitaṃ.
僧伽和合说注释显示巴利原文
Saṅghasāmaggīkathāvaṇṇanā
475 那时,那些追随被举者的比丘,在将被举的比丘解罪之后,来到举罪的比丘们处……说:“为平息此事,我等令僧团和合。” 此言对于通达律相者而言,其决断是难以了知的。因为当有作羯磨的僧团存在时,其他僧团便不得为之解罪。若强行解罪,那些比丘由于与作羯磨僧团成为同见者,便与之成为共住;由此,未取得举罪者之欲而解罪者,其羯磨即成坏法。因此,依世尊“诸比丘,你们应这样解除此比丘之罪”(《大品》474)的教示,是追随被举者之众解罪呢?还是出界外解罪呢?或是取得他人之欲而解罪呢?难道不应有其中一种方式吗?然而,此义于一切结颂处皆未广作分别。此处的推论如下——显示巴利原文
475. ‘‘Atha kho te ukkhittānuvattakā bhikkhū taṃ ukkhittakaṃ bhikkhuṃ osāretvā yena ukkhepakā bhikkhū…pe… tassa vatthussa vūpasamāya saṅghasāmaggiṃ karomā’’ti vacanaṃ duviññeyyavinicchayaṃ vinayalakkhaṇakusalassa. Vijjamāne hi kārakasaṅghe itaro saṅgho osārituṃ na labhati. Osārento ce, te bhikkhū kārakasaṅghena samānaladdhikabhāvaṃ pattattā tena samānasaṃvāsakā honti, tato ukkhepakānaṃ chandaṃ aggahetvā osārentānaṃ kammaṃ kuppati, tasmā ‘‘tena hi, bhikkhave, taṃ bhikkhuṃ osārethā’’ti (mahāva. 474) bhagavato vacanena ukkhittānuvattakā osāresuṃ, udāhu nissīmaṃ gantvā, udāhu itaresaṃ chandaṃ gahetvā osāresuṃ, nanu etesamaññatarenettha bhavitabbaṃ, na ca panetaṃ sabbagaṇṭhipadesu vicāritaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha takko –
若僧团已作羯磨的比丘,于彼事中,
在此事尚存之际,由他人来解罪则不应理。
当过失止息之际,僧团虽非造作者,然因羯磨的作者随顺,故堪能解罪。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ saṅghena, katakammassa bhikkhuno; Sati tasmiṃ na aññassa, paṭippassambhanaṃ khamaṃ. ‘‘Viramante tato doso, api saṅgho akārako; Osāretuṃ alaṃ yasmā, kārako anulomiko’’ti.
477 “八种使者支”者,即能听、能令听、能受持、能忆持、能解、能令解、善巧、了知合宜与不合宜、不兴诤论者——此已说。显示巴利原文
477. ‘‘Aṭṭha dūtaṅgāni nāma sotā ca hoti, sāvetā ca uggahetā ca dhāretā ca viññātā ca viññāpetā ca kusalo ca sahitāsahitadassano ca akalahakārako cāti etānī’’ti vuttaṃ.